Pedagogical Departments

Academic

Development and

Curriculum

Teaching Resources

and Audio-visual Aids

Student Assessment

Others

Academic Affairs

Class Organisation

Curriculum

Allocation of Periods

and Timetabling

Textbooks

Homework Policy

Tests and Examination

Library

Tutorial Class

Substitution of Lessons

School Calendar

ACADEMIC AFFAIRS

A) Pedagogical Departments A1-4 1) Structure

2) Meetings

B) Academic Development and Curriculum B1-18 1) Class Organisation

2) Curriculum

i) General Plan

ii) Medium of Instruction

iii) Remedial Teaching

iv) Extensive Reading Scheme ( English, Chinese)

v) F.1 Bridging Course

3) Allocation of Periods and Timetabling

4) Textbooks

5) Library

i) Library Regulation

ii) Purchase of books and other relevant teaching materials

iii) Reading Scheme

iv) Library Services

v) Student Librarians

C) Teaching Resources and Audio-visual Aids C1-10 1) General Policy

2) Subject Inventory

3) Audio-visual Aids

4) Hall Sound System

D) Student Assessment D1-27 1) General Policy

2) Homework Policy

3) Test and Examination (Internal)

i) General Guidelines and Arrangement

ii) Timetabling and Invigilation Arrangement

4) Hong Kong Attainment Tests (Junior Secondary)

5) External Examination (HKCE, HKAL)

i) Students’ Application

ii) Invigilation and School Premises Arrangement

iii) Release of Results

E) Others E1-7 1) Tutorial Class

2) Substitution of Lessons

3) School Calendar

4) Teaching Practice

Acad.Aff. A 1

PEDAGOGICAL DEPARTMENTS : STRUCTURE

Academic Committee i/c (Vice Principal)

English Language

Chinese Language

Chinese History

History

Geography

Liberal Studies

Principles of Accounts

Physics

Chemistry

Biology

Integrated Science

Computer and Information Technology

Design and Technology

Home Economics

Visual Arts

Music

Physical Education

Economics

Moral and Civic Ed.

Integrated Humanities

Mathematics

Putonghua

Acad.Aff. A 2

PEDAGOGICAL DEPARTMENTS: MEETINGS

I) Purposes

a) Panel Heads meeting

1) review and evaluate the existing curricula and make proposal for Principal’s approval;

2) evaluate the academic results of external examinations and internal assessment; 3) discuss and evaluate the school policy on academic affairs; 4) co-ordinate the annual academic programme of different panels in order to

minimize the clash of time and ensure an even distribution of activities throughout the year.

5) allocate school funds on the purchase of teaching resources, furniture and equipment;

6) update and discuss any new educational issues by the external educational bodies; and

7) give response and comments to external education bodies such as EMB, HKEAA, CDI, tertiary institutes… … … etc.

b) Panel Meeting

1) discuss and decide the curricula, objectives, contents and teaching strategies of different forms so as to ensure effective and efficient teaching and learning;

2) discuss with other subject panels the possibilities of across subjects curriculum; 3) evaluate and update the curricula on a regular basis and be aware of the trend of

change; 4) discuss matters related to student assessment; 5) discuss and decide subject-related extracurricular activities in order to stimulate

and develop students’ interest and potential in the subject; 6) allocate duties to panel members after careful discussion so as to ensure a fair

distribution of workload; 7) inform subject teachers of the catalogue and application of existing teaching

resources, update and purchase when required; 8) ensure panel members be aware of the subject-related seminars, workshops,

meetings and training both inside and outside school; 9) discuss matters related to teachers' appraisal; 10) evaluate teaching method from time to time and discuss possible ways of

improvement on teaching; 11) review textbook list and make comparison when required; 12) evaluate the annual programme plan and make proposal and decision for next

academic year; and 13) discuss any change in the development of subject and curriculum and make

proposal to the Principal.

Acad.Aff. A 3

II) Guidelines

a) Frequency : at least 3 times in a year.

1) First Meeting – before the commencement of the new school year 2) Last Meeting – before the breaking up of Summer Vacation 3) Several meetings throughout the year

b) Matters to be discussed in meetings:

1) First Meeting:

i) annual programme plan finalised and endorsed; ii) teaching syllabus, teaching strategies of each form and subject; iii) discuss teaching method, use of teaching resources, ETV etc; iv) discuss and decide the homework policy and the marking of student

assignment policy; v) discuss matters related to student assessment: test and examination, etc; vi) evaluate external examination results (HKAL, HKCEE); vii) allocate duties among teachers; viii) report and evaluate students’ performance in F.4 summer tutorial class, if

applicable; ix) discuss the safety measures in special rooms, if applicable; and x) induction to new teachers when required.

2) Other Meetings Throughout the Year:

i) review the progress of teaching and activities; ii) evaluate students’ learning behaviour and effectiveness; iii) discuss the problems encountered in teaching; iv) discuss and comment on the test/ examination paper; v) evaluate the result of test / examination; vi) discuss the textbook list for the next academic year; vii) review the annual programme plan, expenditure, make proposal of

programme plan and budget for next year; viii) report of observation of lessons and marking of students’ assignment in

teacher appraisal; ix) review of allocation of periods in each form; x) review of existing curricula and syllabi, streaming and remedial teaching

policy; xi) stock checking – report of any deletion and addition of teaching aids and

resources, furniture and equipment; and xii) discuss any related school policy.

Acad.Aff. A 4

3) Last Meeting : Annual Evaluation Meeting

i) review and evaluate the annual performance of students in the subject; ii) decide list of students for tutorial or remedial teaching if applicable ; iii) formulate list of F.4 students for tutorial class in summer; iv) propose teachers and time table for tutorial classes in summer; v) allocate duties and work of the subject in summer vacation; vi) decide summer vacation exercise / assignment for each form; vii) discuss the F.6 admission criteria; viii) overall review of teachers’ performance, sharing of teaching experience; ix) make proposal to Principal for teachers professional development in the

next academic year; x) discuss and propose the allocation of teaching duties for the next academic

year among teachers to Principal; and xi) finalise the next annual programme plan.

c) Before the meeting:

1) Inform members of the date and agenda of the meeting at least three days before

the meeting; 2) Booking of room in advance; and 3) Necessary information and materials should be ready.

d) At the meeting:

1) Panel head / academic committee i/c is expected to preside the meeting; 2) Each member of the meeting should be punctual; 3) Members attending the meeting are encouraged to voice out their opinion; 4) Minutes of the meeting should be taken by an appointed member; and 5) Sometimes, final decision is made by voting.

e) After the meeting:

1) The minutes of the meeting should be typed and filed; 2) A copy of the minutes to be handed in for Principal perusal; 3) Each member of the meeting should have a copy of the minutes; and 4) Members concerned should follow the instructions and decision made. Any

violation should be avoided.

f) Vice Principal is allowed to sit in any of the panel meetings.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the Academic Committee after consultation

with the Principal.

Acad.Aff. B1

CLASS ORGANIZATION There are a total of 31 classes in operation. The class organization is as follows:

1. There are 5 classes each for F.1 to F.5

2. There are 3 classes each for F.6 & F.7

CURRICULUM

The school offers the following curriculum that prepares students for the JSEA, HKCEE

& the HKALE.

For F.1 to F.3, we offer a common core curriculum of the 8 learning areas.

For F.4 and F.5, we offer curriculum of different combination of subjects. There is a

total of 15 different combinations in which. They normally take 8 subjects out of 16 subjects

provided.

While for F.6 and F.7, we offer curriculum in which they either take 3ALs, or 2ALs +

1AS in addition to the subjects: Use of English and Chinese Language and Culture.

4A*, 4B* --- same subject has lesson at same time by same teacher. (combined class)

Acad.Aff. B2

ENGLISH AS THE MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION (EMI)

I) Purposes

a) coordinate the use and teaching of English across the curriculum and across the different

levels; and b) promote the use of English inside as well as outside the classroom.

II) Guidelines

a) English is adopted as the medium of Instruction in the school. b) All subjects except Chinese Language, Chinese Literature, Chinese Language and Culture,

Chinese History, Putonghua and Moral & Civic Education should be taught in English. c) It is all teachers’ responsibility to teach English in the context of their subjects. d) An atmosphere to use English should be promoted in the school. e) Teachers and students are advised to use English in the classroom and encouraged to use

English outside the classroom as well. f) School circulars and documents, together with publicity including that of co-curricular

activities, should be written or conducted in English. g) Coordination work should be done among the different panels and the different subject

teachers in each form in the use of English in teaching. h) If necessary, meetings among panel heads and subject teachers involved should be held to

coordinate the use of English in the teaching of the subjects. i) Two to four teachers will be sent to refresher courses every year to better equip them for

the use of English in teaching.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation with the Principal.

Acad.Aff. B3

REMEDIAL TEACHING (F.1-3)

I) Purposes

a) provide greater attention to individual weaknesses and needs of the students; b) help them learn to the best of their ability ; and c) bring them back into the mainstream classes as far as possible.

II) Guidelines

a) Remedial teaching is applicable to Chinese Language, English Language and Mathematics in F. 1-3 only.

b) Weaker students are to be grouped into smaller classes with not more than 20 students each.

c) The number of remedial groups in each form is to be decided by the panels and the school administration.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration and the panels involved only after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures a) Remedial class teachers should possess subject expertise and experience. b) Teaching programme should build on what students already possess and bridge any gaps

in their knowledge. c) Teachers in the same form should agree on the core items to be covered in the scheme of

work. d) A common examination paper should be based on the core items specified and non-core or

optional items should not figure more then 20-30% so that the remedial class students can score reasonably well too.

e) Students’ weaknesses should be identified at the beginning of the academic year and assessed at the end of the year.

f) Record should be kept on their performance and assessment (formative and summative) results throughout the year.

Acad.Aff. B4

EXTENSIVE READING SCHEME (ENGLISH)

I) Purposes

a) encourage students to read more books;

b) provide teachers’ guidance and assistance in extensive reading; and

c) promote reading habits among the students.

II) Guidelines

a) English Extensive Reading Scheme (ERS) is a three-year self- learning course with teacher

guidance.

b) ERS should be integrated into the F.1-3 curriculum.

c) There should be ERS lessons in the junior forms, two in F.1-2 and one in F.3.

d) The lessons should be conducted in the library, each with half a class (while the other half

should stay in the classroom for their oral lesson).

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration and the English panel only after

consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures a) All the books should be kept in book boxes according to their levels in the library. b) The books and cards should be stock checked at the end of each academic year. c) Students should borrow the books, read the books, answer the questions and check the

answers all by themselves. d) Students should be responsible for the books they borrow. e) Records should be kept on reading progress. f) Grades should be given to students in the half-yearly exam and final exam with reference

to their performance in class and in reading. g) Rewards would be given to the best readers.

Acad.Aff. B5

中 文 廣 泛 閱 讀 計 劃

I) 目的

1) 培養學生良好的閱讀習慣,提高閱讀能力； 2) 吸取語文養分,增強語文能力；及 3) 訓練學生獨立思考,加強分析能力。

II) 計劃指引

1) 實施對象

---中一至中三年級學生

2) 閱讀分量

---按教學課程編排,學生於每一學年內最少需讀課外書籍五本,分別為上學期兩本,學期三本,合共五本。

3) 閱讀進度

繳 交 日 期 讀 物 類 別 上 10 月 份 指 定 讀 物 學 期 12 月 份 自 選 讀 物 下 3 月 份 指 定 讀 物 學 4 月 份 自 選 讀 物 期 5 月 份 指 定 讀 物

4) 閱讀指導

---在學生閱讀之前,教師宜撥出若干教節,在課堂上介紹閱讀的方法和重點,以指導學生掌握閱讀各類作品的門徑,收事半功倍之效。

5) 閱讀活動

---老師除要求學生繳交習作或讀書報告外,亦可於教學時間充裕情況下,在課堂上安排適當的閱讀後活動,例如分組討論、角色扮演、介紹作者、推介書籍,講述閱讀心得等,藉以提高學生的閱讀興趣。

Acad.Aff. B6

6) 藏書位置

---上述圖書盒均存放於四樓圖書館辦公室內，老師於使用時著學生前往搬取，用畢後務請放口原處。

7) 借閱手續

---煩請老師以學校人名單為學生辦理簡單借閱手續，以便一旦書籍損毀或遺失，亦可追究有關借閱者。(若書籍嚴重損毀甚或遺失，借閱者需照價賠償。)

III) 釐定計劃基本原則

---本計劃由科主任擬訂，並已就此向有關老師作出諮詢。 ---日後如要修改上述計劃，事前必須召開科務會議，獲得老師一致通過，方可生效。

IV) 實施程序 甲) 指定讀物

i) 閱書數量

---上學期 1 本,下學期 2 本,合共 3本。 ii) 讀物編排

---有關指定讀物,編排如下: S 1

( FM ) S 2 ( PL )

S 4 ( FM )

S 5 ( P L )

S 3* ( C H )

S 6* ( M K)

1 E ( P L )

上 學 期

推 盒

廣 盒

閱 盒

讀 盒

振 盒

興 盒

中 盒

下 學 期

廣 盒

推 盒

讀 盒

閱 盒

興 盒

振 盒

文 盒

iii) 報告形式

---讀畢書籍後,學生必須完成《指定讀物問答紙》

iv) 批核工作 ---為減輕老師沈重之工作量,中文學會特贈設閱讀小導師計劃,旨在協助老師批核《指定讀物問答紙》之工作。在計劃下,每位任教老師均編有兩至六名閱讀小導師。

Acad.Aff. B7

乙) 自選讀物

i) 閱書數量 ---上學期一本,下學期一本,合共兩本。

ii) 讀物選擇

---學生可依據個人的興趣,自由選擇自己喜愛的讀物。 ---原則上雖由學生自選讀物,但如有需要,老師可因應學生的實況(如語文程度、閱讀興趣等),推介適合的讀物。

iii) 繳交報告

---讀畢書籍後,學生必須寫作讀書報告乙份。

iv) 報告字數 l 內容簡介:不少於一百字 l 讀後感不少於二百字

v) 批改工作

---由任教老師負責批閱,並給予適當評語及分數。

vi) 參與比賽 ---老師宜鼓勵學生參加由教育署或其他機構團體所舉辦的閱讀報告比賽。

Acad.Aff. B8

F.1 BRIDGING COURSE

I) Purposes

a) build up students’ confidence in learning in English;

b) provide students with knowledge of the medium of instruction i.e. English in each subject

involved; and

c) bridge the gap between the Chinese medium at primary level and the English medium at

secondary level.

II) Guidelines

a) The course is to be co-organized by the school & PTA.

b) External service provider ins seclected.

c) All potential F.1 students are eligible.

d) The course should be held in August, lasting for two to three weeks.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration and the panels involved only

after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Recruitment should be held during the registration period in July.

b) The number of students in each class is limited to 20.

c) The course materials should be prepared by the course provider and distributed to the

students on the first lesson.

Acad.Aff. B9

ALLOCATION OF PERIODS AND TIME-TABLING

I) Purposes

a) allocate appropriate number of periods for each subject of each form in order to have the smooth running of the various curricula provided;

b) arrange teachers to teach subjects they specialize in; c) allow a fair sharing of teaching periods among staff; d) assign Form Teacher and Deputy Form Teacher (F.1-F.4 only) to each class; and e) prepare class timetable, personal timetable of each teacher and special room lessons

timetable before the commencement of each academic year.

II) Guidelines

a) Adjust the table of the allocation of periods (Appendix 1,Appendix 2) when required: 1) addition / deletion of subjects in certain curriculum; 2) provision of split classes; and 3) reasonable recommendation from E.D. Inspector/Subject Panel.

b) Teachers should teach subjects they specialise in. c) Teachers who are in charge of discipline, student counselling, careers guidance, ECA,

computer service would have a few periods less than other normal teachers. d) Teaching periods of a subject should be distributed evenly in the class timetable. e) Teaching periods of cultural subjects should spread evenly in the class timetable f) Teaching load of a teacher should be distributed evenly over the week:

1) no ‘four consecutive lessons’ in the first four periods. 2) at most one day having seven lessons. 3) at most three days having 3 lessons in the afternoon.

g) Special requirements by subject panel/ teachers should be observed, such as 1) avoid remedial classes lessons in the first period; 2) no P.E. lessons in the first two periods; 3) P.E. lessons for F.1 and F.2 in the afternoon; and 4) laboratory sessions for F.6 and F.7 in the afternoon.

h) Avoid too many split classes in the same period so that there are enough classrooms for lessons.

i) Special attention should be paid to the availability and allocation of special rooms and classrooms.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation with the

Principal.

Acad.Aff. B10

IV) Procedures a) The following information must be ready for reference before the construction of the

timetable

1) Teaching staff establishment of current year and staff list confirmed. 2) Period of allocation for all classes in the new academic term confirmed. 3) The approved summary table which shows the allocation of teachers to each subject

of each class/group, form teacher of each class, split classes, combined and parallel classes is ready.

4) Special request of teachers, with the approval from the Principal. 5) Special request by subject panel on the arrangement of periods of subjects. 6) Other restrictions for timetabling.

b) Timetabling team starts to work using time-tabling application in SAMS.

c) The followings are worked out:

1) timetable for each class. 2) timetable for each teacher. 3) timetable for each special room 4) room allocation for each period of each class 5) composite timetable of all classes 6) composite timetable of all staff.

d) Copies of timetables for each class, teachers and special rooms… … .etc should be ready for distribution before the first staff meeting.

e) The timetable should be on trial for one teaching cycle.

f) Amendments should be made during the trial period.

g) After the trial period, specified copies of teacher’s personal timetable and class timetable

will be submitted to E.D. for filing purpose.

h) Composite timetables for all classes, all staff and room allocation are posted up in each staff room for teachers’ reference.

Acad.Aff. B11

Ho Lap College (2006-2007) - Allocation of Periods for Teachers:

Sub/Class F.1A F.1B F.1C F.1D F.1E F.2A F.2B F.2C F.2D F.2E F.3A F.3B F.3C F.3D F.3E F.4A F.4B F.4C F.4D F.4E F.5A F.5B F.5C F.5D F.5E F.6A F.6B F.6C F.7A F.7B F.7C

English7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 7 7

L.A./Oral1 1 1 1 1

Chinese6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Putonghua2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Chi. Lit. SY SK

4 4 4 7 # 7Chi. Cult.

5 6 6 5 6 6

Maths.5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Add. Maths.4 4 4 4

Pure Maths.

App. Maths.# 4 # 5 # 5 # 4

Maths&Stat.# 5 #5 # 5 # 5

Science4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Physics PO2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 9 9 9 9

Chemistry M C2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 # 9 9 # 9 9

Biology2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 9 9

I.H.

MCE2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

History LY/YU LY/YU2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 # 4 # 3 # 4 # 3

Geography MA/YY MA/YY

2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 3Eco MS MS

4 4 4 4 4 4 7Chi. Hist. CP CP

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4

Account WW4 4

Computer SS / TS#4 # 4 #4 # 4 #4 #4

D & T#2 # 2 #2 #2 # 2 #2 #2 # 2 #2 #2 # 2 #2 #2 # 2 #2

Art KM/YL WK/PU2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 #4 # 4 # 4

Music1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

PE2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Study Skill1 1 1 1 1

Form Period1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Total 42 4 2 42 42 4 2 42 4 2 42 42 4 2 4 2 42 42 4 2 42 4 2 42 42 4 2 41 42 42 42 4 2 41 42 4 2 42 42 4 2 42

F-Master

Sub/Class F.1A F.1B F.1C F.1D F.1E F.2A F.2B F.2C F.2D F.2E F.3A F.3B F.3C F.3D F.3E F.4A F.4B F.4C F.4D F.4E F.5A F.5B F.5C F.5D F.5E F.6A F.6B F.6C F.7A F.7B F.7C

# Split class * Remedial

WW/PY LC/YU CC/YL CHMS T F LY KHTM/CS KA/MK EF/KK CA/LKYR/FU SK/WS RL/PU WO/DY

CM/MOCW/PMSS/WY

SS/WY CW/PM CM/MO

RL/PUSK/WSYR/FUMY/FO EF/KKKA/MKTM/CSWO/DY CC/YLLC/YUWW/PYCA/LK LT/KWLO/TSSY/THYY/CL LYT FMSPC/CF POEYCHKH M CYEY CCP

1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1

# 2 #2 #2

1/1 1/1 1/1

YL LY LY

#2 # 2 #2

WK / MY PU / CM PU / CM

# 2#2#2 # 2CK / KH

FO PM MO FO PM MO

T S SS

# 2 #2 #2TS TM LT

SK

# 2 #2TS TM TM

RL

KA

LY

# 7

YY

YU

MA YY

CL C L

LY

3 3 3YL WS KA KA WS

33 3 3 3

LK

M C WA

C F

M C

LK

LY

YY

*SY/WY/RL *PY / RL / WO *PY / WO / MO

*CM/MY/TM TM/TH CS/TS

66

9 9

PO C F

AY/CK

KH TH

C A CW C A EF E F

MY/FO

CL/DY

WY

EF/NETCC/NET CC/NET LC/NET EF/NET

LO YR

1/1

6

WK

KMKM KM KM KM

RL

3WY

WS WSWSWSWSW S WS WS

6

3KAWY WY WW

YL

W Y

WSWS WSWS

C HY R

WW

AL

POCF

KW

ALLK

Y C

KA

C L

MK

AY/CK

WO MK

MS MS MS

WOMK

KH

KM / YLKM KM

TSCK SS

KM

CK CK / KH

Y CMK

YU YU

YY MA MA

YU

YL WS YL WS YL

KAYU KA

PY WOMO WK

PO

WA WA

AL AL

KWKW

C FKK

KW

LK LK SS SS

KK CS KK

KK

SS KW KK SS

YE

WW KA

KK

THKHLT

AY

CK

MA

YELT

YE

TS LT YE KH TH

Y C C P SK

CM MY C S LT PU TH TS

MK

SK CP

Y R SY CH

LO

C H

CHMK

C W EF EYFU EY TF AHEY AHPC

RL Y R LO LO

T FP C

YCSK

CA

LO RL PY LO

LO

N E T NET NET NET

MK

NET

SYWY PY

CW/WW TFLC/CC PC/DY EF/FU

CM

YU

TM PU/MY6

KW CS KK

CS

KW

KK

Y R SY PY

T M

KW

KK

KW

LC DY

LO

AY

1/1 1/1

AH/SS CA/CL

R L WO

TF/NET LC/NET LC/NET AH/NET

WW

LC/NET

EF C A

PY SY

CC

SY

LC C C FU C W

Y R

WK / MY PU / MY

7MO Y C Y C MO

WK / DY

MO7

LT LT

WK / DY

YY/CL SY/TH LO/TS LT/KW PC/CF

PM / FO PM / FO PM / FO

KM KMYL YL YL YL

WSWS WS

Acad.Aff. B12

SELECTION OF TEXTBOOKS

I) Purposes

a) select textbooks of each subject for the new academic year in meeting the educational needs and abilities of students, and

b) compile a textbook list for distribution to students.

II) Guidelines

a) Textbooks should be selected from the Recommended List issued by the Textbooks Committee in Secondary Schools. Selection is to be made only after careful consideration of all available relevant textbooks/learning materials in market.

b) The selection of textbooks, instructional materials should be determined mainly by the specific educational needs of the students using the books and material, the prices, the weight/size.

c) The number of textbooks used for any one subject should be kept to a reasonable minimum. Frequent changes of textbook should be avoided. Changes should be made only if textbooks currently in use are found to be unsuitable.

d) Where a series of graded books is to be replaced, the new series should be introduced gradually, beginning at the lowest form and not at all forms throughout the school at any one time.

e) Supplementary teaching materials, such as supplementary exercises, tests, workbooks, including tie- in workbooks etc., should not be recommended unless there are good educational reasons.

f) The textbook list should give full details of all textbooks required for the new term. These details should include the exact title of each textbook, the edition, the name of the author, the name of the publisher and the price to avoid ambiguity.

g) Written explanations for any changes in textbooks should be given for record purposes.

h) Reference should be made to ‘Acceptance of Publishers Donation by Schools’(General Adm. Circular No. 6/92) to ensure the selection is fair and appropriate.

i) Panel Heads should ensure that the textbooks selected would be on sale before the commencement of new academic year.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the Textbook Selection Committee.

Acad.Aff. B13

IV) Procedures a) In April each year, subject panel heads should hold panel meeting to review the

textbooks currently in use and to propose textbooks for the coming academic year. b) In the selection of textbooks, the guidelines as stated under Section II should be

strictly followed. c) Records of comments on the textbooks observed should be made and

filed.(Appendix 1) Comparison table should be completed before final selection is made.

d) The textbooks recommended by each subject panel are compiled into a textbook list. e) The textbook selection committee is responsible for ensur ing that the information in

the textbook list is updated and accurate. f) The final draft of the textbook list has to be approved by the Principal. g) The approved textbook list is to be sent to the printing house for printing. h) The textbook lists are issued to current students before the end of the school term

and to new students on their admission to the school.

Acad.Aff. B14

CHOICE OF TEXTBOOK - ASSESSMENT FORM

Subject : ________________________

Title : ____________________________________ Author : _______________________

Publisher : ______________________________ Year/Edition : _________ Price : ________

Content

Language

Presentation

Illustration

Printing & Setting

Size, Weight

Prize

Other Teaching Aids

Teacher's Reference

Overall Comment

Teacher Name : _________________________ Date : ___________________

Appendix 1

Acad.Aff. B15

SCHOOL LIBRARY

I) Purposes

a) improve students' language ability; b) arouse students' interest in reading; c) develop information retrieval skill; d) cultivate attitude of independent learning; and e) pave way for continued education.

II) Guidelines

a) Opening Hours: Monday - Friday 8:45a.m. - 12:35p.m. 1:15p.m. – 5:00p.m.

b) Library Regulations 1) i) Each student can borrow 6 items of library material at a time. ii) F.4 to F.7 students are allowed to borrow 2 past papers in addition to (i) 2) i) Books borrowed should be returned within 2 weeks. Renewal can be

made once only. ii) Past papers, CD-ROMS, VCDs, and DVDs should be returned within 1 week and renewal is not allowed. iii) Renewal will not be allowed for overdue books.

3) "Reference Books" are not allowed to be taken out of the library. 4) A demerit will be given to borrowers whose book(s) is/are

i) overdue for 4 times. 5) Borrowers are responsible for any damage or loss of book(s) on loan. 6) Chatting, playing, eating and drinking are not allowed in the library. 7) All books, periodicals and newspapers should be put in the designated places

after reading. 8) Students should keep the library neat and clean. Chairs and tables should not

be removed from the library. 9) Senior form students must use the library as a place for self-study during their

free periods. Students should report attendance to the teacher - librarian individually.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the Library Committee only after consultation with the Principal.

Acad.Aff. B16

IV) Procedures

a) Library Budget /Purchase of Books & Magazines

1) In July, a library budget for the coming school year is prepared by each panel head.

2) Panel heads may purchase books directly from any bookstore or give a book list to the librarian for tendering.

3) The librarian chooses books on general interest by visiting bookstores & book exhibitions or order books recommended by salesmen who visit the school.

4) The librarian should keep an account of the Library Grant. 5) Around 20 titles of magazines are subscribed to suit the different interests of the

students. Surveys are carried out from time to time to find out the popularity of the titles subscribed.

b) Purchase of Exam. Handbooks & Question Papers

1) At the beginning of the school year, the librarian makes arrangements for the students in F.4-F.7 and teachers to order the Exam. Handbooks and Question Papers upon receiving notice from the HKEA.

2) The librarian will distribute the books ordered accordingly immediately after they arrive.

c) Cataloguing and Stock Checking

1) With the completion of computerisation of the library in September 1998, cataloguing is done by inputting data of new books (both purchased & complimentary) into the computer after they are classified.

2) Procedures of Stock Checking i) Stock Checking is usually carried out in July. ii) A team of student librarians are asked to help taking the stock. iii) The student librarians will arrange the books on the shelves in good order,

sorting out books for repair. iv) Books found out-dated, too shabby or missing will be written-off from the

accession records. v) A list of the books being withdrawn from stock will be submitted to the

Principal for approval.

d) Reading Schemes

1) Students are encouraged to read extensively and both Chinese and English reading schemes are organised for them.

2) The students are encouraged to join the reading scheme organised by external bodies, e.g. the PTU, Public Libraries, HK edcity, etc.

Acad.Aff. B17

3) The Chinese Extensive Reading Scheme - The librarian helps in book selection,

book processing and keeping and ERS corner so that students joining the scheme can borrow the books for home reading.

e) Student Self-study Centre

1) F.4-F.7 students use the library as a place for self-study during their free periods.

2) The students should report attendance to the librarian. 3) The librarian has to keep the attendance record and maintain discipline in the

library.

f) Library Services

1) Textbooks/Desk copies i) When the list of textbooks for the next school year is ready in June/July, the

librarian starts to ask for the books chosen from the respective publishers/book agents.

ii) In mid-August, textbooks will be prepared for each teacher according to his/her timetable.

iii) The textbooks prepared will then be collected by the teachers before school begins.

2) Photo-copying Machines

i) The librarian has to prepare the store-valued cards by encoding their cash values before selling them to the students and teachers.

ii) A record of the sale of the store-valued cards should be kept. iii) The librarian should order and keep an inventory of the copying paper. iv) The librarian should keep an account of the photo-copying machines.

3) Library Lessons

i) To cultivate an attitude of independent learning, library lessons are arranged for F.1 students in September and October.

ii) During the lessons, students are taught the following basic library skills: - classification systems of books - parts of a book - reference tools - call number and shelving rules - library citizenship and library regulations

Acad.Aff. B18

4) Librarians' Club/Student Librarians

i) All student librarians are members of the Librarians' Club. They play an important role in providing library services and organising library activities.

ii) Recruitment is usually done at the beginning of the school year. iii) Students from F.2-F.6 are recruited and training courses will be provided.

A sense of responsibility is especially emphasised. iv) Student librarians are grouped into 5 teams and each team is to be on-duty

once a week. v) Experienced student librarians will be appointed team leaders. They will

provide guidance to the junior ones. vi) The student librarians will help in organising various library activities:

- book displays and exhibitions - board displays - publishing Library News - quizzes and games - visits

- book report contests

g) Subscription of Newspapers 1) A circular with the subscription form will be distributed to each class and the

staff. Students and staff who wish to subscribe to the newspaper should fill in their names on the form.

2) Monitors will collect the appropriate subscription fees from the students and hand them to the teachers concerned who will also collect the subscription fees from the staff.

3) The school subscribes to both English and Chinese newspapers. A teacher is in charge of the subscription of newspapers.

4) The teacher responsible will summarize the total subscription and subscribe, to the newspaper by phone or by fax.

5) A list showing the name and total number of subscribed newspapers of each class will be given to the General Office for distribution of newspapers each day.

6) Should any problems in daily distribution occur, the teacher responsible should be informed immediately.

Acad.Aff C1

TEACHING RESOURCES AND AUDIO-VISUAL AIDS

General Policy

Adequate and up-to-date teaching resources (including teachers’ reference materials, teaching aids and equipment) are crucial for effective teaching and learning.

Subject department heads and teacher-in-charge of audio-visual aids play an important role in equipping the school with good teaching resources. They should

a) know thoroughly whether the available teaching resources are adequate for effective teaching and learning;

b) encourage other teachers to fully utilize the teaching resources; c) ensure the upkeep of facilities in the school; d) try to update and upgrade the teaching resources; e) make good use of the government grants (including the subject grants, recurrent

furniture and equipment grant and non-recurrent furniture and equipment grant) to equip their departments; and

f) give suggestion to the Principal securing more resources from the government and Sik Sik Yuen.

The Principal and the School Finance Committee will make the final decision on the allocation of resources to various departments.

Acad.Aff C2

SCHOOL INVENTORY I) Purposes

a) ensure the upkeep of facilities in the school; b) keep an inventory of available resources in the school; and c) update and upgrade the teaching resources.

II) Guidelines a) Department heads should keep a record of all inventory items under their

departmental control. b) Departmental stock checking of all inventory items, general stores and library

books should be carried out at least once a year. It is recommended that department heads should conduct a stock-checking at the end of each academic year (i.e. in July or August). Stock-checking from time to time within a year is encouraged so that discrepancies can be detected as early as possible.

c) The Vice-Principal and one other teacher would form an inspection team for the stocktaking.

d) Damaged or outdated items should be written off after the stock checking. e) Department heads may ask for replacement of old equipment used for more than

5 years or apply to purchase new items (preferably within the standard list of furniture and equipment) with the Recurrent Furniture and Equipment (F&E) Grant in the budget of coming school year or the Additional Non-Recurrent F&E Grant of the second school year thence.

f) Guidelines on Purchasing and Tendering Procedures for Aided Schools suggested by the EMB should be followed.

g) In purchasing F/E items with Block Grant, the financial limits before tenders are required are:

Above $20,000 – By Tender Between $10,000 and $20,000 – By Written Quotation Below $10,000 – By Oral Quotation h) In purchasing F/E items with Additional Non-Recurrent F&E Grant, tenders are

called for each single purchase exceeding $10,000. i) Tender Opening Committee (TOC) would be appointed by the Principal

comprising of a Chairman and a member.

III) Basis of Discretion

The policy will only be amended by the Teaching Resources and AVA Committee after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Annual Stock-checking and writing-off procedures

1) In carrying out the stock-checking, department heads should verify the inventory items against the records on the Inventory Record Book. All

Acad.Aff C3

discrepancies should be looked into and dealt with accordingly. 2) During the stock-checking, department heads may spot damaged or

out-dated items. These items should be written off. 3) Department heads should clearly indicate all items to be written off by

signing the logbook. They should also provide the reasons for doing so together with effective dates.

4) The updated Inventory Record Book should be ready for inspection by the end of November.

5) In December, a member of the inspection team will inform the department heads at least one week in advance to conduct the inspection. The inspecting officer will scrutinize the inventory records and carry out a random check of some items. The inspecting officer should also countersign each written-off item.

6) On completion of the stocktaking exercise, the inspecting officer should sign on the Inventory Record Book. If no irregularity is found, the inspecting officer will pass the Inventory Record Book to the Principal for endorsement. If any irregularities are found, he/she should report his/her findings together with recommendations using an Inspection Report to the Principal and seek his advice.

b) Furniture and equipment accession and replacement procedures

1) Department heads should submit the request for grants towards the cost of new furniture and equipment or for repairs and replacements of existing items of furniture and equipment to the School Finance Committee before the end of March each year.

2) If the total amount requested from all the departments exceeds the Recurrent F&E Grant (about HK$110,000), the School Finance Committee may recommend some departments apply for the Non-Recurrent F&E Grant of the second school year thence for items costing $8,000 or more.

3) Departments applying for the Non-Recurrent F&E Grant should submit the estimates using the standard form shown in the Code of Aid for Secondary Schools (Refer to Appendix 1) not later than the date prescribed by the Education Department each year, so that the requests may be considered for inclusion in the following year‘s Draft Government Estimates. Roughly one year after the submission of application, the Education Department will notify the school whether the application is successful.

4) The approved budget will be made known to department heads before October.

c) Purchase and tendering procedures

1) For purchasing items that require tendering, the following procedure should be followed. i) The staff- in-charge should seek separate tenders from not less than

5 different suppliers normally selected from the standard list of suppliers issued by the Education Department. Tender invitations should be sought using the standard letter and the tender form, with

Acad.Aff C4

tender number, closing date (on Mondays to Friday except school holidays) and time (9:00 a.m.), shown in the Code of Aid for Secondary Schools. Tenderers should be advised to return tenders in duplicate under sealed envelopes marked “TENDERS” with the tender number and closing date on the cover and addressed to the Principal by post title. All tenders, before they are sent to the selected supplier by recorded delivery, should be recorded on the Tender Summary Sheet shown in the Code of Aid for Secondary Schools. The Tender Summary Sheet has to be passed to the General Office for recording the details of response.

ii) A clerical staff should maintain on file the recorded delivery receipts issued by the Post Office showing the names of the tenderers and the date of dispatch for audit purpose.

iii) All tenders should be placed into a tender box immediately upon receipt.

iv) On opening tenders, all tenders should be initialed, dated and checked to see if both the original and duplicate copy of the tenders are identical by the Tender Opening Committee (TOC). No tenders should be opened before the date and time specified for receiving tenders.

v) All tenders received should be entered in the Tender Summary Sheet to show the number of offers, no-offers and the like.

vi) The TOC refers late tenders to the Principal who will open them to ascertain whether it is a late tender or a letter providing additional information for the submitted bid. Late tenders which the Principal does not want to consider further should be returned under a covering letter to the tenderers.

vii) The TOC refers original tenders to the staff- in-charge for preparing price comparison tables.

viii) For Non-recurrent Grant items, the original of each tender received should be forwarded to the Education Department with three copies of the price comparison table. The school will be advised which tenders or tendered prices are approved for grant purposes. No order should be placed with the suppliers until such advice is given by the Education Department.

ix) For Recurrent Grant items, the original of each tender received should be forwarded to the School General Office with one copy of the price comparison table. The Principal will decide which tenders or tendered prices are successful.

x) Unsuccessful tenderers should also be informed of the outcome after the contract has been awarded.

xi) The staff- in-charge should place orders before the expiry of the validity period of the tenders. For Recurrent Grant items, all original tenders received, Tender Summary Sheet and Prince Comparison Table should be filed in the General Office for checking by EMB‘s Supplies Inspection Team and audit for three calendar years after the completion of the order.

Acad.Aff C5

2) For purchasing items that require either written or oral quotations, the

following procedure should be followed. i) The staff- in-charge should obtain quotations from not less than two

suppliers and prepare price comparison table (if necessary). ii) He/she should complete a purchase-by-quotation form with

recommendation and submit it to the Principal with approval. If the lowest quotation is not selected, he/she should put down the reason why it is not chosen.

iii) The Principal approves the quotation recommended for acceptance. iv) On approval, the staff- in-charge should place order as soon as

possible. v) The General Office should keep the purchase-by-quotation forms

for checking by EMB‘s Supplies Inspection Team and audit for three calendar years after the completion of the order. These forms should be checked at random by a Vice-Principal. He/she should date and initial on the forms to show that the quotations have been checked.

Acad.Aff C6

Appendix 1 Ho Lap College

Estimates ( / ) Furniture/Equipment

(Subject/Department : _____________________________)

Item no.

Brief Description of Items Required. For furniture, please state intended location.

Quantity Required

Estimated Unit Price ($)

Estimated Cost ($)

Quantity Now Held

Reasons for Replacement or Addition. For replacement, give age and condition of item to be replaced.

Remark from Finance Committee

Total

Signature of Subject/Department Head:______________________

Date:______________________

For Official Use Only

Approved Recurrent F&E Grant:_________________

Signed:____________________

(the Principal)

Date: ___________________

Acad.Aff C7

AUDIO-VISUAL AIDS

I) Purposes

a) provide necessary audio-visual equipment as aids in lessons and school activities; b) facilitate teachers in the use of AVA equipment; and c) maintain a good system for managing and use of AVA equipment.

II) Guidelines

a) The AVA unit is to monitor the loan and return procedures of AVA equipment. b) The AVA unit is to maintain the equipment and foster the practice of proper

handling of equipment among teachers. c) The AVA unit is to keep a continuous record and organize maintenance work for the

equipment. d) The AVA unit is to seek ways to upgrade the equipment list. e) AVA equipment should be used exclusively by teachers for school activities. f) Teachers are to ensure that the equipment is returned intact immediately after use. g) Teachers are to report any damage or malfunction, no matter how minor, to the

General Office or the AVA unit as soon as possible.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy is subject to amendment with the endorsement of the principal or the vice-principals.

IV) Procedures

a) Lending of AVA for class use

Teachers should read the Audio-visual Aid Equipment Summary and familiar themselves with the lending procedures and the exact location of the AVA. The summary will be distributed to all staff at the beginning of a school year via intranet.

1) The Overhead projector, LCD and Visualizer can be booked in the Staff Common Room before 8:10 a.m. on the day it is to be used. If there is no permanent screen in the classroom, a wall mount screen should be used. The complete set of equipment should be returned immediately after use. The OHP, LCD and Visualizer should be handled with care. Extra care should be taken when moving the equipment in and out of the classroom in order to prolong the life of the filament of the OHP, LCD and Visualizer.

Acad.Aff C8

2) For hall activity, booking of AV facilities should be made 3 days in advance. The relevant booking form (“Booking AV Facility in the Hall” as shown in Appendix 1) is obtainable at the General Office.

3) For other equipment, the Audio-visual Aid Equipment Summary should be referred to and the right person contacted.

b) Repair and replacement

1) AVA unit is to contact the authorised agent as soon as possible in case of repair. The list of agents is kept at the General Office.

2) If repair is deemed not technically possible or cost effective, the writing off and replacement procedures will apply.

Acad.Aff C9

BOOKING AV FACILITY IN THE HALL

Date: _____________(_____) Time: __________a.m./p.m. - __________a.m./p.m. Organizing body: ___________________________ Activity/function: ___________________________ Participating classes: _________________________ No. of participants: __________ Teacher- in-charge: Student-in-charge: Part of the hall to be utilized: (please tick) All parts □ Front part □ Stage only □ Rear part □ Equipment: (please tick) Lighting □ Audio: Microphone □( ) pieces Cassette player □ Wireless Mic. □( ) pieces CD player □ Visual: Overhead projector □ Slide projector □ TV projector and VCR □ Screen □ Setting of the stage/ seating arrangement

⇐ Mark the position of ⇐ microphone by a cross Entrance ⇐Mark the layout of chairs

N.B.

Name: _______________________ Signature: _______________________

Name: _______________________ Signature: _______________________

Stage

Appendix 1

1. This form should be submitted to the office THREE DAYS IN ADVANCE.

2. Stage coordination will only be provided for drama functions or music contest. Other requests will be considered individually.

3. Please report to the principal if student assistance is required during normal lessons.

OFFICE USE

Acad.Aff C10

Hall Sound System

I) Purposes

a) provide teacher with the necessary equipment for playing back audio material in the hall for examination; and

b) provide technical support while playing back the audio material in the hall when necessary.

II) Guidelines

a) The teacher- in-charge of the Stage Management Group (SMG) should set up the sound system for playing back CD or cassette tape in the hall.

b) Janitor in responsible for turning on the sound system before the exam. He is also responsible for turning it off after the exam.

c) The chief- invigilator is responsible for playing back the audio material for the examinations.

d) The foreman and a clerical staff in the General Office provide support to the chief- invigilation to operate the sound system. If the problem persists, the teacher- in-charge of SMG is to be consulted.

III) Procedures

1) The teacher- in-charge of SMG is to set up the hall sound system before examinations and uniform tests.

2) Janitor is the turn on the main swith of the hall sound system before the exam session. He is to turn it off every day.

3) The chief- invigilation of the relevant session is to bring the audio material and playback during the examinations.

4) In case of the malfunction of the playback system, the chief- invigilator should borrow a simple CD/cassette player to playback the audio material and amplify it through the microphone system.

Acad.Aff D1

STUDENT ASSESSMENT Various formats of student assessment are intended to evaluate the teaching and learning process. They provide useful feedback for teachers to help their students realise their strengths and weaknesses and to encourage them to put in more effort than before. Internal tests and examinations serve to keep tracks of students’ academic potential and interests and to give them an idea as to what courses / streams would be most suitable for them. Examination results also provide parents with a monitoring device for assessing performance & progress of their children. External Examinations held by HKEAA serve a valuable tool in assessing the students' academic performance which provides part of basis for selecting students for future study in post-secondary education.

Acad.Aff D2

HOMEWORK POLICY

I) Purposes

a) regulate the type, frequency and amount of homework set for each subject in each form;

b) ensure an even spread of homework over the week and a balanced coverage of subjects; and

c) avoid assigning homework, which is set arbitrarily or without reference to pupils’ learning needs.

II) Guidelines

a) Effective homework usually : 1) helps students to reinforce & develop ideas; 2) stimulates thinking; 3) motivates students’ interest in the subject; and 4) develops initiative, independence and creativity.

b) Type – Assignments should be varied in types in accordance with the needs of students and objectives of the subject. Reading, studying, collecting information are as important as written assignment. In broad terms, homework should be categorized as: 1) Finishing off work which is started in class and completed at home 2) Parallel homework which is started and completed at home. 3) Spontaneous homework which arises spontaneously and creatively out of what is

happening in the classroom. 4) Preparation work which is done at home in advance of a lesson in class. 5) Revision work which is done at home after a lesson in class.

c) Guidance – Assignments should be clearly explained by teachers with regard to

how and when the assignments are to be completed. d) Quality – Assignments should be well designed to help students reinforce learning,

provide further motivation, and should stimulate thinking and active learning. e) Quantity – Assignment should be reasonably balanced in terms of quantity so that

homework will not cause physical and mental fatigue. Subject teachers of each class should show flexibility and exercise professional judgement to ensure an even spread and balanced coverage of subjects.

f) Frequency – Assignments should be regulated so that students are not unduly

overburdened with homework on certain days as compared with others. This can be done through the collaboration between different subject teachers.

g) Feedback – Assignments should be properly marked and feedback should be given

to students for evaluation and consolidation purposes.

Acad.Aff D3

h) To ensure the homework is properly regulated, an overall school homework policy for individual subject regarding the type, frequency and amount of homework is drawn up for each form.

i) For Lower forms - Students are expected to spend about 3 hours daily in their

homework. Preparation work and revision work are also included in their homework. Parents play an important role in supervising their children to complete the homework every day.

j) For Upper forms - Assignments are usually given at the end of each topic or each

chapter i.e. once every 2 or 3 weeks, but they are expected to explore further knowledge after lessons in class by looking up books in the library or from internet.

k) In order to develop students’ ability and discipline needed for self-study and

independent learning, students of all forms sometimes are required to do one or two projects or book reports during the school year.

III) Basis of Discretion

This policy will only be amended by the school Academic Committee after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) The type, amount and frequency of assignments for each level are discussed and

resolved at the First Panel Meeting. b) The Panel Head is to maintain a homework policy for his/her department, to

supervise and to ensure that the designated amount of assignments has been done and they are of appropriate quality and quantity.

c) Subject teachers have to give homework assignments according to the homework policy.

d) A small corner of the blackboard should be set aside for recording homework assignments given by teachers. Teachers should see that students are not overloaded with homework assignments on a certain day.

e) Teachers should ask lower form students to record the homework assigned in their handbooks every day. The handbooks can be checked by parents for information. The students should also refer to their handbooks to see if they have completed all their assignments on time.

f) Parents /guardians of students who repeatedly fail to complete homework are notified.

g) All homework should be marked and returned to pupils as soon as possible so as to function as a feedback to students. Remedial measures should be taken if necessary.

h) At the end of first term, designated homework will be collected and inspected by the panal chairman/ vice-principal/ principal to check whether individual teacher have sticked to the homework policy.

i) If individual teacher fail to do so, follow up action will be taken.

Acad.Aff D4

j) A record on the homework assignments given to students will be kept by the subject

teacher during the academic year and presented to the panel heads or principal for inspection on request.

k) The homework policy should be reviewed regularly to ensure that it meets educational objectives and continues to be appropriate to the current circumstances.

Acad.Aff D5

TEST AND EXAMINATION (INTERNAL) I) Purposes

a) provide feedback for teachers on students’ academic performance; b) help students realise their strength & weaknesses & encourage them to put in

more effort in the hope of further progress; c) provide parents with students’ profile in academic progress; d) provide basis for selecting students in remedial teaching, streaming, promotion,

choice of curriculum in Form 4; e) form the basis for students’ transcripts & testimonials; and f) evaluate the teaching and learning process.

II) Guidelines

a) Test & Examination : Relative Weighting in Annual Result 1) F.1 – 4 : i) First Examination (35%)

ii) Uniform Test (15%) iii) Final Examination (50%)

N.B : For informal tests, projects, and other assessment may be taken into account as part of the above mentioned tests and examinations.

2) F.5 : i) Uniform Test (20%)

ii) Mock Examination (80%) N.B. : Projects, daily assessment and test marks may be taken into account

as part of the above mentioned tests & examinations.

3) F.6 : i) First Examination (35%) ii) Final Examination (65%)

Test, Projects, SBA, TAS of some subject may be taken into account as part above mentioned examination

4) F.7 : Mock Examination --- 100%

N.B : Project, test marks, SBA, TAS, may be taken into account as part of the mock Examination.

5) Whether informal tests or projects being assessed and the exact % of

weighting is at the discretion of the subject panel

Acad.Aff D6

b) Full Marks, Passing Marks and Grades

1) F.1 – F.3 (Test & Exam)

Subject Form Full Mark Passing Mark English Language 1-3 300 150 Chinese 1-3 300 150 Mathematics 1-3 300 150

1,2 100 50 Integrated Science 3 300 150

History 3 100 50 Geography 3 100 50 I.H / MCE 1-2 100 / 100 50

Chinese History 1-3 100 50

2) F4-F.7 (Test & Exam) i) For F.4 – F.7 Test & Exam the full make of each subject is 100, the

passing mark is 50 (F.4, F.5), is 50 (F.6, F.7) ii) For F.4& F.5, Chinese and English Language is split into the

following components. Subject Full Marks English Language Total 100 Eng I 26 Eng II 24 Eng III 32 Eng IV 18 Chinese Language Total 100 Chin. Lang. I 50 Chin. Lang. II 50

3) For marks entered to computer, 1 decimal place is allowed.

First Term Total, Second Term Total and Grand Total are calculated up to 1 decimal place. Average percent is calculated up to 2 decimal places.

Acad.Aff D7

c) Question Paper

1) Duration and Question Format to be revised annually by subject panel. 2) Subject content to be assessed – to be decided by subject panel at panel

meeting. 3) Question papers should be kept strictly confidential and should not be

disclosed to students in any form. Teacher should report any suspects of leakage of question paper to the subject panel head and Vice Principal immediately. The question paper will be cancelled and has to be reset.

4) Guidelines to setters (Appendix 1), Guidelines to panel heads (Appendix 2), Guidelines to markers (Appendix 3) should be referred to when necessary.

d) Venue of test & examination : School Hall and Classroom.

e) Invigilation of test & examination :

Refer to Guidelines to invigilators (Appendix 4)

f) Absence from test/examination 1) Any student absent from test and examination without any reason will

have 0 for his/her subject mark. 2) Any student absent from test and examination with reasons (as approved

by school) , will receive special treatment. (refer to Appendix 5)

g) Postponement of test & examination : In case school has to be cancelled due to typhoon, rainstorm, etc. during the examination period, the examination will take place according to the original examination time-table when school resumes. Subject missed on the days(s) cancelled will be examined at a later date to be announced.

h) Regulation of test and examination : Students should observe the

regulations for test and examination strictly. For details, please refer to 'Guidelines to Students' (Appendix 6).

Acad.Aff D8

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will only be amended by the Academic Committee after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures a) Test/Examination Dates and Timetable Arrangement.

1) Dates for Test, Examination, are to be decided when the school calendar is compiled.

2) With information from each subject panel on the duration and format of question papers, the test/examination timetable is proposed and approved two weeks prior to the test/examination.

3) Examination timetable is ready and to be distributed to teachers and students concerned 10 days before the test/examination.

b) Invigilation Arrangement

1) With the information from the examination timetable, invigilators are assigned for each examination centre: i) One invigilator for each classroom, one inivigilator for each class in

school hall; ii) One stand-by teacher for each floor. iii) One stand-by on call on each day of examination.

2) An invigilation timetable is worked out & distributed to teachers 3 days

before the examination.

3) Invigilators should report & perform their duties as required.

c) Venue of Test & Examination Arrangement

1) Listening Test to be taken place in School Hall for the forms concerned.

2) ‘Visual Arts’ paper to be taken place in Art & Design Room.

3) Students from 2 classes of 2 forms sit in the same classroom except for F.6.

4) Seating plan of each classroom to be prepared by G.O. & inform the

students at least 3 days before the examination.

5) Notice board of the classroom should be inspected by Form Teacher to ensue no relevant academic materials are displayed.

Acad.Aff D9

6) Janitors are responsible for keeping the classrooms clean and tidy. Any books or exercise books should be removed from the drawers and cupboards in classroom.

7) The examination centres are open and students are allowed to enter 10

minutes before the start of the examination, or by the instructions from the teacher- in-charge.

d) Question Paper and Answer Scripts Arrangement

1) Question papers and suggested answer to be prepared by subject teacher

(setters) and moderated by panel head.

2) Question papers and answer sheets, if any, to be typed by setter.

3) Sufficient copies of question paper to be printed.

4) Printed question paper & answer sheets to be proofread by setters. Any corrections have to be noted down on form 3 days before the examination.

5) Question papers are stored in a safe place.

6) On the examination day, examination materials are ready for collection by

invigilatior in the distribution centre (Rm101).

7) After examination, answer scripts are collected and returned to distribution centre.

8) Markers are responsible for collecting the answer scripts after the

examination session. They have to check the number of answer scripts against the number of scripts recorded on the form. Any irregularity has to be reported to the centre supervisor on duty.

9) After marking, answer scripts have to be returned back to students for

discussion. Answer scripts of F.3 students have to be re-collected & handed in the General Office for custody.

Acad.Aff D10

e) Entry of Marks into Computer Arrangement

1) Scores of students are recorded and converted to full marks 100 or 300.

2) Marks of each paper is entered into computer according to procedure laid out by computer service team.

3) Mark sheet will be printed out for subject teacher.

4) Form Teachers are responsible for entering the grade for conduct of

students of his/her class.

5) General mark sheet will be printed out for Form Teachers’ reference.

f) Result Sheets (Uniform Test) and Report Cards (First Term, Annual) Arrangement.

1) Result sheets

i) Result sheets will be printed and distributed after Uniform Test for F.1 to F.4 only;

ii) Form Teachers have to sign his/her name before distribution; iii) Students bring the result sheet back home for parent/guardian

perusal and signature. iv) Result sheets are to be collected back for filing in students' record

files.

2) Report Cards i) Report cards will be printed and distributed after First Exam & FE; ii) Form Teachers are responsible for writing comments of each student.

The comments should be on attitude, character, personality and work. Comments should be carefully worded and encouraging. Comments may be written in English or Chinese;

iii) For the annual report card, student’s gum label and photo should be affixed in appropriate spaces.

iv) Form Teachers have to sign his/her names in spaces provided; v) Report cards are handed in to General office for stamping; vi) First Term Report Cards are distributed on Parents’ Day; vii) Annual Report Cards are distributed to students on the last day of

school term. viii) After parents/guardians perusal and signature, the report cards have

to be collected & filed in student files accordingly.

Acad.Aff D11

TEST & EXAMINATION Guidelines to Setters

1) Dates & procedures of processing of test/ exam papers will be given at the beginning of the academic year. Please follow the scheduled dates closely.

2) Setters should note the time and maximum marks allotted to each paper.

3) Setters should discuss with other teachers teaching the same subject/level on the question papers and the marking schemes. The draft question paper has to be submitted to panel head for perusal & moderation.

4) It is advisable to set the paper with separate questions and answer sheets.

5) Setters try to avoid adopting questions of the recent two years tests & examination.

6) If there is any difficulty in setting the paper, the Panel Head should be consulted.

7) Setter is responsible for typing & proofreading the question paper after moderation by the Panel Head/principal.

Appendix 1

Acad.Aff D12

TEST & EXAMINATION Guidelines to Panel Heads

1) Panel Heads should give proper guidance to their members on the setting of

examination papers. On receiving the draft question papers, they should study the questions and the marking schemes carefully and modify the papers to ensure appropriate standard and format.

2) Panel Heads should then submit the draft question papers (for examination only) to

the Principal for approval. 3) Panel Heads should complete the memo or provide information to General Office

concerning the printing of question papers and submit the master copy of all the question paper of the subject to G.O. for printing.

4) After the examination, Panel Heads should file the question papers & suggested

answer in the Subject Examination Files. 5) Panel Heads should file a mark sheet of each class/paper.

Appendix 2

Acad.Aff D13

TEST & EXAMINATION

Guidelines to Markers

1) Markers should come to examination paper distribution centre (Staff Common Room) to collect the students’ answer scripts immediately after the examination of their papers.

2) Markers should count the number of scripts carefully and any discrepancy should be

reported to the centre supervisor immediately. 3) After marking, answer scripts should be returned to students for the discussion of

answers. Only for F.3, the marked answer scripts should be collected back and returned to G.O. for custody.

4) All marks should be given in whole numbers. 5) Marks sheets should be checked carefully after input into the computer. No

adjustment of marks should be made without prior permission from the Principal. 6) Markers should complete the markers report & attend panel meeting to evaluate the

question paper.and students’ performance.

Appendix 3

Acad.Aff D14

TEST & EXAMINATION

Guidelines to Invigilators 1) The centre supervisor should report for duty 45 minutes before the starting time of

test/examination to arrange the distribution of question papers. 2) Staff Common Room is usually used as the distribution and collection centre (DCC).

Teachers can obtain the question papers and despatch the collected scripts in this room.

3) Teachers whose initials appear in the invigilation time-table are responsible for the

invigilation of the particular centres. S1, S2, S3 & S4 represent stand-by at lst, 2nd, 3rd and 4th floor corridors respectively.

4) For invigilation in the hall, invigilators with * are responsible for obtaining question

papers from and despatching scripts to DCC as well as making announcement for admittance and/or during the test/examination session.

5) Invigilators, including stand-by’s, are expected to report for duty at least 15 minutes

before the start of each session. 6) Invigilators should note the duration of test/examination before they enter the centres. 7) 10 minutes before the start of the test/examination session, the bell will ring. This bell

is to inform the students the test/examination will start soon. Classroom invigilators should enter the centres by the time the bell rings. Hall invigilators should enter the hall 15 minutes before the start of each session to help distribute the necessary stationery. The chief invigilator may admit the students into the hall 10 minutes before the start of the session by announcing through the P.A. system.

8) There may be 2 classes in the same classroom. The seating plan is posted up on the

blackboard. 9) Invigilators should read the Instruction Slip attached which provides information like

stationery required for each student, duration of the test/examination, and amendments, if any.

10) The bell will ring at the starting and finishing time for F.1-4 test/examination in the

classrooms. But for those of F.6 and in the hall, invigilators should keep time on their own, using the timer provided.

11) Do not start the test/examination earlier than the scheduled time. In case the

distribution of stationery or the announcement has not been completed when the bell rings, go on with the distribution or announcement. Ample time should be supplemented at the end to give students the exact duration of test/examination.

12) Write down the starting & finishing time, and amendments, if any, on the blackboard.

If the test/examination center is in the school hall, all the time should be referred to the clock adjacent to the stage.

Appendix 4

Acad.Aff D15

13) Take roll-call. 14) Fill in the Test/Examination slip (Appendix), one for each class. It should be attached

to the pile of answer scripts collected at the end of test/examination. 15) Invigilators are responsible for the proper conduct of the test/examination. They

should walk around the classroom occasionally and be alert of any misbehaviour of students. Fill in the Offense Slip (Appendix) if a student commits any offence.

16) The centre supervisor and classroom invigilators should be vigilant to prevent any

cheating and collusion among students. The centre supervisor should occasionally make access to classrooms, giving help to classroom invigilators in supervision of students.

17) If the invigilator has to leave the room temporarily, he/she should ask the stand-by

invigilator to supervise the students. 18) If a student is found copying from the answer scripts of other students, in possession

of or obtaining unfair assistance from books or notes, the student should be allowed to finish the test/examination, but the books or notes should be removed immediately and kept as evidence. The student should be transferred to Discipline Master with the evidence after the test/examination.

19) For late arrivals, students should be admitted but no extra time is given. If the students

are more than 30 minutes late, he/she should be sent to the centre supervisor after the test/examination, whereby he/she is demanded for explanation or warned.

20) No early leave by students is allowed. 21) If a student wants to go to the toilet, ask the stand-by invigilator to accompany the

student. 22) The centre supervisor should be informed of any irregularity during the

test/examination through the stand-by invigilator. 23) At the end of the test/examination, collect the answer scripts in order of the seat

numbers, with the smallest on top. Count the number of scripts collected for each class to see if it is consistent with the number of students present. Unless the answers are written on the question papers, students are allowed to take away the question papers.

24) The stand-by invigilators should collect a pack of supplementary stationery from

DCC. They should arrive at the corresponding corridor when the 10 minutes bell rings and stay there until the last class on the floor is dismissed.

25) Invigilators should return the collected scripts and stationery to DCC.

Acad.Aff D16

TEST & EXAMINATION Guidelines to Students

1) The examination centres may be the school hall, classrooms or special rooms. Students should take note of the location of the examination centres and their seats before the test/examination. They should also read the test/examination time-table carefully.

2) Students should enter the examination centres 10 minutes before the starting time of the test/examination.

3) Students should be punctual in tests/examination. No extra time will be granted for late comers. Students who arrive 30 minutes after the start of the examination may not be permitted to take the examination.

4) No trespassing is allowed on the part of corridor in front of Room 101 during tests/examinations.

5) Students must remain absolutely silent throughout the test/examination.

6) No early leave is allowed during tests/examinations.

7) As recess time for various forms may not coincide, students should minimize disturbance caused during the recess.

8) No ball games are allowed at the playground, unless permission is granted.

9) Students should make sure that no pieces of paper are contained in the pencil boxes. They should place the content of the pencil boxes on the desks and leave the empty boxes under their chairs.

10) Students should start writing only after the announcement by the invigilator. They should stop writing immediately when it is announced so.

11) Students must do their papers honestly. Anyone found cheating in tests/examinations will be disqualified for the paper and punished according to the school regulations.

12) Students who have taken their examination in the morning & have no more examination for the rest of the day should go home for revision.

13) If a student is absent during the test/examination without a doctor’s certificate, the marks for the subjects/paper concerned will be zero.

14) Tests/Examinations will be postponed on the announcement of closure of secondary schools by the EMB. Subject(s) affected will be re-scheduled on the day following the last day of the test/examination.

Appendix 6

Acad.Aff D17

TEST & EXAMINATION (INTERNAL) TIMETABLING AND INVIGILATION ARRANGEMENT

I) Purposes

a) prepare examination and invigilation timetable; b) ensure the smooth running of internal tests and examinations in parallel with other

normal classes of senior forms; and c) prepare a proper venue for tests and examinations.

II) Guidelines

a) The principal nominates 3 to 4 teachers to form a team for the arrangement of the examination and invigilation timetable.

b) Teachers who will have official leaves during the examination/test period should inform the team not later than one week before the final version of timetable is worked out.

c) Once the invigilation timetable is finalized, swapping of invigilation sessions not encouraged. Teachers who want to alter their invigilation sessions should obtain the approval of the Principal or the Vice Principal.

d) The order of examination of different papers and subjects should be arranged in a yearly rotational basis so that each paper would take turns to be conducted early during the examination period. For Mock Examination the order of examination of different subjects should be arranged in accordance to the order in the public examinations as far as possible.

e) In order to give sufficient time for senior form students to have revision, at least one or two days of break os arranged during the exam period.

III) Basic of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the Team of Examination and Invigilation Timetable Arrangement after the consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) By the end of September, the Examination and Invigilation Arrangement Team should work out a Schedule for Examinations and Tests for the current academic year.

b) The team may collect information about the papers of each subject from the panel heads according to the date specified on the Schedule.

c) The team will draft an examination timetable and seek for the comments from the panel heads before a final version is worked out.

d) The finalized examination timetable should be ready according to the date specified on the Schedule.

Acad.Aff D18

e) The General Office is responsible for offsetting the examination timetable and distributing the timetable to teachers and students.

f) In arranging the invigilation timetable for the First Exam and Uniform test, the

teaching duties of the senior forms teachers should be taken into account so that all teachers will have fair allocation of duties during the examination period.

g) Infigilators for Mock Examination should be the teachers of the respective form. h) Setter of an examination paper should be assigned as an invigilator, preferably a

standby invigilator for the classroom centres or the chief invigilator in the school hall centre, unless he/she has to attend a normal lesson in other forms.

i) The combination of the two groups of students allocated to a classroom centre should be altered on a rotational basis within a year. This arrangement is to prevent any cheating and collusion among students.

j) The invigilation timetable should be approved by the Principal before distributing to the teachers

Acad.Aff D19

Pre-S1 HONG KONG ATTAINMENTS TESTS

I) Purposes

a) stream or group the Form 1 entrants according to their performance in the Pre-S1 Hong Kong Attainment tests in Chinese, English and Mathematics;

b) assess students’ achievement in Chinese, English and Mathematics at each level; c) diagnose students’ areas of strengths and weaknesses in Chinese, English and

Mathematics for guidance and counselling; d) identify the less able pupils for remedial treatment.

II) Guidelines

a) The tests are for F.1 Chinese, English and Mathematics only. The Pre-S1 HKAT in July are designed for Form 1 entrants.

b) The test materials should be placed in the custody of schools after delivery. c) Schools should take precautions to ensure the confidentiality of the HKAT. All test

materials and Teacher’s Handbooks should be kept in a safe place when not in use.

III) Procedures

a) Invigilators should take the necessary test materials from General Office in person before the test.

b) After the tests, invigilators should return the test materials to General Office. c) After marking, markers should return the scripts, score sheets and teacher’s

handbooks back to General Office. d) The results should be recorded and kept in the General Office.

Acad.Aff D20

EXTERNAL EXAMINATION

I) Purposes

a) conduct registrations for F.5 and F.7 students as school candidates for the HKCE and HKAL examinations respectively;

b) prepare a proper venue and conduct the examinations as instructed by the Hong Kong Examination Authority (HKEA);

c) assign teachers to serve as invigilators for the HKCE and HKAL examinations; and d) distribute result slips to students on the day of release of external examination

results.

II) Guidelines

a) All documents received from the HKEA should be kept in safe custody in the

General Office. b) Students’ application for HKCE and HKAL examinations

1) SAMS administrator is responsible for carrying out the registration process as required by the HKEA with the help of clerical staff and the form teachers of F.5 and F.7.

2) Students should be reminded to report formally to the General Office on any request for special examination arrangement and any changes concerning their information.

c) Loan of school premises as examination centres and invigilation arrangement 1) Principal’s approval must be sought for the use of the school hall and/or

classrooms for conducting public examinations. 2) Vice Principal should respond to the requests of the Examination Authority for

loan of school facilities and provision of centre supervision and invigilation services.

3) Minor staff should arrange the seats in order, stick seat numbers labels and display the relevant examination posters in advance of public examinations.

4) All F.5 and F.7 subject teachers will share invigilation duties as required by the HKEA. Senior teachers or experienced teachers should be appointed as the Centre Supervisors and Chief Invigilators. The workload of invigilation duties should be allocated in proportion according to the teaching periods of the staff.

d) Release of results of HKCE and HKAL examinations 1) F.5 and F.7 form teachers should carry out duties as assigned by the Vice

Principal on the dates of release of the HKCEE and HKALE results respectively.

2) SAMS administrator is responsible for downloading the reports of students’ results through CDS on the day of release of results.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended after instruction by the HKEA and consultation among the staff and School Administration.

Acad.Aff D21

IV) Procedures

a) Students’ application procedures 1) Preparation work

i) SAMS administrator should set up and maintain subject links and choice of paper in the ‘HKEA application’ module of SAMS system.

ii) Clerical staff should print out student’s information checklist for each student applicant.

iii) SAMS administrator should prepare a ‘Memo to Form Teachers on Application of External Examination’ (see appendix 1) and distribute it to form teachers reminding them about their tasks in the application procedures.

2) Verifying students’ information i) Student’s information checklist and the ‘Memo to Form Teachers on

Application of External Examination’ should be distributed to students and form teachers respectively via General Office.

ii) Form teachers should give proper instruction to students to check their personal information on the checklist. Errors or omissions must be immediately reported to SAMS administrator for further action.

iii) Students may request for special examination arrangement by formal application via the General Office.

3) Collection of examination fees i) Form teachers will be responsible for collecting the examination fee

under the instruction in the memo. ii) SAMS administrator will prepare a checklist of amount payable by

individual student and send it to the General Office. iii) Clerical staff should check the total amount of examination fees collected

against the checklist. iv) With the endorsement of the Principal, forms to HKEA and examination

fee will be sent to HKEA by a janitor.

b) Invigilation and school premise arrangement procedures

1) Loan of school premise i) Upon receipt of the request from the HKEA (normally in September each

year) for provision of the school hall and/or classrooms for holding public examinations, Vice Principal should reply by giving the dates and the type of accommodation available.

ii) HKEA will then confirm the dates of use of the school hall or classrooms as examination centres and request nominations for Centre Supervisors and invigilators.

2) Preparation Work i) Centre Supervisors will be appointed and teachers will be nominated as

invigilators in the Ho Lap College Examination Centre and if necessary, in other examination centres as well. Under the advice of the Vice Principal, teachers-in-charge of external examination invigilation arrangement will prepare an invigilation time-table for the nominated invigilators.

Acad.Aff D22

ii) All Centre Supervisors and Deputy Centre Supervisors for the listening

tests, AS Level Use of English Language and AS Level Chinese Language and Culture examinations should attend the Centre Supervisors’ Conference which is normally held in March each year. Relevant Centre Supervisors’ Handbook will be distributed to Centre Supervisors who will circulate the document to teachers concerned.

iii) After receiving stationery and materials for the examinations from the HKEA (probably in March), Centre Supervisors should check the quantity of received items against the attached checklist. Any irregularities should be reported to the HKEA immediately.

iv) Before external examinations are held, each teacher concerned should get a copy of ‘Notes for the Guidance of Invigilators’ for reference.

v) A staff meeting would be called for the invigilation arrangement. Centre Supervisors would point out some main points in conducting the examination.

vi) Centre Supervisors would prepare a checklist of preparation work for the examination.

vii) Centre Supervisors should supervise the minor staff in arranging and labelling the seats, and putting up examination posters.

3) Conducting the examination i) At around 7:30 a.m. on each examination day, the Chief Invigilator on

duty accompanied by a janitor will proceed to the Script Distribution Centre (SPK HKEA Office) to collect the sealed boxes of question papers.

ii) All invigilators should report duty at least 20 minutes before the examination is due to start.

iii) During the examination, Centre Supervisors and invigilators shall carry out duties in accordance with the ‘Notes for the Guidance of Centre Supervisors’ and ‘Notes for Guidance of Invigilators’ respectively.

iv) After the last examination session of each day, Centre Supervisors (or the Chief Invigilator on duty) should make arrangement for returning the answer scripts and related documents to the Script Collection Centre (SPK HKEA Office).

c) Release of results procedures

1) Vice Principal will prepare a ‘Memo to Teachers on Release of Results of External Examination’ (see appendix2, appendix 3).

2) Form teachers, Careers Master, Guidance Master and some other teachers will get a copy of the memo before the date of release of results.

3) A notice showing the venues and time for students to collect the result slips and seek counselling advice will be posted up outside the General Office before 8:30 a.m. on the date of release of results.

4) A janitor will be sent to the HKEA office as early as possible to collect the result slips, reports and the SAMS decryption code on the date of release of results.

Acad.Aff D23

5) SAMS administrator will download the reports of students’ results through

CDS before 8:30 a.m. Clerical staff should make enough copies for form teachers, Careers Master, Vice-Principals and Principal. At least one complete set of results and reports should be kept in the General Office for filing purpose.

6) Teachers involved should arrive at the General Office at 8:30 a.m. and get the reports of students’ results.

7) Form teachers will distribute the result slips to the students at 9:00 a.m. in the assigned venues. Students should sign on a name list to acknowledge receipt of result slips.

8) After consultation with subject teachers concerned and the Career Master, and getting the Principal’s approval, students may apply for re-checking of results.

Acad.Aff D24

HO LAP COLLEGE MEMO TO FORM TEACHERS ON APPLICATION OF

EXTERNAL EXAMINATIONS 1) Please instruct students to check their personal information on the student’s information

checklist. Special attention should be paid that a) the choice of subjects and the language medium for the examination paper must

be correct; and b) name (both in English and Chinese) and the C.C. codes on the checklist must be

exactly the same as that on the identity card (any subsequent amendments will cause unnecessary delay in the processing of entries or even inconsistency of the information shown on the certificates and ID cards).

2) Students should be reminded

a) to enter specific choice of examination centre area in case they want to sit for the examination in an area other than that where they live;

b) that in case of any changes concerning the information about their applications such as correspondence address, telephone number or etc, they ought to report to the General Office as soon as possible so that appropriate amendment can be made; and

c) that any request for special examination arrangement should be submitted formly to the General Office (official documentation may be required for verification purpose).

3) Verified checklist should be returned to the computer office on or before

___________________. 4) Please ask students to prepare for examination fees. It is highly recommended for

students to pay the fees with crossed-cheques. When the fees are being collected, make a record on a photocopy of HKEA payment record form. The examination fees together with the record form should be sent to General Office on or before __________________.

Appendix 1

Acad.Aff D25

HO LAP COLLEGE RELEASE OF HKCEE RESULTS & ADMISSION TO F.6

ON ________________

A) Form-masters/Form-mistresses: 1) Arrive at the General Office at 8:30 a.m.

2) Help to record the results of your class in the General Office.

3) Distribute the results slips to students at 9:15 a.m.

Students should sign on a name list after obtaining their result slips.

F.5A Room _______ F.5B _______ F.5C _______ F.5D _______ F.5E _______

4) Distribute, on request, the application forms for F.6/repeating F.5.

Only those obtaining 14 points or above in the best six subjects are eligible for

applying F.6.

5) For those applying F.6, remind them to take note of the entrance requirement for F.6

curriculum before they fill in the application forms.

6) For F.5D & 5E: Remind students that they should enter the choices in item (12) of

the application form.

7) For F.5ABC: Remind students to choose one of the 3 options and the appropriate

subjects in item (12) of the application form.

8) Collect the application forms before ______________.

9) Return the result slips of the late-comers, the name list with students’ signature, and

the application forms for F.6 to the General Office at ______________.

10) On the application forms for repeating F.5, complete the “Recommendation: (i.e.

item 12), and then return them to the General Office at or before

________________.

Appendix 2

Acad.Aff D26

B) Teachers-in-charge of F.6 Admission:

1) Collect the application forms from the General Office at or after ______________.

2) Check the grades as filled in by the students against the photocopies of the records

of results of the appropriate class.

3) Check the points and the total points of the best six subjects as filled in by the

students.

4) If the number of applicants exceeds 30, select 30 applicants and admit them to F.6.

On the “Remark”, i.e. item (16), write down “Admitted to F.6 ___ ” and put down

your signature.

5) In the list of admitted students, choose the subjects that the students are going to

study in F.6. Write them down in the “Remarks”, i.e. item (16).

6) Compile a waiting list in order of preference. Write down in the “Remarks” i.e.

item (16), “Waiting 1”, “Waiting 2”, etc.

7) The list of successful applicants and waiting list should arrive at the General Office

at or before _________________.

8) If the number of applicants is less than 30, Stage II will be in operation:

___________ (_________________), ___________ (_________________) -

interviewing applicants from other schools is necessary. Inform the General

Office the criteria for getting an interview as well as the place for the interview.

You should NOT inform the result to the applicant immediately, because our school

has opted to announce the application results in one batch at _______________,

______________________. Registration of these successful applicants should be

completed before ____________________.

9) Neglecting any repeaters, 30 students for each F.6 class must be admitted.

Appendix 2

Acad.Aff D27

HO LAP COLLEGE RELEASE OF HKAL RESULTS ON__________________

1) Form-masters/Form-mistresses should arrive at the General Office at 8:15a.m. to help

recording the results of the classes. 2) Distribution of result slips by Form-masters/mistresses at 9:00a.m. Students should sign on a name list after obtaining their result slips 7A ( ) Room _________ 7B ( ) Room _________ 7C ( ) Room _________ 3) Room _____________ will serve as Counselling Room. Teachers of Student Guidance

and Careers Guidance Committee (________________ and ________________) will be present to give advice to students.

4) The following teachers should be present in the school until 12:30p.m. to give advice to

students on appeal of subject grades. ____________ (English Lang.) ____________ (Chinese Lit.) ____________ (Chinese Lang. and Cult.) ____________ (Pure Maths.) ____________ (Applied Maths.) ____________ (Physics) ____________ (Chemistry) ____________ (Biology) ____________ (History) ____________ (Geog.) ____________ (Economic) ____________ (Chinese History) 5) Application for re-checking of results

l Application forms for re-checking are available from Careers Master (________________) in Room ________.

l Applications should be made only in cases where the expected grade for the subject concerned is at least one grade above the grade awarded.

l A fee of __________ for AS Language subject, __________ for other AS-level subject and __________ for A-level Subject are required; this fee will NOT be refunded unless the rechecking result is upgraded.

l Requests for rechecking are restricted to not more than 2 subjects per candidate.

l Completed application form for rechecking and a copy of AL result slip should be returned to the General Office before ( ).

Appendix 3

Acad.Aff. E1

TUTORIAL CLASS THROUGHOUT THE SCHOOL YEAR I) Purposes

a) make up lessons which are lacking for the proposed curricula; b) arrange informal tests for the whole form after school; c) provide centralised arrangement for F.5 and F.7 in order to minimize the clash of

time by different subjects ;and d) provide extra attention and help to those academically low achievers.

II) Guidelines

a) Subject teacher should make arrangement with the class/group so that all students are able to attend.

b) Info Quest Day is reserved for academic activities. c) Tutorial classes are to be arranged from 3:45— 5:00 p.m. on normal school day,

9:00— 12:00 on Saturday morning. d) Tutorial classes are to be arranged in classroom or special rooms e) Only one tutorial class is to be arranged for the class/group after school on any

single day. f) Monitor should book the room for tutorial class at least one day in advance. g) Teacher should maintain the discipline of the tutorial class and ensure the school

regulations are observed. h) Notice to parents should be made for F.1— F.3 tutorial class by using student

handbook or letter to parents. i) Teachers concerned should fill in tutorial record in the file at the General Office. j) Students have to put on school uniform when attending tutorial class. k) Attendance has to be taken by teacher. For absence, follow-up action has to be

taken.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the Academic Committee.

Acad.Aff. E2

IV) Procedures

a) F.5 and F.7 supplementary lessons after school:

1. Subject Panel Heads hand in information on the request of arrangement by the end of first week in September.

2. Allocation of periods for each subject is based on a regular two weeks' cycle. 3. Schedule of arrangement is to be printed and distributed to students and teachers

concerned by mid-September. 4. Details and arrangement of supplementary lessons are to be confirmed by

teachers with the students. 5. Student-in-charge should book the room for tutorial at least one day in advance.

b) Form Test after school:

1) Consultation of arrangement is to be made between panel heads and subject teachers.

2) Rooms for tests are to be booked in advance. 3) Arrangement of invigilation is to be made by panel heads. 4) Information is to be filled in the file at the General Office. 5) Parents are to be informed as required.

c) Supplementary lessons by individual teacher:

1) Arrangement is to be made with the students so that all of them are able to attend.

2) Rooms are to be booked in advance. 3) Information is to be filled in the file at the General Office. 4) Parents are to be informed as required.

Acad.Aff. E3

SUBSTITUTION OF LESSONS I) Purposes

a) arrange teachers to take over the lessons of a teacher when he/she is unable to attend his/her normal lessons; and

b) ensure a fair sharing of such lessons. II) Guidelines

a) Sick Leave 1) A teacher having sick leave should inform the Principal before 8:00 a.m.. 2) For a teacher who has a sick leave, his/her leave will be counted in the Leave

Record. 3) For the teacher who has sick leave, he/she will not be arranged to take up any

supplementary period on the first day he/she resumes duty.

b) Official Leave 1) A teacher can leave officially only when he/she has got the Principal’s

approval. 2) For a teacher who has official leave, his/her leave will not be counted in the

Leave Record. 3) To minimize the effect of official leave to our students, the teacher concerned

should try his/her best to make an alternation of periods with his/her colleague(s).

4) Only when making alteration of periods is not possible substitution will be arranged for the teacher concerned.

5) The teacher who is going to leave officially should fill in the Leave and Alternative of Periods record form in the General Office before the date of leave. The information to be filled in these forms includes the date of leave, the lessons’ alteration made, teachers involved. Besides, the teacher should indicate clearly whether substitution is needed or not.

c) The teacher who has taken up supplementary period will be counted in the Substitution Record.

d) The teachers being substituted by student teacher will be selected, with the highest priority, to take up the supplementary periods and these will not be counted in the Substitution Record.

e) If the Native English Teacher (NET) is absent, the partner of the NET will take up the oral lesson. However, the period taken up by this teacher will not be counted in the Substitution Record.

f) If a P.E. teacher is absent, a classroom should be arranged for the students. g) A summary of Leave and Substitution Record will be printed at the end of each

term. The summary will be kept in the General Office for reference. h) An annual summary of Leave and Substitution Record will be prepared at the end

of the school year and kept in the General Office for reference. i) Half of the Debit of Credit Points in the Leave and Substitution Record will be

brought forward to the next school year.

Acad.Aff. E4

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be varied only after consultation with the teachers and the Principal.

IV) Procedures a) Check whether there is/are any teacher(s) absent or having office leave. b) The Leave and Alternation of Periods Record which can be found in the office

counter should be checked to see whether substitution should be arranged or not. c) Arrange substitutions when teachers are not able to attend their normal lessons. d) Activate the substitution program. e) Activate the Start function. f) Select the initial of teacher who is absent or having official leave, and then

arrange for the substitutions. g) Select teacher(s) to take up the supplementary periods according to the following:

1) The teacher being substituted by student teacher has the highest priority. 2) The order of priority generated by the computer program will be followed. 3) Avoid selecting teachers with six periods on that day. 4) If an alteration of periods has been made on that day, make sure the teachers

involved should not be arranged to take up any supplementary period during altered periods.

h) Check whether the teacher absent is subject teacher of F.6-F.7. If he/she is a subject teacher of F.6-F.7, the period(s) will be counted in the Leave Record but no teacher will be assigned for substitution. The students will be informed to have self-study in that period.

i) Check whether the teacher absent is a P.E. teacher or not. If he/she is a P.E. teacher, a classroom should be arranged to accommodate the students having P.E. lessons.

j) Check whether the teacher absent is a class master/mistress. If he/she is F.1-F.4 class master/mistress, general office should inform another class master/mistress to take the duty of roll call. If he/she is F.5-F.7 class master/mistress, a teacher should be arranged to take the duty of roll call.

k) Click the “Print” function to print the substitution memo and substitution timetable.

l) The Principal or the teacher- in-charge will sign the substitution timetable printed. m) The substitution memo will be sent to the teachers involved by the janitor staff

and the teachers have to sign on the substitution timetable to confirm the arrangement made.

n) The signed substitution timetable will be filed. o) The teachers being arranged to take up the supplementary periods should go to the

corresponding classes as stated in the substitution memo.

Acad.Aff. E5

SCHOOL CALENDAR I) Purposes

a) ensure the best arrangement of the school holidays, tests, examinations and whole school functions; and

b) provide information for teachers to plan for various functions.

II) Guidelines

a) The number of school days in the two terms should be roughly the same. b) The number of school days for each School Day should be roughly the same.

Alteration of day may be made in the calendar. c) School holidays, tests, examinations, school days for F.5 and F.7 students, and

whole school functions should be shown in the calendar.

III) Basis of Discretion

The policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) CCA Master and teachers-in-charge of various whole school functions (including School Picnic, Sports Day, Swimming Gala, Speech Day, Parents’ Day, Staff Development Days and various CCA activities etc.) should submit the proposed dates of functions in the coming school year to the teacher- in-charge of school calendar near mid June.

b) Upon receipt of the circular memo from the Education Department concerning the recommended school holidays, teacher- in-charge of school calendar will start to prepare the calendar for the coming school year.

c) The ‘draft’ school calendar will be circulated within CCA Master and Vice-Principals asking for any feedback. Amendment will be made.

d) The ‘amended’ school calendar will be submitted to the Principal seeking for approval.

e) During the last staff meeting in July, each teacher should get a copy of ‘provisional’ school calendar in order to plan for functions of coming school year.

f) When the new school year starts, the SAMS administrator will enter the details of school calendar into SAMS so as to make it ready to be sent to the Education Department through CDS.

Acad.Aff. E6

TEACHING PRACTICE I) Purposes

a) provide teaching experience for the student teachers of tertiary educational institutes in our school; and

b) provide opportunities for student teachers to try out different teaching approaches in the classroom.

II) Guidelines

a) Applications from various tertiary educational institutes are welcome.

b) No more than three student teachers have their practice at any one time.

c) No more than two student teachers have the same subject practised in the same academic year.

d) The medium of instruction of the subject must be the same as that in our school.

e) The highest level of teaching practice is limited to F.4.

f) Normal classes are usually arranged for teaching practice. In making such arrangement, remedial groups / split classes should be avoided.

g) Lessons for teaching practice should be evenly distributed within a week for each student teacher.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will only be altered after consultation with the Academic

Committee and the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Application letters are usually received in October. Negotiation sometimes may be needed with the tertiary institute so that the above guidelines are satisfied.

b) Advice should be sought from the respective panel heads of the form involved and / or teachers to be substituted by student teachers.

c) A preliminary time-table for the student teacher is worked out.

d) Inform teachers to be substituted of the details of teaching practice.

Acad.Aff. E7

e) A school visit should be arranged for the student teacher 3 to 4 weeks before the practice. 1) A general briefing on our school: school motto, school regulations, staff,

students, general practice and facilities by the teacher i/c of teaching practice (administration).

2) An interview between the student teacher and the teacher to be substituted. 3) Collection of the time-table, teaching resources and reference from the

subject teacher and the Library. 4) Touring around the school premises.

f) Inform the following staff of the practice: 1) Clerk i/c, so that the

i) name-list of staff attendance is updated. ii) sitting arrangement of student teachers in the Library is made.

2) Teacher i/c of lesson substitution, so that substitution of lessons by teachers with lessons assigned to student teachers is arranged with priority.

3) Teacher i/c of invigilation time-table arrangement, so that student teachers would share the invigilation duties during the test and examination period.

g) On the first day of teaching practice, the student teacher should be introduced to the students by the subject teacher.

h) Appointed teacher advisor has to observe lessons and give advice to student teacher as required.

i) A performance report has to be completed by the subject teacher concerned.

j) An overall performance report is then compiled by the teacher i/c teaching practice (adm).

Interest Groups

Service & Uniform Groups

SportsGroups

Inter-House Competition

Academic

Ball Games

Sports Day and

Swimming Gala

Excursion

Post-Exam Activities

Cheering Team

Art

Dance

Music

Co-Curricular Activities

Students’ Union

Club Activities

House Union

School/ Class Picnic

CO-CURRICULUM ACTIVITIES

A) General Policy A1-2 B) Co-Curriculum Activities B1-3 C) Students’ Union C1-3 D) Club Activities D1-14

1. Academic Clubs 2. Interest Groups 3. Services & Uniform Groups 4. Sports Group 5. Formation for new clubs

E) House Union E1-20 1. House Election 2. Inter-House Competition

a) Inter-House Academic Competition b) Inter-House Ball Games Competition c) Sports Day and Swimming Gala d) Inter-House Cheering Team Competition e) Inter-House Art Competition f) Inter-House Dance Competition g) Inter-House Music Competition

F) Excursion F1-10 G) School/Class Picnic G1-10 H) Post-Exam. Activities H1-2

ECA A 1

GENERAL POLICY a) It allows students to spend their leisure time meaningfully through various

extra-curriculum activities. b) Students can understand how to develop their physical and intellectual aptitude and

widen their social horizons through activities. c) Students can enhance the 5 aspects of education: ethics, intellect, social skills,

physique and aesthetics, in daily life. d) Through internal and external activities, students can develop their sense of

belonging to the school. e) It can encourage students to develop social and civic awareness and responsibility.

ECA A 2

General Guide Line and Special Concern 1. Each student cannot participate more than 3 clubs and cannot become committee

members of more than 2 clubs. Committee members of each club must be F.2 or above students.

2. Every Tuesday will be the ‘Tutorial Day’ on which all extracurricular activities will

be suspended in order to allow teachers to give tutorial lessons or tests to students. 3. All extracurricular activities will be suspended again one week before term test and

2 weeks before examination week to allow students and teachers to have ample time to prepare for the examination (this measure will not apply on special classes with professional coach employed).

4. The media for all activity posters, notices and morning session announcement must

be in English or in bilingual. 5. To uphold the school reputation, teachers were advised to reschedule our internal

activities if there were any clashes between inter-school competitions and school activities.

6. With the emphasis on academic achievement, intra-school non-academic activities

were to give way to academic activities. 7. F.5 and F.7 students were to be less involved in interschool competitions. 8. It was basically agreed to provide at least one outside-the-territory visit for every

student in his five to seven years’ secondary school life here. Teachers were to take turns to accompany the students. Details would be confirmed later.

9. The school expressed their concern on the fact that certain social functions held in

the school campus e.g. BBQ would be considered ‘unreasonable school activities’ under the block insurance coverage. Insurance would be needed for individual activities not covered.

ECA B1

CO-CURRICULUM ACTIVITIES

I) Purposes

a) arouse a sense of belonging to school;

b) as part of moral and civic education;

c) cultivate students’ interest in various aspects;

d) help to induce students’ aptitude;

e) spend leisure time meaningfully;

f) apply the knowledge and skills they have learned;

g) have more friends and improve their sociability;

h) learn leadership skills;

i) improve mutual understanding among teachers and students;

j) uplift school reputation;

k) enhance co-operation and unity in school; and

l) develop students’ confidence, independence and self-discipline ability.

m) enhance co-operation among teachers;

n) provide administration training to teachers;

o) teachers can have chance to exhibit their work capacity;

II) Guidelines

a) Activities 1) Activities must be meaningful and conducted with an appropriate attitude.

Teachers must give clear instructions to students, ensure their safety during the

activities and to maintain high standard of activity management.

2) If an activity requires school facilities, teachers must make prior application

and registration from the School.

3) For external competitions/activities, approval must be sought from Principal

first. For inviting other schools for competitions/activities in School, teachers

also have to obtain the Principal’s permission first.

4) In outings students must be accompanied by at least a teacher and teachers have

to inform students’ parents and get their permission in writing first.

5) Students have to follow general attendance regulations as in normal classes

during participating any activity. Any absence, lateness or misbehavior will be

recorded, warned or penalized as appropriate.

ECA B2

6) Besides recording students’ attendance, teachers have to make a brief report of

the activity, any accidents or contingency in the designated form.

7) Students must dress as instructed and bring along necessary equipment for the

activity.

8) If after-school detention and an co-curricular activity take place at the same

time, the former will prevail and the student has to apply leave from the

teacher- in-charge of the activity.

9) If a supplementary lesson/ test and an co-curricular activity take place at the

same time, the former will also prevail and the student has to apply leave from

the activity. However, teachers have to avoid arranging supplementary lessons

or tests during a whole school co-curricular activity.

10) To collect activity fee, the amount should be kept to the minimum and have to

include such provision in the activity budget and obtain Principal’s prior

approval.

11) For any accidents or contingency during activity, teachers must report Principal

immediately. If there are any students injured, teacher must inform the school

and parents at once.

12) Teachers have to observe safety strictly during outing. The ideal proportion for

teacher and students during outings is 1: 30.

13) If there are any changes for the outing, such as postponement, cancellation or a

change of teacher-on-duty, teachers must inform the Principal and the CCA

Master.

14) Co-curriculum Enrolment Day will be arranged in mid-September every year.

All clubs and societies will set up counters in the School Hall to collect

students’ application forms for enrolment. The enrolment lists will be entered

into the computer by mid-October. Form teachers will have a detailed report of

their class to facilitate their communication with parents.

15) Study groups and tutorial classes can be arranged after school every Tuesday

when all co-curricular activities after school should be cancelled and the SU

will set up study room for students until 7:00pm. All other co-curricular

activities should be suspended on that day. This arrangement is aimed at

facilitating teachers to arrange supplementary lessons and tests or to handle

after-school detention.

16) All activities must be suspended one week before term test or 2 weeks before

term examination to allow students to prepare for the examination (except for

activities with professional coaches specially employed from outside).

ECA B3

17) All activity posters and notices for students (except for Chinese subjects such

as Chinese Language, Chinese History) must be written in English, of course,

or bilingual if possible.

b) Yearly financial arrangement: 1) Activity fund should be shared by students. Students can apply for school

subsidy for general operational and equipment expenses, however, we

discourage students for applying activity subsidy for entertainment purposes;

2) Financial year will be ended in August every year.

3) School subsidy can only be used on non-entertainment items.

4) All equipment purchased with school subsidy or activity fund must be used for

the activity only or can lend to other clubs/ societies for other activity use with

teacher- in-charge’s permission; otherwise, no private use will be allowed.

5) All income and expenses must be supported with vouchers or receipts.

ECA C 1

STUDENTS’ UNION

I) Purposes

a) enhance the communication and connection between the students and the school

authority;

b) develop the students’ potential and personality through activities;

c) coordinate extracurricular activities among various clubs and bodies;

d) represent the students in external affairs;

e) foster a sense of belonging among the students; and

f) promote the relationship between the teachers and the students.

II) Guidelines

a) All current students are members of the Union.

b) The executive committee (exco) should be elected each year by the students.

c) Teachers are only advisers and have no voting right.

d) Finance should be kept by the financial secretary and supervised by the T i/c.

e) All SU activities should abide by the Students’ Union Constitution.

III) Procedures

a) Executive Committee (Exco) 1) Formation

i) The president and 2 vice-presidents should be elected by members in

October.

ii) The elected presidents should appoint 9 secretaries to form a cabinet

before the AGM.

iii) Sub-committees should be formed to assist the Exco in implementing its

year plan.

2) Responsibilities The Exco should:

i) formulate and implement the approved year plan, budget, annual report

and financial report;

ii) deal with all internal and external affairs of the SU in consultation with

the teacher advisers; and

ECA C 2

iii) observe the resolutions passed by the Senate.

The teacher advisers should:

i) assure the proper conduct of the Exco election;

ii) advise the Exco on organizing activities, service provision, book-keeping

and correspondence; and

iii) assist the Exco in organizing activities if needed.

3) Scheme of Work i) In August, the teacher advisers should promote Exco election in F.6

Orientation Day and / or the Leadership Training Workshop.

ii) Before the school year starts, the teacher advisers should hold a meeting

to finalize the arrangement and timetable of Exco nomination and

election.

iii) After nomination, the teacher advisers should screen and question the

candidates and arrange an interview with the principal for them.

iv) The teacher advisers should give guidelines and instructions to candidates

on the proper conduct in promoting their platforms.

v) On the Election Day, Senate members are required to assist in the smooth

running of the polling procedure. The posts of presidents will be

returned by simple majority rule.

vi) The AGM cum inauguration should be held before the end of November.

The newly formed cabinet should brief the relevant teacher advisers on

their plan and speech.

vii) After inauguration, the teacher advisers and the Exco should hold a

meeting to allocate duties among the members.

viii) The teacher advisers should oversee the hand-over of documents and

properties between the outgoing Exco and the upcoming Exco.

ix) In early October of the following academic year, the teacher adviser

should check that documents and properties of SU are ready for

hand-over.

ECA C 3

b) Students’ Senate 1) Formation

i) The Students’ Senate should be formed at the beginning of the school year

after the committees of all the class clubs, societies, houses, and SU are

formed.

ii) The Senate should be composed of two teacher advisers and 21 student

representatives elected by the students

iii) The election of the chairman and the secretary should be held in the 1st

Senate Meeting and chaired by the outgoing Senate Chairman.

2) Responsibilities The Senate is responsible for organizing and handling the following:

i) Senate Meetings (to approve the year plan, budget, annual report and

financial report of the Exco)

ii) AGM cum Inauguration

iii) EGM

iv) SU Elections and By-elections and

v) SU Foundation

3) Scheme of Work i) In the 1st Staff Meeting, timetable of the election should be announced so

that arrangements could be made by teachers involved.

ii) Election of the cabinet of the Exco should be held by mid-October.

(Please refer to Executive Committee) It includes the Forum and the

Voting.

iii) A short meeting should be held to elect the student representatives.

iv) The 1st Senate Meeting should be held before the AGM to discuss and

pass the year plan and budget of the new Exco.

v) The AGM cum Inauguration should be held after the Exco is formed. In

the meeting, the outgoing Exco should present the annual report to the

members.

vi) At the end of the school year, another Senate Meeting should be held to

approve the annual report and financial report of the year.

vii) The chairman throughout the year can call other Senate meetings, if

necessary.

ECA D1

CLUB ACTIVITIES

I) Purposes

a) widen students’ horizons outside regular classroom teaching;

b) reinforce students’ sense of responsibility through the organisation and promotion

of activities;

c) improve students’ organisational power and leadership; and

d) create chances for students to develop a positive and strong self- image for

themselves.

II) Guidelines

a) The duties and responsibility of the teacher-in-charge: 1) The Teacher- in-charge is to assist with the formation of school clubs, provide

guidance and supervision for the club operation. For individual service or

interest groups, outside school advisers with principal’s approval will also be

provided to assist the teacher-in-charge.

2) In September every year, they have to prepare the year plan for the school year

and fill in the forms ‘Annual Programme Plan’ (Appendix 1) and ‘Estimate of

Expenditure’ (Appendix 2).

3) After the commencement of the new school year, they have to assist club

committee to chair club meetings and to promote club activities.

4) The Teacher-in-charge is required to supervise, assist and review the club

activities carried out in the year.

5) They have to supervise the financial arrangement of the club.

6) They have to assist the treasurer of the school club to complete the ‘Financial

Report’ (Appendix 3) for the club and have it signed and hand it to the CCA

Master before the end of the school year in August every year.

7) They have to keep records for all club activities properly.(Appendix 4)

8) The Teacher- in-charge is to assist the CCA Master in the mid of May every year

in assessing the students who take part in school activities and to award those

committee members at the school year end who have good performance in the

year.

ECA D2

b) Club Committee 1) The club committee can be formed by teacher- in-charge’s appointment or by

election.

2) Members of the committee must be at least F.2 students.

3) The composition of the committee generally includes a chairman, a

vice-chairman, a secretary, a treasurer and a steward.

4) The committee can appoint some special posts for the club committee with the

teacher- in-charge’s approval to cope with the special needs and duties of each

club.

5) The committee has to promote the club activities with endeavour and keep

proper records of the meetings.

6) The committee must obtain the teacher- in-charge’s approval before carrying out

any club activities.

c) Club Members 1) All students have fair and equal chance to participate in all school club

activities.

2) Participation in the club activities is on a voluntary basis. However, once

students decide to take part, they have to follow the attendance rule of the club

and the teacher-in-charge must carry out the attendance checking strictly. Proper

record must be kept for latecomers, early leavers and absentees.

3) To apply for a leave, members must provide a letter written and signed by their

parents to explain the reason for the absence to the teacher- in-charge.

4) To ensure the quality of the members for individual school clubs, the

teacher- in-charge can recruit members by nomination, selection, or by

compulsory recruitment.

5) In order not to affect students’ regular classroom study, they cannot take part in

more than 3 school clubs with regular gatherings or being committee members

for more than 2 clubs in a year.

d) Assessment for Club Members 1) The teacher- in-charge has to record and assess after each club activity the

performance of the members participating.

2) By the end of the school year, the teacher- in-charge has to assess objectively the

performance of each club member participating in the club activities in the year.

3) The CCA record and assessment of each student will be used for the school

principal, form teachers, discipline master, counselling master, social workers

and parents’ reference when required.

ECA D3

4) The CCA record and assessment will also be useful for teachers to prepare

testimonials or to carry out career counselling to students who are going to

graduate from school.

e) Report for Club Activities and its Assessment 1) The teacher- in-charge has to complete a report for club activities (Appendix 4)

to the CCA Master for record by the end of the school year.

2) The report will also be handed to the principal for checking in order to review

and plan the school activities in the following year.

f) Activity Fund 1) School clubs can apply subsidy from school for basic operational expenses and

to purchase essential equipment for the clubs. However, it is not encouraged to

use school subsidy for any entertainment activity. The school subsidy for club

orientation will be HK$50 and for picnic or camping, the maximum subsidy

will be HK$200 per outing.

2) The club fee collected should be kept to the minimum. Such provision has to be

stated in the budget and the principal’s prior approval should be obtained before

collecting it.

3) The application for activity fund will start in October every year. For detailed

procedural guidelines, refer to ‘Financial Management for Societies/Clubs

under Extra Curriculum Activities’.

g) Charity Fund Raising 1) A fund raising activity has to be approved by the principal first and proposed to

the Education Department for their prior written approval.

2) The activity must be carried out in an open and voluntary manner. The

teacher- in-charge has to keep close supervision on the activity.

3) The charity fund collected must be deposited to the designated bank account at

the soonest possible.

4) The Treasurer has to prepare a comprehensive financial report to the public and

send a copy to Education Department for record.

h) Outside School Activities or Joint-school Activities 1) The teacher- in-charge must obtain the principal’s prior approval.

2) The teacher- in-charge has to supervise the operation of the committee for

preparing and carrying out the joint-school activities in order to ensure a smooth

operation and cooperation.

ECA D4

3) The teacher- in-charge has to supervise the conduct and behaviour of the

members during the joint-school activities in order not to do any harm to the

school’s reputation.

i) General Affairs 1) All publications or posters of the clubs have to be checked, approved and signed

by the teacher- in-charge before printing and posting.

2) For any propaganda or broadcasting of the clubs, it needs to be conducted in

English. The committee member has to fill in an ‘Announcement Form’ which

can be obtained from the School Office and have it checked and signed by the

teacher- in-charge before returning it to the Office.

3) If any school clubs require display boards for promotion or exhibition, they

have to follow the procedures under the ‘Guidelines for Using Display Boards’.

4) For borrowing audio and visual equipment from school, the club

teacher- in-charge can fill in an application from the General Office. The club

teacher- in-charge is also required to supervise and be responsible for the proper

use of the equipment by the club members.

5) For any trophies, awards, prizes, souvenirs or flags won by the school clubs, as

an encouragement to the clubs, they can hand it to the school for display at the

prize cabinets.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation

with the Principal and the CCA Master.

ECA D5

INTEREST GROUPS

I) Purposes

a) help students to cultivate a proper hobby for their leisure time;

b) soothe students’ tension from regular classroom study;

c) widen their knowledge and horizons outside regular class teaching;

d) help students make good use of leisure time;

e) promote students’ physical development; and

f) enhance students’ spirit of co-operation.

II) Guidelines

a) A teacher- in-charge is to be appointed by Principal and should have relevant

knowledge on the activity.

b) All students have equal opportunity to participate in all interest groups.

c) If an outside tutor is required, the tutor fee is to be shared equally by all students

participating. If the tutor fee is high, the teacher- in-charge could apply for school

subsidy. The amount of subsidy is to be determined by the Principal.

d) Students have to prepare their own learning tools/materials, e.g. musical

instruments, colour, uniforms.

e) Activities should be arranged evenly throughout the year.

f) Activities of all interest groups should in no way affect the normal study of

students.

g) The Interest Groups now provided in the School are as follows:

O.M. Club Award for Youth Plan Chess Club Dance Club Photography Club I.T. Ambassador Drama Club Astronomy Club Taekwords Club Chinese Orchestra Scrabble Club String Orchestra Quiz Society School Choir Gardening Club English Corner Hiking Club

To form a new interest group, please refer to “Registration for New School Clubs”.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation

with the Principal and the CCA Master.

ECA D6

SERVICE & UNIFORM GROUPS

I) Purposes

a) cultivate students’ sense of caring for others in the community;

b) develop their spirit of civic service;

c) enhance students’ social development and team work; and

d) develop special and useful skills to students through various recreational activities

in the service groups.

II) Guidelines

a) The teacher- in-charge is to be appointed by the Principal

b) The teacher-in-charge should have relevant knowledge or basic training in order to

provide guidance to the operation of the service groups.

c) The teacher- in-charge must seek the Principal’s prior approval when the group

prepares to provide services outside school. Teachers can refer to ‘Excursion’ for

outing procedures.

d) The teacher- in-charge must provide on site co-ordination and guidance to students

while carrying out services inside or outside school to ensure students’ safety.

e) If the training activities of the service groups need to be carried out outside school

or after school, the teacher- in-charge has to seek prior parental approval.

f) If the services organised have to be carried out outside school, prior parental

approval is also required.

g) The Service & Uniform Groups now provided in the School are as follows:

Boy Scouts Student Librarians Girl Guides School Prefects Community Youth Club Flag Selling Junior Police Call Club School Newspaper Red Cross Youth Cadet Radio Ho Lap Road Safety Patrol Wong Tai Sin Temple Docent Service Stage Management Group Students’ Union Environmental Protection Ambassador

To form a new service group, please refer to “Registration for New School Clubs”.

ECA D7

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation

with the principal and the CCA Master.

ECA D8

SPORTS GROUPS

I) Purposes

a) To teach basic knowledge and skills in different physical activities.

b) To help students promote their body health and communication skills through

taking active roles in physical fitness development programmes and other schemes.

c) To encourage students to participate actively and regularly in PE-related activities

so as to develop a healthy lifestyle.

d) To promote students’ ability in the appreciation of aesthetic movements.

e) To cultivate appropriate values and attitudes, with emphasis on nurturing care and

respect.

II) Guidelines

a) The teacher- in-charge is to be decided by the PE Department.

b) The teacher-in-charge should have relevant knowledge or basic training in order to

provide guidance to the operation of the groups.

c) If the training activities of the sports groups need to be carried out outside school or

after school, in other camp sites the teacher- in-charge has to seek prior parental

approval.

d) The Sports Groups now provided in the School are as follows:

Sports Association Tennis Training Basketball Training (Boys) Basketball Training (Girls) Football Training Table Tennis Training Badminton Training Swimming Training Athletic Training Fitness Training Volleyball Training (Girls) Handball Training (Boys)

To form a new service group, please refer to “Registration for New School Clubs”.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation

with the principal and the CCA Master.

ECA D9

FORMATION FOR NEW CLUBS

I) Guidelines

a) A new club has to comply with the goals of education and policies of the school.

b) Any application for forming a new club should be forwarded to the school principal

and the CCA Master 6 months before the next school year.

c) A suitable personnel should be invited to be the teacher- in-charge before

registration.

II) Procedures

a) Students who are interested in setting up a new school club have to call a meeting

to confirm the objectives, directions, forms of activities, composition of the

executive committee and financial arrangement of the club six months before the

new school year starts.

b) The CCA Master has to be present in the meeting to act as a consultant.

c) If there is any conflict between the school policy and the objectives/directions of

the new club, the executive committee has to make suitable adjustment to comply

with the school general education goals and policies.

d) After the meeting, the chairman of the executive committee has to explain their

objectives and details to the school principal with the presence of the CCA Master.

The principal will have the final decision whether to accept the application or not.

e) If the application for registration is accepted, the chairman of the executive

committee has to obtain and fill a ‘Registration Form for New Club’ (Appendix 5)

from the CCA Master for a formal registration.

f) The Chairman has to invite suitable personnel to be the teacher- in-charge of the

new club after the principal’s approval; or the chairman can request the principal to

make suitable appointment for the new club.

g) After the registration, the general committee operation, such as promotion of

activities, member recruitment, financial arrangement will be the same as other

school clubs.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation

with the Principal and the CCA Master.

ECA D10

HO LAP COLLEGE

Annual Programme Plan ( -- )

Name of Club/Society/House/Team:_________________________________

Month Activity Description Aim Name of teacher

Remarks: Overall-in-charge:_________________

( )

Date:_________________

Appendix 1

ECA D11

HO LAP COLLEGE Estimate of Expenditure

( -- ) Name of Club / Society / House / Team:________________________

Activity Total Estimated

Cost

Contribution from Participants Income from other sources

(please described)

Subsidy Requested from School

Gross Total:

Remarks:

Teacher- in-charge: _____________________

( ) Date:_____________________

Appendix 2

ECA D12

HO LAP COLLEGE Statement of Income and Expenditure

House/ Club/ Society:_______________________ Date:___/___/20___ to ___/___/20___

INCOME: Cash Balance at commencement of year: Sum Amount C.Total($)

At Bank $

In Hand $_______ $

Subscriptions: Receipts from members: ________ pupils of $ each $

Subsidy from school: 1. Annual Subsidy $

2. Non-recurrent Subsidy

a) $

b) $_______ $

Income from other sources: a) $

b) $_______ $_______

TOTAL INCOME.............................$______

EXPENDITURE: a) $

b) $

c) $

d) $

e) $

f) $

g) $

TOTAL EXPENDITURE..............$_______

Cash Balance at the end of the year: a) At Bank $________ b) In Hand $________ $_______

Treasurer: ____________ Teacher-in-charge:_____________ Date:___________

( ) ( )

Appendix 3

ECA D13

HO LAP COLLEGE Record of Co-curricular Activities

(20 -20 )

A. Name of activity: Date for meeting (if regular):

Place of meeting (if regular):

B. List of activities carried out in this academic year: Date Description Remarks

C. Prizes obtained/ Special information

Date:_______________ Teacher- in-charge:_________________

( )

Appendix 4

ECA D14

HO LAP COLLEGE

REGISTRATION FORM FOR NEW CLUB

School Year: _________________________________________________________

Name of Club: ______________________________________________

Teacher- in-charge: ___________________________________________

Expected No. of Members: _____________________________________

A. AIMS OF THE CLUB:

B. COMMITTEE MEMBERS POST NAME CLASS

C. PROPOSED ACTIVITIES WITH DATES

D. MEMBERS : (Please fill in the name and class of each member on page overleaf when

recruitment is completed.)

… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … ..

E. FOR SCHOOL USE ONLY:

APPROVAL: YES/ NO/ OTHER DECISION________________________________________

APPROVED BY: ___________________________________ (SIGNATURE OF PRINCIPAL)

Date: _______________________

Appendix 5

ECA E1

HOUSE UNION

I) Purposes

a) enhance the communication, unity and co-ordination of Inter-House activities;

b) develop students’ sense of belonging to the House and to the School; and

c) through the co-ordination of various Inter-House activities, provide more chances

to students to develop their full potential.

II) Guidelines

a) House 1) 4 Houses in School: Red, Yellow, Blue and Green.

2) 4 Houses have to participate in all Inter-House activities.

b) House Members 1) Each new Ho Lap student will be assigned to one of the Houses.

2) A student will become a house member of the House assigned until the date

he/she leaves School.

3) Before the commencement of a new school year, we will work out the existing

proportion and distribution of all house members in 4 Houses in order to

determine the ratio of new members to be allocated in each House with the

computer.

4) Each house member has to pay house fee every year.

c) House Captain and House Committee 1) House Captain is to be elected by all his House members and teachers in

October every year.

2) The House Captain elected has to form his committee within one week after

the election to provide services to members.

3) The committee includes a Vice-House Captain, a Treasurer, a Secretary, a

Recreational Secretary, student- in-charge for Entertainment Competitions,

student- in-charge for Academic Competitions, and student- in-charge for Sports

Competitions.

d) House Master/Mistress and House Advisers 1) Each house has a team of House Master/Mistress and House Advisers to assist

in their operation.

ECA E2

2) House Advisers are to be appointed by the Principal before the commencement

of a new school year.

3) The House Master and Mistress have to be elected among the House Advisers

in October every year before the House Election Day.

4) The duties of House Master/Mistress and House Advisers are as follows:

i) assist in the House Election and setting up of the House committee;

ii) discuss with House committee to prepare for the year plan ;

iii) act as a bridge between School and Houses to prevent any conflicts

between house activities and other school activities, such as to understand

the allocation of school resources in various activities;

iv) act as consultants of the House and to ensure the proper operation of the

committee;

v) to provide sufficient support to the House and positive encouragement to

the activities/services they organise;

vi) supervise and audit the financial record of the House; and

vii) assist CCA Master to assess the performance of house members in various

activities.

e) House Union Advisers 1) House Union Advisers are to be appointed by Principal before the

commencement of a new school year.

2) House Union Advisers include the ones to be responsible for Entertainment

competitions, Sports competitions, and Academic competitions. The

composition of House Union Advisers may vary according to the change of

competition events. It is to be determined by the Principal.

3) The duties of House Union Advisers are as follows:

i) prepare procedures, forms, and timetables for various Inter-house

competitions;

ii) prepare budget for various Inter-house competitions;

iii) have meetings with 4 House committees to determine the details for

various Inter-house activities; and

iv) assist to launch all Inter-house competitions successfully.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation

with the Principal and CCA Master.

ECA E3

HOUSE ELECTION

I) Purposes

a) cultivate civic awareness and responsibility ;

b) enhance students’ organisational power and leadership;

c) assist school to promote various cultural and recreational activities; and

d) enhance students’ sense of community.

II) Guidelines

a) The House Election week should take place in early October every year.

b) All elections must take place in School Hall after school.

c) All House Masters/Mistresses and House members must be present in their House

Election.

d) Prior notification should be made to parents’ one week before the Election week.

e) Nomination should be made before the election.

f) Each House needs to prepare a promotion board one week before the election to

display financial reports of the previous year and details of all the candidates for

the house captain.

g) Promotion boards should be placed next to the school main entrance for students’

reference.

h) Though the election will be carried out openly, House Masters/Mistresses and

Captains should try to hunt suitable candidates to avoid insufficient nomination by

the closing day.

i) Ex- House Captain could only nominate one candidate. Other House members

could help to nominate more suitable ones.

j) Ex- House Captain can be elected again but House Masters/Mistresses should

consider providing chances for other promising House members.

k) Compulsory attendance is required for each house member at their house election

meeting.

l) Only F.4 to F.7 students are eligible for being nominated to be the candidates of the

election.

m) The outgoing committee of each House will hold the election meeting.

ECA E4

III) Procedures

a) Nomination 1) Each House will have nomination for one House Captain.

2) Each House member can only nominate one candidate, and each nomination

should have three supporters.

3) All Houses must use official Nomination Form.

4) Each Nomination Form must be signed by the candidate, nominee and three

supporters; besides, information and a photo of the candidate has to be

enclosed.

5) Nomination Form can be obtained from House Union Master or House

Masters/Mistresses and completed forms have to be returned to House Union

Master.

6) The deadline for nomination will be at 12:00 noon 10 days before the election.

7) Each House will display the candidates’ information on their promotion board

together with the previous year financial report. All promotion boards should

be ready for display 7 days before election.

b) Election Meeting 1) House Union will be responsible for the audio equipment, blackboards and

chairs setting before the election. Each House will handle other decoration at

School Hall.

2) Five minutes before the school ends all House members should pack their

belongings and arrive at School Hall.

3) House members should take the roll call, get the ballot paper, take a seat and

wait for the programme to start.

4) The Election programme should start with the presence of all House Masters,

Mistresses and candidates.

5) The outgoing House Captain will make the annual report.

6) The outgoing Treasurer will make the financial report.

7) The outgoing House Captain will introduce the new House Master/Mistress to

members.

8) Speeches will be given by the outgoing and the new House Masters or

Mistresses.

9) The outgoing House Captain will introduce the candidates.

10) Candidates will make their speeches.

ECA E5

11) Voting will be started in a silence and confidential way and ballot paper will be

collected.

12) Votes counting should be supervised by returning officers.

13) The outgoing House Captain will announce results.

14) New House Captain will give a speech and lead the singing of House Song.

15) New House Captain should inform the House Union Master the election result

on the same day. House Union will announce the election result to the whole

school.

c) Rules and regulation for Election 1) The election will be carried out by anonymous votes

2) Each House can design their own voting forms and forms can be printed by

School Office or outside copying service companies.

3) Each House member will have one vote.

4) Vote counting will be carried out by outgoing House Committee under the

supervision of a House Union Adviser.

5) If there is only one candidate for a post, the only candidate must have at least

100 votes before gaining the post. Otherwise, that post has to be re-elected on

the other day.

6) If 2 candidates gain the same votes, outgoing House Captain and new House

Master/Mistress will have veto power to decide the new House Captain.

ECA E6

INTER-HOUSE COMPETITIONS

I) Purposes

a) cultivate students’ independence and self-discipline ability;

b) train and induce students’ intellectual and physical aptitude through various

competitions; and

c) enhance their sense of belonging to the School.

II) Guidelines

a) Forms of competitions 1) We provide entertainment, academic and sports competitions.

2) Co-operation should be the main theme of all competition events.

3) We have to provide equal chances to all students to participate in all events of

competitions.

b) Scoring System 1) We use a 3-grade scoring system for all Inter-house competitions.

2) Competitions of different scale will be ranked different grades. The scale of

each competition will be determined by its number of participants, and time

required for preparation.

3) For the largest scale events, i.e. those with more than 50 participants in each

house and requiring at least 2 months’ time for preparation, will be ranked

grade one.

4) For medium scale events, i.e. those with around 30 participants in each house

and requir ing one month’s time for preparation, will be ranked grade two.

5) For the smallest scale events, i.e. those with around 10 participants in each

house and requiring not much time for preparation, will be ranked grade three.

6) Marks for each event will be as follows: Marks Position

Grade First Second Third Fourth 1 20 15 10 5 2 12 9 6 3 3 8 6 4 2

7) The overall results will be calculated after all events finish in the year. The

House with the highest score will be the champion of the year.

ECA E7

c) Date of competitions 1) There must be sufficient interval between different competitions to avoid

overloading to students and to school venues.

2) No Inter-house competition should take place one week before the School Test

or two weeks before the School Examination.

3) Ample time must be provided to students to prepare for each competition.

d) Finance 1) School subsidy for each house will be equal

2) House fee has to be standardised and approved by 4 Houses.

3) House has to prepare their budget for each competition according to the scale

and number of participants of the event.

4) Houses have to maintain a balanced budget for all competition events.

5) If there is surplus after finishing all the events, the House can carry the surplus

forward to next year. If there is a deficit, the House Master/Mistress will help

to advance the payment in the first instance and have it reimbursed in the next

year.

e) Number of Participants 1) All house members have equa l chances to participate in all competition events.

2) We encourage students of different forms to participate in various Inter-house

competitions.

3) Students should not participate in too many competitions to avoid any adverse

effects on their study.

III) Procedures

a) In mid September every year, the House Union Master is to call meetings with all

teachers- in-charge of various Inter-house competitions to discuss the direction and

timetables of the Inter-house competitions in the year.

b) The House Union Master is to issue a form ‘Budget for Inter-House Competition’

(Appendix I) to each teacher- in-charge to plan the details of the competition. The

details include the date of competition, number of participants, venue, time

required and budgets.

c) In early October, after collecting all ‘Budget for Inter-House Competition’ forms,

the House Union Master will draft a timetable for all competitions in the year and

to calculate the total expenditure required for all events so as to apply for activity

subsidy from the School.

ECA E8

d) In mid-October, when new House Captains and committees are elected, House

Union Master is to call a House Union meeting with the presence of all House

Masters, House Captains, committees and teachers-in-charge for various

competitions.

e) In the meeting, all teachers-in-charge have to report to 4 houses the details of the

competitions: date, number of participants, and procedures. The grade of each

competition is also to be determined and agreed in the meeting.

f) After setting up the timetable for various Inter-house competitions, 4 House

Captains have to organise and prepare for the events.

g) The House Union Master is to apply for the use of venue and materials/equipment

for various events in advance.

h) Teachers-in-charge of each competition has to invite judges for the event inside or

outside school. If the judges are to be invited outside school, the Principal’s prior

approval is required.

i) After each event, the teacher- in-charge has to report the results to the House Union

Master for record.

j) The House Union Master will calculate the total scores of each House after all the

events finish.

k) The total scores will be announced at the end-of-term presentation ceremony. The

Principal will deliver the prizes to the Champion House for all Inter-house

competitions of the year.

l) The House Union Master is required to collect the lists of participants for each

competition and enter the information into computer in order to assess students’

performance in co-curriculum activities.

m) After finishing all competition events, each House has to prepare a financial report

and hand it to the House Union Master for record.

VI) Basis of Discretion

The above policy only will be amended by the school administration after consultation

with the Principal and CCA Master.

ECA E9

INTER-HOUSE ACADEMIC COMPETITION

I) Purposes

a) promote house spirit, team spirit and cooperation among students through academic

competition;

b) enhance students’ ability to do research work independently and make systematic

presentation; and

c) enhance social concern and consciousness of students.

II) Guidelines

a) Inter-house Academic Competition is held annually.

b) Teachers-in-charge would decide the form and theme of the competition, usually a

piece of research work on social issues for each house.

c) House members should prepare their work well and presentation should be made

on the display board before deadline of the competition, and reports should be

made in the school hall during a whole school assembly.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will only be amended by the organiser after consultation with House

Union Master.

IV) Procedures

a) Teachers-in-charge should decide the form and theme of the competition in

September.

b) Discussion should be made with House Captains on the form and theme of the

competition before the research title is assigned to each House by draw.

c) Schedule for the competition should be made. Usually House Captains report

their progress to teachers- in-charge in late January.

d) Invitation for teacher adjudicator should be made in March.

e) Teachers-in-charge should request the appropriate number of display boards for

presenting the research material.

f) Display board should be assigned to each House several days before the

competition, which usually takes place in mid-April.

ECA E10

g) Marks are given on the basis of content, creativity and presentation of the project.

h) Marks of the written presentation accounts for 50%of the total marks for the event.

i) The second part of the competition would take place in the school hall after the

final examinations. Presentation in the school ha ll is usually in the form of drama.

Marks of the presentation in the school hall also accounts for 50% of the total

marks for the event.

j) The CCA Master arranges the programmes of the Post-exam Activity period. So the

teacher- in-charge should consult the CCA Master on the booking and the settings of

the school hall in advance.

k) Invitation for teacher adjudicator should be made in advance as well.

l) Total marks of both parts of the presentation would decide the position of each

House for the event.

ECA E11

INTER-HOUSE BALL GAMES COMPETITIONS

I) Purposes

a) encourage students to enjoy and appreciate the positive effects of physical

activities; b) promote house spirit and cooperation among students through the competitions; c) train students to be more initiative and self-motivated in organising the

competitions; d) help students stay in health and achieve good skills in sporting activities; and e) promote sportsmanship among students.

II) Guidelines

a) Frequency and Venue : 1) The competitions are held annually in the school playgrounds; 2) In case school playgrounds are not available, the competitions would be held

in public courts.

b) Responsibilities : 1) Sports Association is the organiser of the events and P.E. teachers are the

advisers. 2) The proposed details of the competitions must be approved or revised by the

four House-Captains in the meeting between the organiser and the four

House-Captains.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will only be amended by the organiser after consultation with House

Union Master and P.E. Department.

IV) Procedures

a) In mid-September, representatives of Sports Association should hold a meeting

with P.E. teachers to propose which ball games competitions are to be held.

ECA E12

b) In about late October, the organiser and four House-Captains should hold a meeting

to confirm :

i) general regulations

ii) dates

iii) grade of events

c) After having the above items confirmed, a copy of details should be given to the

P.E. Department and the House-Union Master as a record and another copy should

be posted up on the notice board of Sports Association to inform all students.

d) Announcements are made in advance to encourage students’ participation as

players or supporters.

ECA E13

SPORTS DAY AND SWIMMING GALA

I) Purposes

a) serve as an incentive to participation;

b) cultivate the sense of sportsmanship among athletes;

c) promote house spirit, team spirit and co-operation among students;

d) foster pursuit of excellence in performance;

e) promote a healthy competitive spirit among students; and

f) enhance students’ ability in sports appreciation.

II) Guidelines

a) The Sports Day and the Swimming Gala are held annually in a public sports ground

and a public swimming pool respectively.

b) Maximum student participation in the Sports Day and Swimming Gala is

encouraged in all forms.

c) The above events are held on an inter-house competition basis.

d) All students must wear school uniforms/PE uniforms except officials.

e) PE teachers are the organizers of the events.

f) The organizers should straightly observe guidelines on the organization and safety

precaution of the events.

g) Students must obtain written approval from their parents before taking part in the

competitions.

h) The PE panel head is responsible for getting information about the guest of honour

of the competition from the principal.

i) Trophies, medals and souvenirs should be ready one week before the prize

presentation ceremony.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation

with the principal and the PE panel.

ECA E14

IV) Procedures

a) Reservations of venues for the Sports Day and Swimming Gala should be made a

year in advance.

b) The panel head should prepare a duty list and work schedule on the preparation of

the competitions for PE teachers one months before the events take place.

c) The chief organizer should hold meetings among PE panel members to discuss and

make decision on 1) competition items and program planning;

2) the date for sports entry;

3) the recruitment of student helpers as officials; and

4) the dates of training courses for officials.

d) The chief organizer should hold an assembly to inform the whole school

1) prospective danger on each event and its safety precaution;

2) competition rules to be observed by athletes; and

3) disciplinary rules to be obeyed by both athletes and spectators.

e) The chief organizer is required to prepare duty lists for uniform groups, prefects,

teachers and PE teachers on competition days.

f) The chief organizer should submit the program of the competition and attend the

meeting between himself/herself and the officer- in-charge of the sports ground /

swimming pool on the day fixed by the officer of the sports ground / swimming

pool.

g) The organizer should ensure the smooth running of all preparation work and events

on the days of competitions.

h) Evaluation meeting should be held after the heats and finals of the Swimming gala

and Sports Day.

i) The panel head should inform CCA master the final scores of the competition.

ECA E15

INTER-HOUSE CHEERING TEAM COMPETITION

I) Purposes

a) cheer participants on their participation;

b) help create a competing environment in the sport event; and

c) promote, among house members, a sense of belonging and house spirit.

II) Guidelines

a) The Cheering- team competition is held annually along with the sports day and

swimming gala in the same venue.

b) The competition is carried out on an inter-house competitive basis.

c) The final result of the competition is obtained by totaling the house’s scores from

the sports day heats, sports day final and swimming gala accordingly.

d) House Union Master and the teacher- in-charge are the organizers of the event.

e) Maximum participation of house members is encouraged.

f) Cheering-team members are advised to wear P.E. uniforms.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will only be amended by the organiser after consultation with House

Union Master.

IV) Procedures

a) The dates and venues of the competition would be the same as the sports day and

swimming gala.

b) A meeting should be held at the beginning of each school year by House Union

Master, teacher-in-charge and House Captains to discuss the details and guidelines

of the up coming competition.

c) The seating arrangement of the cheering teams should be determined by a draw

among the House Captains or the cheering team leaders.

d) Teacher- in-charge is required to remind the 4 cheering team leaders that house

members’ participation in the event must be on a voluntary basis. For safety reasons,

it is strongly advised that all training sessions should be carried out within the

campus.

ECA E16

e) The cheerleaders are required to submit a list of participants to the

teacher- in-charge soon after the teams are formed.

f) Three House Union Advisers are to be invited by the teacher- in-charge as

adjudicators in each event.

g) The design and preparation of the marking sheets are teacher-in-charge’s

responsibility and should be done prior to the event.

h) Marking sheets should be distributed to the adjudicators one day prior to the sports

day or the swimming gala.

i) The prizes for the competition are to be prepared by House Union Master or the

teacher- in-charge.

j) The marking sheets should be kept properly such that it should be available for the

final scores calculation and for students’ references.

ECA E17

INTER-HOUSE ART COMPETITION

I) Purposes

a) promote students’ ability in art appreciation;

b) enhance students’ aptitude in visual arts;

c) promote students sense of belonging and collaboration; and

d) enrich students’ school life.

II) Guidelines

a) The Inter-house Art Competition should take place in July during Post-exam

Activity period every three years.

b) The competition would be held at the school hall or playground, depending on the

theme and form of the competition, so as to allow all students to participate the

event.

c) Teacher- in-charge would determine the theme and form of the competition.

d) According to the scale of the competition, teacher- in-charge would prepare a detail

of competition and marking scheme. It should be approved or revised by four house

committees in the House Union meeting.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the organiser after consultation with the

House Union Master.

IV) Procedures

a) At the beginning of the term, the Teacher- in-charge would select the theme, and

format of the competition, decide on the number of participants and prepare

marking scheme for the competition.

b) House Union Master needs to decide upon the venue and date of the competition,

usually during Post-exam Activity period.

c) In mid-October, the Teacher- in-charge of the competition would have a meeting

with House Union Master, Students’ Union and Four-House committees to approve

the details of the competition and to prepare the timetable for the competition.

d) After having approved the details of the event, 4 House Captains are to prepare the

ECA E18

list of participants of their house and to follow the timetable prepared for the

competition.

e) The Teacher-in-charge needs to fill in the application form for booking the venue

and equipment for the competition.

f) The Teacher- in-charge is to invite judges for the competition one month before the

event.

g) The Teacher- in-charge should purchase prizes/trophies/award certificates with

assistance from the Students’ Union.

h) Invited parties should assist in the venue decoration, time keeping, score/marking

calculation. The House Captains should help to help to keep discipline of their own

house during the competition

i) In order to ensure a smooth operation, Teacher- in-charge has to brief the committee

of Students’ Union and 4 House Captains on the operation details of the

competition one-week before the event.

j) If it involves a performance or show in the competition, the teacher-in-charge must

arrange a rehearsal for participants one-day before the competition.

k) The scores of the competition must be kept properly after the event for students’

reference or appeal, if any.

l) The Teacher- in-charge must inform the House Union Master of the final scores of

the competition in order to calculate the whole year Inter-house Competition result.

ECA E19

INTER-HOUSE DANCE COMPETITION

I) Purpose

a) enrich students’ knowledge in different types of dances; b) enhance students’ ability in dance appreciation; c) enable potential students to participate in dance competition; and d) promote house spirit, team spirit and co-operation among students.

II) Guidelines

a) The inter-house Dance Competition is held once every three years in the school hall.

b) The teacher- in-charge and representatives of four houses would determine the types of dance and the details for the competition.

c) All students are required to attend. III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation with the teacher- in-charge and House Union Master.

IV) Procedures

a) A meeting should be held in September among representatives of four houses and teacher- in-charge to decide the date of competition and types of dance.

b) Teacher- in-charge should 1) book the school hall and sound system in September; 2) invite adjudicators three months before the event and 3) prepare score sheets, certificates and prizes one month before the event.

c) House representatives should prepare the list of participants and arrange practice sessions for dancers.

d) Students’ Union should assist the teacher- in-charge in publicity, preparation of brochures, decoration of the venue, photo taking and video recording.

e) The teacher-in-charge should keep a record of the results and inform House Union Master the final scores of the competition.

f) Thank you letters with photos enclosed should be sent to adjudicators two weeks after the event.

ECA E20

INTER-HOUSE MUSIC COMPETITION

I) Purposes

a) promote house spirit, team spirit and co-operative power among pupils through music competition;

b) enable potential and talented students to participate in the music competition; c) enhance students the performing and music appreciating ability; and d) train students to be more initiative and self-motivated in music.

II) Guidelines

a) The Inter-House Music Competition is held once every three years in the school hall.

b) The House Union Master and the music teachers are the organizers of the event. c) All students are required to attend.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the organiser after consultation with House Union Master.

IV) Procedures

a) The music teacher and the House Union Master decide the date and venue of the competition.

b) Music teacher books the school hall and the sound system in advance. c) A meeting with four House captains should be held to discuss the items and the

guidelines of the competition. d) House captains are required to hand in the repertoire and the setting plan to the

music teacher one-month before the date of the event. e) Invitation letter for the adjudicator should be sent out at least two weeks before the

event. f) Teacher prepares all the certificates one-week before the event. g) Teacher prepares a programme, stationary and other aids for the adjudicator and

student helpers. h) A briefing with student helpers should be held to discuss the run down of the

programme. i) A rehearsal should be held on the pervious day before the competition. j) The music teacher should keep a record of the results of the competition for the

evaluation of the participants’ performance and for the final scores calculation among four Houses.

CCA F1

SCHOOL EXCURSIONS

I) Purposes

a) diversify learning by taking students out of the classroom to other places of interest

and education value;

b) provide social opportunity to students outside school;

c) widen students' horizons and provide relaxation; and

d) foster friendship among students and enhance student-teacher relationship.

II) Guidelines

a) All outings and visits organised by any school parties should be reported to school

at least 3 days in advance and must be approved by the Principal beforehand.

b) An excursion must be well planned beforehand to ensure a smooth operation and

success in realizing the objective(s) of the trip.

c) In all circumstances, teachers should accompany students. In general one teacher

should be in charge of not more than 30 students. However for activities that may

involve potential hazards e.g. hiking, wild camping, swimming, canoeing, the

teacher(s)- in-charge should have adequate experience or qualification for the

activity, and the number of students under one teacher should not be more than 10.

There should be at least one female teacher in an activity involving female

students.

d) The teacher(s)- in-charge of the activity should keep a list of the students and their

telephone numbers. This will be very useful in case of emergency.

e) Consent must be sought from parents before students can take part in an excursion.

f) Safety is to be strictly observed during an excursion.

I) Basis of Discretion

This policy can only be amended after consultation with and approval of the Principal

and the Co-curricular Activity Master.

CCA F2

II) Procedures

Teacher(s)- in-charge of school excursions has to follow the following procedures:

a) Application 1) Teachers planning an excursion should seek Principal’s approval before

recruiting students.

2) Teacher(s)- in-charge have to fill in a form (available in the General Office)

outlining the details of the excursion.(Appendix 1)

3) The form should be handed to the office and the Principal will indicate his/her

approval by signing the form.

4) A copy of the form should be handed to the Co-curricular Activity

Master/Mistress for reference.

b) Planning Teacher(s)- in-charge of an excursion should:

1) design activities to be conducted during the excursion in accordance with the

objective(s) of the trip;

2) estimate the necessary expenses and seek appropriate funding;

3) arrange for economical and safe modes of transport and suitable assembly

point;

4) advise participants to carry their identity cards; and

5) ensure first-aid kits are always readily available (A suggested list of items is on

Appendix 2)

c) Parents' approval 1) Parents should be notified in writing and their signed approval sought before a

student is allowed taking part in an excursion.

2) The reply slip must be collected and checked before the excursion.(Appendix

3)

d) Reporting to police 1) Teacher(s)- in-charge should supply necessary details to the General Office to

report to the police.

2) At least 10 days before any excursion to outlying islands or areas outside the

urban districts, a letter should be sent to the Divisional Commander (HKPF) of

the area which the school party intends to visit. (Appendix 4)

CCA F3

3) The letter should include the full details of:

i) the nature of the outing

ii) date and time

iii) locality and/or route

iv) number of pupils participating

v) the age range of participants

vi) any special difficulties anticipated; and

vii) the name and telephone number of a responsible person not participating

whom to inform the Divisional Police Station if the party is overdue or

missing

e) Student attendance Student attendance must be recorded at the beginning of the trip and checked again

before dismissal at the end of the trip.

f) Weather 1) School are advised to stop susceptible students (e.g. those with heart or

respiratory illnesses) from participating in outdoor activities if the Air

Pollution Index (API) is within the range of 101 and 200 in the affected zone.

2) If the API exceeds 200, all outdoor activities should be suspended.

3) Outdoor activities should be cancelled if a tropical cyclone warning signal is

hoisted. If Typhoon Signal No. 1 or higher is hoisted during the journey, all

participants should return home immediately; otherwise, they should find the

nearest shelter and stay there until the danger is over.

4) When a red/black rainstorm warning is issued, teachers should stop all

physical activities and outdoor pursuits immediately. Teachers and students

should take shelter in a safe place until it is safe for them to return home.

When a black rainstorm warning is issued, teachers and students should

remain in a safe place until the rainstorm is past and the travelling conditions

have improved.

5) If the activity is cancelled or postponed due to adverse weather or any other

reason, the teacher(s)- in-charge should contact General Office at once.

CCA F4

g) Accidents and injuries The following steps should be taken in case of accidents:

1) Apply first aid immediately if appropriate

2) Call school and 999 if necessary

3) Do not move the casualty more than necessary. If applicable, send the casualty

for medical treatment immediately. If not, a messenger together with a

companion should be sent for help.

4) A message for help should be written and include the following information:

(Appendix 5)

i) the location of the casualty,

ii) the time of the accident,

iii) a description of the injuries, and

iv) the number and situation of the other members of the group.

h) Dismissal of students 1) At the end of an outing, students should be dismissed at a suitable and safe

location and advised to go home directly.

2) After the dismissal, the teacher(s)-in-charge should report to the General

Office.

CCA F5

EDUCATIONAL VISITS/EXTRA-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES/ COMPETITIONS OUTSIDE SCHOOL

Activity Title : _________________________________________________________

Class/Club/Society :__________________________________________________________

Date of Activity : _________________________________________________________

Venue : _________________________________________________________

Time of assembly :____________________ Place of assembly :_____________________

Time of dismissal :____________________ Place of dismissal :_____________________

Teachers-in-charge 1) ______________________________________________________

2) ______________________________________________________

No. of participating students :__________________________________________________

Prize awarded (if any) :_______________________________________________________

Please put a “ √ “ in the box for the procedure has been done

� Activity to be held within school hours

� inform the teachers concerned

� inform the Principal/General Office

� distribute letter to parents

� Activity to be held outside school hours

� distribute letter to parents

� inform the Principal/General Office

� inform the Police (if necessary)

N.B. Remember to hand in a photocopy of this form to General Office before the activity is

held.

Appendix 1

CCA F6

List of Participating Students No. Name Class 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

CCA F7

List of First-aid Kit

1. Bandages of various sizes

2. Triangular bandages (900 mm side, 1300 mm base)

3. Cotton sticks

4. Cold pack

5. Disposable plastic gloves

6. Elastic tensor bandage

7. Forceps

8. Liniment turpentine

9. Safety pins

10. Scissors

11. Sterile adhesive dressings (of different sizes)

12. Sterile eye pads

13. Sterile gauze

14. Thermometer

15. Alcohol

16. Cotton wool

17. Adhesive tapes

18. Antiseptics

Appendix 2

CCA F8

_________________(Date)

Dear Parents/Guardians,

Our school is going to organise the following activity. The full details of this activity are given

below:

Name of the activity : _________________________________________________________

Date : ______________________________ Time : _________________________________

Place : _____________________________________________________________________

Place & Time of Assembly : ____________________________________________________

Place & Time of Dismissal : ____________________________________________________

Fee : _______________________________________________________________________

Accompanying Teachers-on-duty : _______________________________________________

Yours faithfully,

_______________________ ___________________

Teacher- in-charge Principal

Ho Lap College

(Remark : This activity * is /is not organised by our school. Students * will be/ will not be

accompanied by teachers)

"--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Reply Slip ______________(Date)

Dear Principal,

I have read the notice. I* allow/do not allow my *son/daughter _______________________

of Form ______ to take part in the activity shown above.

__________________ Parent’s Name

__________________ Parent’s Signature

__________________ Contact Phone Number

__________________ Date

Please delete as appropriate

Appendix 3

CCA F9

School Outings Notification Form

To : Divisional Commander ________________________________________Police Station

From : ______________________________________________________________(School)

Details of school outing are as follows:

Nature of Outing : _______________________________________________

Date : _________________________________________________________

Time : __________________to _________________(Schedule time of return)

Locality : ______________________________________________________

Route : _________________________to _____________________________

Number of Participants :___________________________________________

The Age Range of Participants :___________________________________

Name and Mobile Telephone No. (if any) of the Leader(s) of the Outing :

Name and Telephone No. of the responsible person* who is not participating :

_______________________________________________________________

( )

Principal

Ho Lap College

Note : ♦A map detailing the route is to be attached.

*A responsible person should have ready access to details of next of kin of the pupils

e.g. telephone no. / address.

Appendix 4

CCA F10

Sheet for Recording Emergency (for reporting to 999)

1. Date

2. Time

3. Reporter’s Name

4. Reporter’s Contact Phone Number (if any)

5. School/ Organization

6. Nature of Emergency

7. Condition of Victim (if any)

8. Brief Particulars of the Victim(s) (a) Name(s)

(b) Sex

(c) Age

(d) Next-of-kin Phone No.:

9. Location of the Victim(s) e.g. Flat Ground Hill Slope Grid Reference Road Landmark

10. Other Particulars

Appendix 5

ECA G1

SCHOOL & CLASS PICNIC

I) Purposes

a) provide students with a chance to enjoy an organized outing with peers and

teachers;

b) provide balanced education for students;

c) develop students’ self-discipline;

d) foster friendship among students; and

e) promote harmonious relationship between teachers and students.

II) Guidelines

a) The picnic must be well planned beforehand.

b) Teachers-in-charge of picnic ought to oversee all organizational procedures of the

outing.

c) Students must obtain written approval from their parents before the picnic.

d) The ratio between teachers & students who take part in picnic must not be greater

than 1 : 30.

e) Safety is to be strictly observed during the picnic.

f) Safety precautions in organizing picnic should be taken.

g) In case of bad weather such as thunderstorm, persistent rain, flooding, or typhoon

signal No. 8 (or above), the picnic will be cancelled.

h) The school should be informed of all irregularities.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation

with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Before the commencement of the school year : 1) A date for the school picnic would be decided by the Co-curricular Activities

Committee. The date for the class picnic would be decided by the Class Club.

2) A tentative booking of coach services should be made during the summer

holiday.

ECA G2

b) Planning for School Picnic : (2 1/2 to 3 months before school picnic)

1) 3 months before the picnic, a day camp would be booked in advance for F. 1

students.

2) Form teachers, except F.1’s, ought to discuss with their classes on the

destinations of the school picnic, transportation, time and places of assembly

and dismissal.

3) For Junior Forms, it is preferable to go on level basis.

For Senior Forms, it is preferable to go on joint-class basis.

4) Notification forms are to be completed by form-teachers and returned to the

teacher- in-charge. (Appendix 1)

5) Teacher- in-charge is required to discuss with the transportation company about

the particulars of the outing routes, such as the time, precise pick-up and

drop-off points and the fares.

(4 weeks before school picnic)

6) Some deputy form-teachers would be reallocated for particular destinations in

order to maintain a desirable teacher-students ratio.

7) Guidelines and safety precautions for teachers and students on school picnic

are prepared. (Appendix 2)

(3 weeks before school picnic)

8) A finalized table of the School Picnic for the information of all staff is drawn

up and a copy is sent to the General Office.

c) Obtaining parents’ agreement : (3 weeks before picnic)

1) A consent letter to parents is issued to explain the activity and the financial

arrangements.

2) No student may be absent from this school function unless written explanation

from the parents is obtained.

3) All consent letters and transportation fare must be given to the General Office.

d) Reporting to the police : (2 weeks before picnic)

1) A letter to inform the police should be signed by the Principal and dispatched

to the police station concerned 10 days before the school picnic. A copy of the

letter should be kept in the school office.

ECA G3

2) Standard letterform for this purpose is available in the General Office.

(Appendix 4)

3) The police should be notified by fax if there are any changes to the above

details at a later date.

4) In case of a school picnic to any country park involving 500 students or more,

the Agriculture and Fisheries Department should be informed.

5) On the day of school picnic, the police must be informed by the General Office

before and afterwards.

e) Safety precautions : (1 week before picnic)

1) The schedule of the school picnic, memos to teachers and students would be

issued.

2) All form-teachers are instructed to explain clearly to students about the rules

of the participation, geographical area beyond which they are prohibited to go

and safety precautions.

f) On the day of school picnic : 1) If on the day of the school picnic, cancellation is authorized by the Principal

because of bad weather, all participating teachers, students and their parents

should be notified as soon as possible.

2) If there are any absentees for the outing, the General Office must report to

their parents at the earliest convenience.

g) After the school picnic : 1) In the case of serious irregularities during the outing, the teacher should report

to the teachers- in-charge as soon as possible.

2) Teacher- in-charge would look into the matter and if necessary compile a report

on the incident for the Principal’s reference.

3) Teacher- in-charge should file all important records of the outing for future

reference.

4) Form-teachers are required to follow up on absentees.

ECA G4

School Picnic ( / ) Notification Form

To : All Form Teachers

Please complete the following particulars concerning the school picnic and return it to

________(Teacher- in-charge) on or before _________ (Date)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

F. 2 to F. 6

Class : _________ Place : __________________________

Coach : Yes / No (please circle the appropriate one)

If no, please fill in the following particulars :

Place of Assembly : _____________________________________________

Time of Assembly : _____________________________________________

Place of Dismissal : _____________________________________________

Time of Dismissal : ____________________________________________

For Junior Forms, it is preferable to go on level basis.

For Senior Forms, it is preferable to go on joint-class basis.

________________

Form-teacher

F. 7

Camp site : ________________________ Date : _____________________

Place of Assembly : _____________________________________________

Time of Assembly : _____________________________________________

Place of Dismissal : _____________________________________________

Time of Dismissal : _____________________________________________

Accompanied teacher (s) : _________________________________________

Student(s)-in-charge : ______________________________________________

(No coach will be arranged for F.7 students)

________________

Form-teacher

Appendix 1

ECA G5

School Picnic ( / ) - Memo for Students

I) Guidelines for students going on picnic

a) All students should bring their own food and drinks. b) Students should observe the weather forecast and bring along the umbrellas, if

necessary. c) If thunderstorm warning has been issued before the departure, the picnic will be

cancelled. Students should go back to school to have normal lessons. d) If typhoon signal No. 8 is hoisted, or a rainstorm warning is issued, the picnic will

be cancelled. Students should stay at home or any safe places. e) Students should bring along their Identity Cards and dress decently. f) They should be present in the classroom by 8: 10 a.m. for the roll call. g) After the roll call, they should stay in the classroom quietly and listen to the

announcement until the coaches have arrived. h) Students will be led by the form-teachers and accompanied teachers to leave the

school at the rear gate and get on the coaches at the car park of the Examination Authority.

i) If a student is late for the assembly outside school, he must return to school immediately and report to the General Office so that the parents can be informed.

j) Any students who are late will stay at school until 3:30 p.m. k) All students are to observe traffic safety strictly during the outing. No swimming,

cycling, rowing or any dangerous game is allowed. l) Students are not allowed to leave the class without permission. They are advised to

play in groups. If there is any accident, they should report to any teacher-on-duty immediately.

m) Students must beware of hill fire. Barbecue is only allowed at barbecue pits. Students are reminded to put out the fire before leaving.

n) Students should keep the picnic site clean and follow the regulations of the Park. o) Students should behave properly for the reputation of the school. p) Any misbehaved students bringing disgrace to the school will be punished. q) Every class is advised to make a class flag for easy recognition during assembly.

II) Guidelines for students not participating

a) Students not participating should dress in proper uniform and report to school at 8:30a.m. They will study on their own in the Geography Room until 3:30 p.m. The timetable for recess and lunch-break is the same as the normal school timetable.

b) Students are not allowed to leave the classroom or school without the permission of the teacher on-duty.

Appendix 2

ECA G6

School Picnic ( / ) - Memo for Teachers I) Guidelines on the class period before the school picnic

a) Memo for students on the school picnic will be gone over by the form-teachers

with students. b) F.1 Form-teachers should explain clearly the site and facilities of the camp, divide

students into groups and make class flags. II) Guidelines for teachers taking the coach services

a) Form-teachers will take the roll call at 8:10a.m. and maintain the discipline of the class until the coaches have arrived.

b) Form-teachers and the accompanied teachers will help the students to queue up in the playground and escort them to get on the coaches at the car park of the Examination Authority.

c) After boarding, the teachers will take the roll call prior to departure. d) Teachers should get the first-aid kits from the teacher- in-charge one day before and

carry with them on the school picnic day. e) On arrival, form-teachers should confirm with the drivers on the precise pick-up

points and time. The license numbers of the coaches and the phone numbers of the driver should also be copied down.

f) Form-teachers should give clear instructions to the classes about the program for the outing, the geographical area beyond which they are prohibited to go, the time and places of assembly for the return trip before dismissing the classes.

g) All teachers are to observe safety strictly during the outing. Form-teachers may divide the classes in groups. Teachers should keep in close contact with monitors and group leaders.

h) Teachers should not pay fare to the coach drivers. i) For the return trip and prior to departure, attendance should be taken by the

form-teachers to ensure that all are present. No students are allowed to get off until they have arrived at the school for dismissal.

j) After dismissal at the school playground, form-teachers should report and return the attendance records and first aid kits to the General Office.

I) Guidelines for teachers not taking the coach services

a) Form-teachers should collect the name lists of the classes, telephone lists of the parents and the police stations, and the first-aid kits from the General Office one day before the picnic.

b) At the beginning of the outing, form-teachers and accompanied teachers should arrive at the place specified for assembly on time. Attendance should be taken prior to departure.

Appendix 2

ECA G7

c) Before departure, form-teachers should report to the General Office about the attendance.

d) On arrival, form-teachers should give clear instructions to the classes about the program for the outing, the geographical area beyond which they are prohibited to go, the time and places of assembly for the return trip before dismissing the classes.

e) All teachers are to observe safety strictly during the outing. Form-teachers can divide the students into groups. Teachers should keep in close contact with monitors and group leaders.

f) For the return trip and prior to departure, attendance should be taken by the form-teachers to ensure that all are present.

g) After dismissal at the places specified at the end of the outing, form-teachers should report to the General Office within the office hours, so that the General Office can report to the police.

h) The attendance records, telephone lists and the first-aid kits will be returned to the General Office on the following day.

II) Guidelines on safety precautions

a) If, during the outing, teachers or students are endangered by unexpected weather, hill fire, landslides, mountain torrents or traffic accidents, etc, teachers should exercise their discretion to cancel or shorten the trip and lead students away from dangerous locations in order to ensure their personal safety.

b) In the event of any emergency arising which requires Police, Fire (rescue), Ambulance or other rescue services, teacher(s) should call 999 direct to report the emergency. This person should keep himself calm at all times. He should carefully note down all relevant particulars pertaining to the emergency. This person, in addition to providing personal details of self and organization, should be able to describe the nature of emergency (e.g. fallen down and injured, suffering from heat stroke etc.), the condition of the victim (e.g. broken bones, unconscious etc.), the brief particulars of the victim (name, sex, age) and the exact location of the victim. This latter detail is particularly important if the victim’s location is not accessible by road. A description of where the victim is located e.g. on flat ground, on a hill slope, etc should be provided. Then details of the nearest road, town, village and landmarks should be given. (The form for recording detailed particulars of an emergency event when reporting 999 is given at Annex A for reference.)

c) If the student needs hospitalization, the parents should be informed as soon as possible. Within the office hours, teachers may report to the General Office so that their parents can then be notified immediately.

d) The school should be informed of all the irregularity as soon as possible.

ECA G8

III) Guidelines for teachers staying at school

a) Teachers staying at school should help students to get on the coaches. b) After that, they should be on-duty in the Geography Room according to the duty

roster. c) Attendance must be taken every time when the teacher on-duty enters the

classroom. d) At the end of the morning and afternoon sessions, the teachers on-duty should

return the attendance register to the General Office.

ECA G9

Sheet for Reporting Emergency (for reporting to 999)

1. Date

2. Time

3. Reportee’s Name

4. Reportee’s contact Phone Number

5. School

6. Nature of Emergency

7. Condition of Victim(s)

8. Brief Particulars of the Victim(s)

a) Name(s)

b) Sex

c) Age

d) Next-of-kin Phone No :

9. Location of the Victim(s)

e.g. Flat Ground

Hill Slope

(Grid reference, if available)

Nearest Road

Nearest Town or Village

Landmarks

10. Other Particulars

Appendix 3

ECA G10

School Outings Notification Form

To : Divisional Commander________________________ Police Station

From : ___________________________________________(School)

Nature of outing : ________________________________________

Date : __________________________________________________

Time : ___________ to _____________ (Schedule time of return)

Locality : _______________________________________________

Route : #_________________ to ____________________________

Number of Participants : ______________

The Age Range of Participants : _________________

Name and Mobile Telephone No. (if any) of the Leader(s) of the

Outing :

______________________________________________________

Name and Telephone No. of the Responsible Person* who is not

Participating :

______________________________________________________

( )

Principal

Ho Lap College

Note : # A map detailing the route is to be attached.

* A responsible person should have ready access to details of next of

kin of the pupils e.g. telephone no. /address.

Appendix 4

ECA H 1

POST-EXAMINATION ACTIVITIES

I) Purposes

a) soothe students’ tension after examination;

b) provide targeted, meaningful recreational activities during post examination period;

c) widen students’ horizons through various activities and strengthen their physical

and mental ability; and

d) provide training opportunities to senior students to develop organisational power

and leadership.

II) Guidelines

a) All activities have to take place between 8:30a.m. and 12:00 noon each day.

b) All activities after 12:00 noon have to be monitored by teacher-in-charge.

c) All activities have to be carried out inside school. For activities outside school,

students must be accompanied by teacher- in-charge.

d) For any outings, parents’ prior permission must be obtained beforehand. For details,

please refer to “Excursion”.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation

with the Principal and CCA Master.

IV) Procedures

a) Clubs/societies should be consulted for their plans of post-exam activities in May

every year.

b) To avoid clashes among the activities, the CCA Master should prepare the

timetable & the allocation of resources, including venues, equipment, the number

of participants and targeted groups of each activity during the post-exam Period.

c) After the information is collected, the post-exam activity timetable for the whole

school should be prepared.

d) The CCA Master and teacher- in-charge of each activity need to check the condition

of classrooms, school hall and playgrounds required to prepare and arrange the

venues for various activities.

ECA H 2

e) The teacher-in-charge of each activity need to fill in application forms for

requesting supporting equipment/materials and venues for the activity.

f) The post-exam activity timetable should be printed and posted up in classrooms

three days before the post-exam period starts.

g) Details of the activities are to be announced every morning during the post-exam

period.

Mass Programmes On Educational Opportunities

Careers Guidance Committee

F.4 Subject Selection

Careers Resource Centre

Careers Prefect Team

Graduate Surveys

Testimonial Reference & Recommendations

Vocational Training

Further Studying Opportunities for F.5

JUPAS for F.6 & 7

Life Skills

Subject Selection & Withdrawal for F.5 & 6

F.3 Craft Courses

Certificate/ Diploma/Higher Diploma Programmes of various institutes Mass Programmes

on World of Work

Individual Programmes

Application for Educational Institutes

JUPAS

IVE

CAREERS GUIDANCE COMMITTEE

A) General Policy A1 B) Mass Programmes on Studying Opportunities B1 - B4 C) Mass Programmes on the World of Work C1 - C2 D) Individual Programmes D1 - D2 E) Application for Educational Institutes E1 – E2 F) Testimonial Reference and Recommendations F1 - F3 G) Graduate Surveys G1 H) Careers Prefect Team H1 - H2 I) Careers Resource Centre I1 - I2

Careers A1

CAREERS GUIDANCE COMMITTEE

GENERAL POLICY The Careers Guidance Committee aims to help students understand themselves, provide guidance

on choices of studying opportunities and world of work and equip them with life skills so that they

can make the right choice in further education and careers and most of all, instil in them the right

attitude towards work so that they can contribute positively to the field of work and society.

Careers B1

MASS PROGRAMMES ON STUDYING OPPORTUNITIES

I) Purposes

a) help students understand their interests and potentials, the subjects they take and the relation of all these with their further studies and careers;

b) raise students’ awareness to the various studying opportunities after secondary schooling; c) inform students of the various opportunities for higher education and vocational training; d) provide guidance to the possible choices offered to students of different levels; and e) equip students with skills they need for further studies.

II) Guidelines

a) Target Group

1) Guidance on subject selection would be provided to F.3 students. 2) Guidance on subject selection and withdrawal, studying opportunities, and life skills

would be provided to students from F.5 to F.7.

b) Nature of Work

1) A series of programmes such as talks, seminars, visits and sharing sessions are to be organized and newsletters and other printed materials are to be published for each target group throughout the year.

2) Some of the programmes are incorporated into the class periods and co-ordination with the other departments of the school is necessary.

c) Personnel involved and work allocation

1) Careers teachers, class teachers and careers prefects are to be involved. 2) Careers teachers are the organizers of the programmes and should prepare the

content and materials needed, and give briefing to class teachers or other personnel involved.

3) Class teachers should help in running some of the programmes. 4) Careers prefects, current students or past students would help in running some of

the programmes. 5) Close co-ordination with other personnel or departments such as the

teachers-in-charge of school premises and audio-visual aids, PTA and Academic Department is necessary to enhance the smooth running of the programmes.

III) Basis of Discretion

Careers B2

The above policy will only be amended after consultation with the Careers Guidance Committee and / or the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) F.4 Subject Selection

1) Aptitude Test

i) Careers teacher(s) involved should prepare materials to be used. ii) F.3 students have to do an aptitude test in the class period. iii) A briefing / guidelines / lesson plan will be given to F.3 class teachers before

the test. iv) Class teachers should inform students the elements and considerations for

selection of streams and subjects after the students finish the test. 2) Sharing Sessions

i) Class teachers would inform students of the programmes and take the

enrolment. ii) Careers teachers involved should then book the venue and prepare necessary

materials for the activity. iii) Briefing on how to conduct the programme would be given to the careers

prefects or the current F.4 or F.6 students who help in the guidance work. 3) Seminar for F.3 parents on F.4 Placement and Subject Selection

i) Parents’ Nite would be held annually in co-ordination with the PTA and

Academic Department. ii) The date, time and venue would be set at the first meeting of the Careers

Guidance Committee and that of the PTA Committee. iii) The PTA would help prepare and distribute parents’ letters to F.3 students

and confirm the number of participants. iv) Careers teachers would prepare relevant information and materials for the talk. v) The setting of the hall, speakers and programme schedule would be decided.

b) Further Studying Opportunities for F.5

1) Talks on further studying opportunities

i) They would be held in the first term of each academic year.

Careers B3

ii) Careers Master / Mistress or careers teachers involved should arrange the date, time and venue for the talk beforehand.

iii) Class / Subject teachers concerned should be informed if the talk is to be held during lessons.

iv) Materials would be prepared and distributed to the students.

2) Visits to tertiary institutes

i) Careers Master / Mistress would select the place for visit. ii) Careers Master / Mistress would contact the institute for permission or place

reservation, if necessary. iii) A list of participants should be confirmed. iv) Teacher-in-charge of the visit should issue a letter to parents and collect the

reply slips. v) For other details of the procedures, please refer to Excursions under

Co-curricular Activities.

3) Talk for F.5 parents on further studies and F.6 Admission i) It would be held in co-ordination with the PTA. ii) At the beginning of the academic year, the date, time and venue for the activity

would be set. iii) Careers teachers would help prepare relevant information and materials

for the talk. iv) PTA would help in distributing letters to parents. v) Once the number of participants is finalized, exact arrangement of the venue

will be made.

4) Newsletters

i) Newsletters would be published regularly throughout the year. ii) Careers prefects would assist in information gathering, editing and publishing.

c) Subject Selection and withdrawal for F.5 & 6

1) Talks would be arranged in 2nd Term for F.4 students before they make any decision on withdrawing any of the subjects in F.5 and at the beginning of the school term for F.6 students before they finalize their choice of studies.

2) Special arrangements should be made to set the date, time and venue for the talk. 3) Class / Subject teachers concerned should be informed if the talk is to be held

during lessons. 4) Careers Master / Mistress or careers teachers involved should prepare relevant

information and materials for the talk.

Careers B4

d) JUPAS for F.6 & 7 1) F.6 and 7 students are encouraged to take part in the Open Day or Information Day

organized by the tertiary institutes that take students through JUPAS. 2) Speakers from various faculties or departments of different institutes would be

invited to give talks to both F.6 & 7 students. 3) Visits to various institutes would be arranged. 4) Talks on JUPAS would be given to F.6 students. 5) Information on the entrance requirements and various undergraduate programmes

would be prepared and distributed to F.6 students. 6) A talk on the working schedule for JUPAS and briefing on how to proceed the

online application would be arranged for F.7 students around the end of September or early October.

e) Vocational Training for F.3, 5 & 7

1) Craft courses for F.3

i) Prospectus and information of the craft courses would be distributed to school

around January each year. A copy would be sent to the F.3 students who need them through Form Teachers.

ii) Form teachers may recommend the craft courses to F.3 students and inform the Careers Mistress the total number of application forms each class needs.

2) IVE Certificate / Diploma/ Higher Diploma Programmes for F.5 & 7

i) Once the application materials are sent to school, a talk on various diploma

and higher diploma courses and the application procedures would be given to F.5 & 7 students.

ii) Application forms, guide and prospectuses would be distributed to the students who are interested.

f) Life Skills for F.5 & 7 1) Interview skills for work and studies would be provided for F.5 & 7 students

respectively. 2) The programmes would be conducted during class periods. 3) Careers teachers would prepare necessary materials for the class periods. 4) Careers teachers should make proper arrangements about the venue, if necessary.. 5) Class teachers concerned would be provided with the guidelines at least two days

prior to the programme.

Careers C1

MASS PROGRAMME ON THE WORLD OF WORK I) Purposes

a) raise the awareness of the students to the world of work; b) help students to understand the real working situation in society; and c) develop positive attitude and values towards life and work.

II) Guidelines

a) Emphasis

1) Careers guidance work should start early and extend to senior forms. 2) The guidance work at junior forms would focus on raising awareness whereas that

at senior forms would focus on developing positive attitude towards work and life.

b) Nature of work

The above aims are achieved through running programmes such as talks, seminars, class periods, setting up display boards, conducting careers quizzes and publishing newsletters.

c) Personnel involved and work allocation

1) All careers teachers, form teachers concerned and careers prefects are involved. 2) Careers teachers should prepare materials for the class periods, lead the students in

visits, organize talks and supervise the careers prefects in setting up display boards and publishing newsletters.

3) Form teachers should help in running some of the programmes. 4) Careers prefects would assist the careers teachers in preparing newsletters

and setting up display boards. III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be altered after consultation with the Careers Guidance Committee.

Careers C2

IV) Procedures

a) Preparatory Stage

1) The planning of the yearly activities, the budget and responsible personnel are to be decided in the second term of the previous year.

2) The date, time and venue for the activities would be decided. And if the activity is to be held in the school hall, booking should be made as soon as the date and time is fixed.

b) Implementation

1) Class Periods

i) Careers teachers would design and prepare relevant materials for the class

periods. ii) Careers teachers should reserve audio-visual equipment and make special

arrangement of the classrooms, if necessary. iii) Briefing and / or guidelines would then be given to form teachers concerned.

2) Board Display, Newsletters and Careers Quiz

i) Topics will be decided by the Careers Guidance Committee. ii) Careers teachers hold meetings with the careers prefects and provide them

with guidelines on how to work out the programmes or the necessary information they need.

iii) Careers teachers get the materials printed or reserve display boards. iv) Careers prefects start to design and produce the final version according to the

date set. v) Survey should be done at the end of the programmes.

Careers D1

INDIVIDUAL PROGRAMMES I) Purposes

a) provide guidance for individuals on their choice of subjects or studies; and b) help students achieve a better understanding of their strengths, weaknesses, character,

interests, ability and aptitude.

II) Guidelines

a) Any teacher or department in school can refer individual cases to the Careers Guidance Committee.

b) Individual student who has problem can also approach any of the careers teachers or the Careers Master / Mistress.

c) Careers teachers or the Careers Master / Mistress should explore ways that might help solve his / her problems.

d) Careers teachers or the Careers Master / Mistress should try to encourage and facilitate the individual to make his / her decision.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the Careers Guidance Committee after consultation with the school authority.

IV) Procedures

a) Case Referral

1) Form teachers, subject teachers or any departments in school can give the name of the student who needs help to the Careers Guidance Committee.

2) A meeting will be arranged with the student. 3) The careers teacher concerned or the Careers Master / Mistress would identify the

problems of the student and provide guidance or relevant resources or information. 4) If necessary, further meetings would be arranged.

Careers D2

b) Direct Approach

1) Students who have problems in relation to subject selection, further studying

opportunities, or choice of careers can approach any of the careers teachers or Careers Master / Mistress.Careers

2) The Careers Master / Mistress or the careers teacher concerned should handle the case at once, if possible.

3) If time does not allow, a meeting should be arranged as soon as possible. 4) The teacher concerned then interview the student and understand his / her

problem(s). 5) The teacher concerned is to provide him / her with relevant information and allow

him / her to make his / her decision.

Careers E1

APPLICATION FOR EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTES

I) Purpose

Process students’ application for further studies in tertiary institutes.

II) Guidelines

a) The main targets are F.5 and 7 students. b) Students’ applications for admission to local tertiary institutions are processed through the

Careers Guidance Committee with the assistance of the class teachers concerned.

c) Applications for undergraduate programmes of eight educational institutes are processed through a scheme called Joint University Programmes Admission System (JUPAS) while the applications for certificate, diploma and higher diploma programmes of other institutes can be made directly to the institutes. The application procedures laid down in the JUPAS Guide or other guide books should be adhered to.

d) Careers teachers concerned, with the help of the form teachers, are responsible for handling the application.

e) Recommendations for JUPAS or other institutes should be drafted by the form teachers and examined by the Principal.

f) Recommendations would be typed by the staff of the general office.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will only be subject to change according to the School Authority and / or the institutes concerned.

IV) Procedures

a) Application for undergraduate programmes through JUPAS

1) Pre-application Stage

i) Careers Master / Mistress would return the reply slip to the JUPAS office to confirm the number of applicants.

ii) Around mid September, JUPAS Guides are sent to school. iii) The JUPAS Guides would be distributed to F.7 students. iv) Talks on application procedures would be arranged. v) Students have to fill in a record of the co-curricular activities they have taken

part in to their form teachers for reference.

Careers E2

vi) Based on the record of the co-curricular activities and the information in the student record card, Form Teachers can complete the confidential report for each applicant on the JUPAS online school account.

vii) Each student should pay the application fee through Web or direct to the designated bank.

vii) Students should register, enter their personal data and choices of programmes on their own account.

2) Application

i) Form teachers should help collect photocopies and original documents of Additional Qualifications as required in Appendix III and / or Appendix IV in JUPAS Guide for the Principal to certify the copies.

ii) Form teachers complete the confidential report of each applicant on the JUPAS website.

3) Handling Application Forms

i) The confidential reports are to be confirmed by the Principal. ii) The Principal’s confidential reports are photocopied for record. iii) The general office should make arrangement to send the certified true copies

required in Appendix III or Appendix IV of the JUPAS Guides. to the JUPAS office before the deadline.

b) Application for Certificate, Diploma and Higher Diploma courses

of IVE

1) By the end of January or early February, form teachers should find out the number of students interested in applying for the courses and careers teachers should inform the institute.

2) Copies of application forms, pay-in slips, prospectuses of IVE, Guides and Information Booklets would be sent to school by February.

3) The careers teacher concerned distribute the application forms and related materials to the students.

4) Students who wish to apply for the courses are reminded to attend a briefing on application procedures.

5) Students are to fill in the application forms and send them to the institute by themselves or by post before the deadline.

All the above are suggested procedures, teachers-in-charge would fix the exact date and deadlines for different personnel according to the information they get from the institutes concerned.

Careers F1

TESTIMONIAL REFERENCE AND RECOMMENDATIONS

I) Purposes a) provide information on students’ performances and potential in a testimonial when they

graduate; and b) furnish recommendation letters to local or overseas tertiary institutes and local working

organisations as required.

II) Guidelines a) All F. 5 and F.7 form teachers are required to draft a testimonial for each of their students

by the end of the school year. It should certify a student’s:

1) period of stay in school 2) external examination result 3) academic record 4) participation in extra-curricular activities 5) posts of responsibility 6) prizes awarded 7) character and personality

b) Form teachers concerned and/or Careers Mistress should also write recommendation letters for students as requested by local / overseas tertiary institutes and local working organisations.

c) All the drafted documents are subject to the final approval of the Principal.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be only be altered after consultation with the Careers Mistress and/or the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) For all F.5 and F.7 school leavers, form teachers must draft a testimonial for each of their students and give them to the General Office before the due date as required. Once approved by the Principal, each would be kept in the relevant student file as reference.

b) Students who need to procure the above documents should approach their form teachers or Careers Mistress who would then draft the recommendation letters for them.

c) Form teachers and Careers Mistress should follow the 'Guidelines for Writing Recommendations for Students’ issued by the Careers Guidance Committee. (Appendix 1)

d) As the preparation of document needs time, students should give the General Office at least 7 working days for the issue of the document.

Careers F2

Appendix 1

Guidelines for Writing Recommendations for Students

I) Bent for Academic Pursuit: a) Achievement in exams, e.g. HKCEE

If this does not reflect the student’s potential ability, please explain. b) Intellectual potential

Please indicate your estimate of the candidate’s potential for higher education. c) Ability to think independently and to work on his/her own d) Analytical power e) Power of expression f) Ability to present coherent arguments g) Imagination, creativity and inventiveness h) Interest in and suitability for the chosen course

II) Personal Qualities:

a) Interest in and motivation for academic studies b) Independence, self-determination c) Industry, perseverance d) Initiative e) Reliability, sense of responsibility f) Breadth of interests (e.g. music, drama, sports, hobbies, etc.) g) Concern for others (e.g. community service and youth work) h) Civic awareness i) Social abilities and personal relationships j) Health

III) General Comments:

Overall comments if you feel that the points listed above do not give a true picture of the student

IV) Suitability for Tertiary Education:

Qualities of character possessed by the student, which indicate that he/she would both gain from

and contribute to life at tertiary institute

Careers F3

V) Your Overall Recommendation, e.g. a) His/her rather strong academic background and her very lively personality should stand

her in good stead when she applies for admission to any tertiary institute. b) I therefore recommend him/her most/ very strongly for a place in ....… .. c) I have no hesitation in recommending her very strongly for a place in ........ d) He/She will definitely be a valuable asset for any tertiary institute that admits him/her. e) I am sure that he/she will benefit from it immensely. f) He/She possesses good potentials to study in ...… . g) He/She is a very deserving case for a tertiary institute. h) In view of his eagerness and enthusiasm for further studies, I consider him/her a suitable

candidate for a tertiary institute. i) His/Her...... should qualify him/her for a place in .....… j) He/She should have no difficulty in pursuing a course of study in a tertiary institute / his

tertiary education. k) He/She is a suitable candidate for ......... l) He/She is a likely / possible candidate / calibre for the pursuit of tertiary education.

Careers G1

GRADUATE SURVEYS

I) Purposes

Collect information on Form 5 and 7 graduates’ academic and careers development for future reference and statistical uses.

II) Guidelines a) The Form 5 and Form 7 Graduate Survey should be conducted annually in September. b) The target student groups are Form 5 and 7 students of the previous year. b) Form Teachers of the classes concerned should help to do the survey. c) Student helpers could also be recruited from respective classes.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation with the Careeers Guidance Committee and / or the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Careers teacher’s task : 1) The teacher-in-charge should recruit student helpers from the respective classes or

seek the help of the Form Teachers of the respective classes at the start of the survey period.

2) Briefing should be given to the helpers on the functions and the ways to conduct the survey, if necessary.

3) The teacher-in-charge should make follow-up contacts to deal with those unfinished cases (if any).

4) The teacher-in-charge should compile a report of the survey result and submit it to the Careers Master at the end of the survey period.

b) Student helpers’ task :

1) The student helpers / the class teachers should contact the students of their respective classes to collect data on their study or career path, in compliance with the guidelines given by the teacher-in-charge.

2) They should return the data to the careers teacher on or before the deadline.

Careers H1

CAREERS PREFECT TEAM

I) Purpose

Assist the implementation and promotion of various Careers education programmes, and through this process, both the careers prefects and their fellow students can learn more about learning and careers opportunities and development.

II) Guidelines

a) Recruitment and Orientation :

1) Recruitment and orientation of careers prefects are to be conducted between September and October.

2) The recruits should come mainly from Forms 3, 4 and 6. b) Responsibilities :

1) Junior form careers prefects should produce display boards and organize resources at the Careers Library and the Careers Corner.

2) Senior form careers prefects should assist in implementing careers education programmes and man information counter on HKAL and HKCE Results Release Day in July and August respectively.

3) Careers prefects should help producing printed materials for students (e.g. the careers newsletters and Form 3 course selection materials).

4) Other duties are assigned by the teacher-in-charge of the team.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation with the Careers Guidance Committee and / or the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) The teacher-in-charge should recruit careers prefects from Forms 3, 4 and 6. It will be

done through circulation of name-lists in class and recommendation from relevant class teachers.

b) An orientation programme will be organized in late September or early October to familiarize the recruits with the work as well as to create supportive relationship among themselves.

Careers H2

c) A meeting of the careers prefects will be arranged in early October to determine the allocation of duties among the careers prefects.

d) The careers teachers should hold meetings with the relevant careers prefects to determine the detailed arrangements of the programmes.

e) The performance of the careers prefects should be monitored by respective careers teachers. Evaluation meeting of the team will be held at the end of the second school term and merits should be given to those prefects who discharged their duties properly and responsibly.

Careers I1

CAREERS RESOURCES CENTRE I) Purposes

Manage and update resources of careers education at Careers Corner of the School Library and Careers Library in the Waiting Room for students’ reference and teachers’ use.

II) Guidelines a) Pamphlets, books and other audio-visual materials intended for students’ reference in

general are kept in the Careers Corner in open shelves of the School Library. Pamphlets, books and other audio-visual materials intended for teachers’ use and senior form students’ borrowing should be kept in the Careers Library.

b) Careers prefects should arrange and update the materials regularly as prescribed by the teacher-in-charge. The teacher-in-charge and/or the assigned careers prefects are responsible for borrowing and returning of books and materials at the Careers Library.

c) A stock check of the resources at the Careers Corner and the Careers Library should be done at the end of the second school term annually.

III) Basic of Discretion

The above policy will be amended after consultation with the Careers Guidance Committee and / or the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Careers teacher’s task :

1) The teacher-in-charge should train the careers prefects on how to manage and arrange the materials and resources in October.

2) The teacher-in-charge should do the preliminary screening to decide where different resources received should be placed. Also, he/she should offer suggestions to the School Library on ordering of books related to careers education.

3) The teacher-in-charge should lead the prefects to do the stock check at the end of the second school term.

Careers I2

b) Careers prefects’ task :

1) Careers prefects should arrange and update resources of careers education as instructed by the teacher-in-charge.

2) Careers prefects should assist in the stock check at the end of the second school term. 3) Careers prefects should assist in activities aimed at promoting the Careers Corner and

Careers Library as instructed by the teacher-in-charge.

School

Premises Crisis Management

Crisis Management

Students’ Crisis Management

Crisis Management

Adverse Weather Conditions Management

CRISIS MANAGEMENT

A) General Policy A1 B) Student Crisis Management B1-7 C) School Premises Crisis Management C1-3

1) Emergency Situation 2) Accident During Assembly

D) Adverse Weather Conditions Management D1-3

Crisis A1

GENERAL POLICY

a) have clear delineation of work by different school staff;

b) let the staff have psychological preparation for a crisis situation; and

c) let the staff have better preparation for handling unexpected crises in a

more systematic and confident way.

Crisis B1

STUDENT CRISIS MANAGEMENT I) Purposes

a) give support to the students and staff affected by the crisis;

b) minimize the negative effects of the crisis on the school;

c) help students to resume their school lives; and

d) help to restore the normal running of the school.

II) Guidelines

a) The safety of students is the primary concern.

b) A Student Crisis Management Team (SCMT) is set up to implement the measures in

conditions that endanger students' lives.

c) It is suggested the membership of the SCMT should include the core and ad hoc

members as follows :

Core Members -- Principal, Vice-Principals, Student Guidance

and Counselling Master

Discipline Master, Lam Tsang Lai Lai

School Social Worker

Ad hoc members -- Relevant Class teachers and teacher(s)

Guidance teachers

Clerical Staff/Janitor as required

d) All the staff should be well informed of the objectives and responsibilities of the SCMT.

e) The members of the SCMT should have a clear picture of their duties in the team.

f) When a crisis is over, the school should in subsequent staff meetings review the

procedures of handling the crisis and invite suggestions from teachers for improvement.

g) It is important not to create a blaming culture inside school; rather, the school

management should take the opportunity to see what the school can learn from such

unpleasant, painful experience and build up stronger team spirit among the school staff.

h) Inquiries from the media should be handled by the Principal.

Crisis B2

III) Basis of Discretion The policy will be altered only after consultation with the Principal and the SCMT. IV) Procedures

a) The object(s) endanger the student’s life should be removed from the student.

b) Staff with first hand information should inform the SCMT.

c) The SCMT should commence duty immediately.

d) Inform both the School Social Worker and the parents of the student concerned.

e) If the student’s attempt failed, the followings should be carried out.

1) Background information of the student will be provided by his Form Teacher,

Discipline Master and Student Guidance and Counselling Master to personnel giving

the interview (Appendix 1, 2 and 3).

2) Inform the student’s parents the situation and remind them

i) not to blame the student;

ii) to pay attention to the student’s behaviour to prevent similar situation from

happening; and

iii) to keep in contact with the school and social worker.

3) Ask the student to sign the No-Suicide Contract (Appendix 4) in duplicate before

he leaves.

4) Inquiries from the media should be handled by the Principal.

5) The student will not be allowed to leave without being accompanied by his/her

parent(s) or teacher.

6) If necessary, a special meeting will be called to discuss the follow-up work that

should be done.

7) The Form Teacher of the student should tell his class briefly the case to prevent the

rumor from spreading.

8) A guidance teacher or social worker should give guidance to the student regularly

when he returns to school.

9) The Form Teacher should check whether the student could catch up with the

lessons.

10) Referral should be made when necessary.

11) The Principal will inform the Education Department when the situation is well under

control.

f) If the student pass away, the followings should be carried out.

1) The members of SCMT commence their assigned duties immediately.

2) Contact relevant personnel through 999 to ask for instant help.

3) Inform the District Education Officer and seek for advice.

Crisis B3

4) A meeting of the crisis team will be held as quickly as possible

i) to decide on further procedures; and

ii) the contents of public notification.

5) An emergency staff meeting will be held

i) to inform the staff the event and facts;

ii) to remind the staff to proceed with their normal routine work as far as possible;

iii) to refrain from speculations or discussions basing on insufficient information;

iv) to provide channel for the staff to express their feeling;

v) to inform the staff the special arrangement for relevant class/teachers; and

vi) to decide the follow-up work.

6) Inform all students of the event and facts through the form teachers, via PA system

or at an emergency assembly whichever is deemed suitable at the time.

7) Allow proper channels and venues for students to express their feelings (guidance

teachers standby).

8) Set regular meeting times of SCMT to collect and update information and decide on

amendments of follow up procedures.

9) Arrange emergency briefing to update staff of situation. Review procedures and

open for comments at the same time.

10) Inquiries from the media should be handled by the Principal.

11) Inform parents of all students the case.

12) Arrange visit to the victim's family to show school concern for the case.

13) Guidance should be given to those who suffered from the crisis. Referral should be

made when necessary.

14) Arrange an assembly of all students to inform them of relevant development and

special ceremony to signify closure of the case.

15) When a crisis is over, the school should in subsequent staff meetings review the

procedures of handling the crisis and invite suggestions from teachers for

improvement.

16) Let time heal and complete the records with evaluations.

Crisis B4

Do's and Don’ts in Handling Crisis Do's Do stay calm

Do listen empathetically

Do allow ventilation of emotion

Do offer emotional support

Do take the pupil's words seriously

Do stay with the pupil before the crisis is over

Do encourage help-seeking behaviours

Do observe the limits of confidentiality

Do involve parents and pupils in action planning

Do establish a supportive network for yourselves

Don'ts Don't panic

Don't ignore danger signs

Don't underestimate suicidal intent

Don't challenge or dare the pupil to do it

Don't moralize

Don't blame or impose guilt

Don't argue whether suicide is right or wrong

Don't make unrealistic promises

Don't get involved with the pupil's confusion

Don't promise to keep the attempt confidential

Appendix 1

Crisis B5

Problem Solving Model

1

Build Rapport

Explore Feelings

2

Explore IMMEDIATE problems

3

Formulate Problems

Assess the Severity of Problems

4

Assess Coping

Patterns / Resources / Support Systems

Brainstorm Alternatives

5

Agree on Action Plan

Appendix 2

Crisis B6

Interview Sample Questions 1. Have you ever felt depressed for several days at a time?

2. During this time, have you ever had thoughts of killing yourself?

3. When did these thoughts occur?

4. What did you think about doing to yourself?

5. Did you act on your thoughts?

6. How often have these thoughts occurred?

7. When is the last time you had these thoughts?

8. Have your thoughts ever included harming someone else in addition to yourself?

9. How often has that occurred?

10. What have you thought about doing to the other person?

11. What would the outcome or benefit of this act toward this other person?

12. When does this thought occur?

13. Recently, what specially have you thought about doing to yourself?

14. Have you taken any steps towards acquiring the “gun, pills,” and so forth?

15. Have you thought about when you would do this?

16. Have you thought about where you would do this?

17. Have you thought about what effect your death would have on your family?

18. Have you thought about what effect your death would have on your friends?

19. You sound unsure about these plans. What are some of the reasons that have kept

you from acting on them thus far?

20. More specifically, what are your feeling about religion, suicide, and God?

21. What are your thoughts about responsibilities for your family and parents if you kill

yourself?

22. What are your thoughts about other reasons for living and staying alive?

23. What help could make it easier for you to cope with your current thoughts and plans?

24. Have you made any plans for your possessions or to communicate with people after

your death such as a note or a will?

25. How does talking about this make you feel?

(from Fremouw, W.J., Perczel, M.&Ellis, T.E. 1990)

Appendix 3

Appendix 4

Crisis B7

我 _______________ 承諾 _______________老師當我

覺得失落、無助、無望時會與 __________________老師 或 社工 _________________ 或 家人 _________________ 聯 絡，或打熱線電話求助。

立約人：_______________ （學生簽署）

見證人：_______________ （老師簽署）

日 期：_______________

時 間：_______________ 註 : 須填寫一式兩份，老師及同學各保存一份。

Crisis C1

Crisis Management Emergency Situation

I) Purposes Ensure that all students and staff are evacuated smoothly and safely in case of emergency. II) Guidelines

a) The Crisis Management Committee of the school is responsible for emergency situations. b) In case of emergency situations, such as fire, leakage of town gas, occurrence of

unidentified gas etc., the fire alarm should be sounded. c) Inform the office to call the police for help. d) The evacuation routes are the same as the routes of fire drill. e) Classes nearest to the staircase should go first. f) Never try to overtake any students ahead of you.

I) Basis of Discretion

The policy will be amended by the Crisis Management Committee after consultation with the Principal.

II) Procedures

a) When the fire alarm is sounded, the teacher giving the lesson should instruct his/her class to assemble in an orderly manner in Playgrounds A and B according to the assigned evacuation route. He/she should be the last person to leave the room.

b) Before leaving the room, the monitor should make sure that all electrical appliances are turned off. He/she should close all the doors when leaving.

c) If Playgrounds A and B are not safe for the students, they should be instructed to assemble in another open area.

d) Form teachers will join their own class in Playgrounds A and B, take the roll-call and then report to the teacher-in-charge the number of students present as soon as possible.

e) Laboratory Technician I should ensure that gas is turned off at the mains. f) Under safe situation, the P.E. teachers should ensure that no student stays in the changing

rooms. g) Under safe situation, teachers of the Discipline Committee should check that all the rooms

(including the school hall and toilets) are evacuated.

h) Non-form teachers and janitors should wait in Playground for instructions from the teacher-in-charge.

i) After the crisis, the Crisis Management Committee should call a meeting to evaluate the procedures in handling the emergency situation.

Crisis C2

Crisis Management Accident During Assembly

I) Purposes

Ensure that all students and staff are evacuated smoothly and safely in case of an accident. II) Guidelines

a) The teacher-in-charge of the assembly is responsible for emergency situations. b) Classes nearest to the exit should go first. c) Never try to overtake any students ahead of you. d) Inform the Crisis Management Committee as soon as possible. e) Call the police for help if necessary.

III) Basis of Discretion

The policy will be amended by the Crisis Management Committee after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) If an accident occurs, the teacher-in-charge in charge of the assembly will be responsible for the emergency situation.

b) The teacher-in-charge should instruct the students, with the help of teachers and prefects present, to leave the school hall using the nearest exit and assemble in the Playground A. The teacher-in-charge should be the last one to leave.

c) Form teachers or teachers present will take the roll-call in Playground A and then report to the teacher-in-charge the number of students present as soon as possible.

d) Under safe situation, teachers should check that the school hall is evacuated. e) Seek help from the Crisis Management Committee. f) After the emergency, the Crisis Management Committee should call a meeting to evaluate

the procedures in handling the emergency situation.

Crisis D1

ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS MANAGEMENT I) Purposes

a) lay down clear contingency measures to ensure safety of students when hit by

tropical cyclones and heavy persistent rain; and

b) seek support from parents to guarantee an effective implementation of these

measures

II) Guidelines a) All contingency measures are made with reference to the administration circular

No.4/2005 issued by the Education Department in April 2005.

b) The safety of students is the primary concern.

c) An Emergency Duty Team (EDT) is set up to implement the measures in adverse

weather conditions.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be altered only after consultation with the Principal and the

relevant government departments.

IV) Procedures a) Tropical Cyclones

1) Hoisting signal No. 1: School is to operate as usual.

2) Hoisting signal No. 3: School is to operate as usual unless advised

otherwise.

3) Hoisting signal No. 8: Classes are to be suspended.

4) If students have already set out for school when the No.8 signal is issued,

the EDT must immediately activate the contingency plan to ensure the

school premise will be open and staffed until proper arrangements are made

for arriving students to return home at an appropriate time.

Crisis D2

b) Heavy Persistent Rain

1) Amber Rainstorm Signal: School is to operate as usual.

Crisis D1

2) Red or Black Rainstorm Signal

i) Announced before 6:15am: Classes are suspended for the whole day.

ii) Announced after 6:15am: The emergency team is to activate the

contingency plan to ensure the school premise will be open and staffed

until proper arrangements are made for arriving students to return home

at an appropriate time.

iii) Announced during school hours: School is to continue until the end of

normal school hours and conditions are safe for students to return home.

iv) Special occasion: When heavy persistent rain only affects the particular

area where our school is located, parents should exercise personal

judgement whether to allow their children to go to school.

c) Contingency Plan

1) ‘Suspension of classes’ announced after 6:15am

i) School is to open as usual.

ii) EDT is to activate its operation.

iii) The teacher- in-charge of the EDT is to

l inform the other member of the team to station in school;

l coordinate with the school clerk to arrange a safe shelter for the

arriving students;

l monitor closely the latest development of the weather conditions; and

l inform the Principal the ongoing situation and seek his advice.

iv) The teachers on duty have to

l record the name and telephone number of the arriving students

(Appendix 1);

l contact the parents or guardians; and

l accompany the students in the shelter and ensure their safety until

further arrangements are made.

Crisis D3

2) ‘Suspension of classes’ announced when school is in session

i) EDT is to resume duty immediately.

ii) The teacher-in-charge of EDT is to monitor closely information released

by the authorities concerned;

iii) The Principal is to decide whether students should be dismissed

immediately or kept at school until further notice.

iv) Before the members of EDT leave, they have to ensure

l all the students are dispersed safely;

l a safe shelter for students who choose to stay behind due to potential

dangers or inaccessibility; and

l the parents or guardians of these students being contacted.

Crisis D4

學生回校記錄表格

數目 學生姓名 班別 到校時間 已通知家長 離校時間 備註

1

是 / 否

2

是 / 否

3

是 / 否

4

是 / 否

5

是 / 否

6

是 / 否

7

是 / 否

8

是 / 否

9

是 / 否

10

是 / 否

11

是 / 否

12

是 / 否

13

是 / 否

14

是 / 否

15

是 / 否

負責人員簽署：__________________________

日 期：__________________________

Appendix 1

Discipline

General Policy

School Regulations and Daily Discipline

Procedure of Punishments

Procedure of Awards

Selection and Training of Prefects

DISCIPLINE EDUCATION

A) General Policy A1-2

B) School Regulations and Daily Discipline B1-13

C) Procedure of Punishments C1-9

D) Procedure of Awards D1-9

E) Selection and Training of Prefects E1

Discipline A 1

DISCIPLINE EDUCATION I) General Policy

a) Discipline education is a whole-school concern. All teachers and students are encouraged to promote it and act on its values;

b) The main responsibilities of the Discipline Committee include the followings: 1) maintain the daily school discipline in order to create an optimum

learning environment; 2) instill the correct social values into the students and guide them

to behave properly; 3) give appropriate punishment to students who breach rules and

order of the school in order to stop their misbehaviour; 4) give appropriate awards to students whose behaviour or service to

school is commendable. c) The Discipline Master should organize and promote the work of the

committee, and decide the long-term as well as short-term targets of the committee;

d) The Discipline Master, together with teachers- in-charge, should hold regular and irregular meetings to discuss the progress of work as well as matters concerned.

II) Purpose

Cultivate a modest attitude, good behaviour and prominent moral standard in students while nurturing self-disciplined, lawful and responsible individuals who are adequately geared to cope with a complex changing society.

III) Guidelines

a) The aims and the main points of the school regulations and measures concerned should be explained clearly to the students at the start of a school year. Students should know the requirements concerning disciplinary matters.

b) Procedures concerning the rewards and punishments of students should be essentially explained to teachers. A handbook for dealing with school discipline and matters concerned should be issued to all teachers for reference.

c) School prefects assist school in dealing with students’ misbehaviour under the guidance of the Discipline Committee.

d) Regular as well as random checking of students’ school uniform and hair-style should be carried out in appropriate situations. Irregularities should be followed up so that students must live up to the standards set by the school.

e) All the cases of rewards and punishments of students should be duly recorded in the computer with the help of the General Office. The evidences given by students of cases handled should be kept for reference.

Discipline A 2

f) The ‘Benevolence Appreciation Board’ acknowledging the praiseworthy act of the students should be posted up and renewed in due time.

g) Some selected topics concerning discipline education are designed for different levels. Discussions between teachers and students are encouraged in order to help the students to group the theme of the topic.

h) Under prudent considerations, the Discipline Master may use his discretion to waive the record of demerit/minor offence of a student.

Discipline B1

SCHOOL REGULATIONS AND DAILY DISCIPLINE I) Purpose

a) advocate initiative, self-discipline and conscientiousness in students; b) encourage students to be obedient, punctual, honest, courteous and

responsible individuals with eminent ethic standards.

II) Guidelines a) The maintenance of daily discipline is a whole school concern as it is a

crucial part of discipline education. b) All teachers should be clear about the rules and regulations of the

school and follow the procedures in handling matters concerned. c) Teachers when maintaining discipline should be strict but fair. When

imposing punishments to the students, teachers should explain to him/her the reasons.

d) Cases with serious consequences should be reported immediately to the Discipline Master for reference or for further action.

e) Teachers should follow up the cases handled as positive results can only be achieved if teachers care.

f) Advice of the Discipline Master should be sought when difficulties arise in handling students’ misbehaviour.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the Discipline Committee only after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Morning Assembly （8:10 a.m.-8:45 a.m.） 1) When the first bell rings at 8:10 in the morning, all teachers and

students should assemble on the playground or in the hall for the morning assembly.

2) Announcements would be made after the students have lined up properly and kept silent. Late-comers should be led by prefects to line up by the side of the playground.

3) During the gathering, teachers should avoid talking and should concentrate on keeping order. Teachers should stop students from talking or playing.

4) Form teachers should keep the class attentive when the announcements are being made.

5) Form teachers can make use of the gathering to examine the uniform and appearance of the students.

6) When the gathering is over, form teachers should lead the students to the classrooms. They should take the roll-call and collect the homework.

7) Teachers of the first lesson should arrive on time in the classroom in order to avoid leaving the students unattended.

Discipline B2

8) In case of bad weather, the morning assembly would be cancelled. The cancellation will be announced before 7:50 a.m. The janitors would unlock the classrooms in order to let the students get in earlier.

9) There would be no morning assembly on Day 1, 3, 5 and 7. Form teachers can make use of the time to have reading sessions. When public address is being made, form teachers and the students should stop all activities and listen to the announcements. Form teachers should stay with their class until 8:45 a.m.

b) Assembly 1) School assemblies may be held separately for junior and senior

forms. Students should behave respectfully and concentrate their attention during the assembly.

2) Before the start of the assembly, students of relevant classes should line up properly on the playground. Form teachers should take the roll-call first.

3) Students would be guided to the hall by the prefects. They must follow the instructions of the prefects to occupy their seats as soon as possible.

4) Usually the Discipline Master would be on the stage to maintain order. He would commence the assembly when everything is ready.

5) The School Song would be sung first in order to enhance the school spirit.

6) During the assembly, form-teachers and prefects should help to maintain order of the students.

7) When the assembly is over, the Discipline Master or the teacher- in-charge should dismiss the students and remind them to go to the classrooms orderly.

c) During Classes

1) When a student is hurt, feeling sick or emotionally unstable, the teacher in the classroom should send a monitor down to inform the General Office and seek for appropriate assistance. In no circumstances should the teacher leave the classroom when there is no other teacher attending the students.

2) Teachers should ensure that activities in the classroom would not disturb neighboring classes. When using audio-visual aids or amplifiers, teachers should keep the volume to a reasonable level.

3) Teachers should act promptly when discip line problems arise. Teachers can make use of eye contact and verbal instructions to signify their concern. If a student disrupts the class or even confronts the teacher, the teacher should send a monitor to inform the General Office and seek help from the Discipline Committee, in case he/she has difficulty in coping with the situation.

4) In case disorder breaks out in the next classroom, teachers should give help if necessary.

Discipline B3

d) In Between Lessons and Floating Classes

1) Students should stay in the classroom in between lessons. They should get the permission to go to the washroom from the teacher of the coming lesson.

2) Teachers have the responsibilities to keep order on their way to the classroom. They should advise students not to borrow books or idle about in the corridor.

3) Students going to the laboratories or special rooms should line up outside the classroom first and keep in good order on their way to and back from the laboratories or special rooms.

4) In between classes, students should not go to get books or stationery from the lockers. Students are only allowed to use the lockers to keep their personal belongings in P.E. lessons and self-study periods.

e) Recess, Lunch Break and After School

1) Teachers should take immediate action when discipline problems arise.

2) Teachers should help the prefects when they have difficulties in handling discipline problems.

3) Teachers should also advise the students whose behaviour are improper outside the school.

4) Students should stop their activities by 5:15 p.m. and leave the school premises by 5:30 p.m. Teachers on duty would remind the students to leave the school premises through the public address system. Students staying after 5:30 p.m. must be accompanied by teachers. At 6:00 p.m. all students must leave the school.

f) Students Late for School 1) Students who arrive at school after 8:10 in the morning or 1:45 in

the afternoon are recorded to be late. 2) In the morning, late-comers should report to the prefects at the

main gate and fill in the ‘Record Book for Late-comers’ stating the reason for their lateness.

3) Students who arrive at school after the morning assembly must report to the General Office and get the slip of ‘Permission to enter the classroom-Late’ and submit it to the teacher in the classroom for inspection.

4) Late-comers who arrive at school after 8:45 in the morning or 1:45 in the afternoon must report to the Form Discipline after obtaining the slip of ‘Permission to enter the classroom-Late’ （Appendix 1）from the General Office, and should submit a letter from the parent to the discipline master on the next day.

5) Form teachers should contact the parents of frequent offenders.

Discipline B4

6) Information of the late-comers would be entered into computer Teacher- in-charge and a note would be issued to each of the late-comers through the form teacher on the next day. The form teacher should contact the relevant parents of the students who are late for six times. The form teacher and form discipline teacher- in-charge should arrange an interview with the parents of the students who are late for school twelve times.

g) Absence and Early Leave of Students

1) Form teachers should contact the parents of the absent students before 10:00 in the morning if possible. If form teachers cannot contact those parents, they should inform the General Office who will follow up the case. In case students are absent without reasons, the class teacher should inform the Discipline Master for further action. Students who are absent because of illness must submit a letter from their parents on the day they resume class.

2) Letters of excuse for absence must include the following details: (i) Name and class of the absentee, (ii) Date of absence, (iii) Reason for absence, (iv) Signature of the parent or guardian.

3) Students absent from school for two days or more must submit a medical certificate written by a doctor or other documents for approval.

4) For causal leave, students must ask for permission in advance. 5) Form teachers must refer cases to the Discipline Master if they

fail to contact the parents of students who have been absent for three days.

6) Form teachers must discuss with the parents of frequent absentees to seek for remedies.

7) Except for those with sound reasons, students who are absent for more than 1/4 of the school days in a term are not allowed to sit for the examinations.

8) Students who want to have an early leave must get the permission from the Vice-Principal or the Discipline Master in advance. Before leaving, the students must also get the ‘Permission for Early Leave Slip’（Appendix 2）from the Vice-Principal or the Discipline Master or any member of the Discipline Committee. Leave without permission would be counted as truancy. Parents are reminded to inform the form teachers in advance by a letter or a note on the Student Handbook.

Discipline B5

h) Use of Medical Room 1) The medical room is only available for students who feel ill and

are not suitable for class during lessons. 2) A student who needs to take rest in the medical room should first

get the permission from the teacher in the classroom. The teacher should ask a monitor/ monitress or a responsible student to accompany the student to go to the General Office. Clerks in the General Office would take care of the student who is feeling sick. A janitor staff should go to the classroom and have a ‘Medical Room Slip’ （Appendix 3, 4） signed by the teacher. He/She should take it back to the General Office.

3) The General Office would inform the parents of the student feeling sick to take him / her to a doctor if the student stays in the medical room for over an hour without getting fit for class. In such case, the General Office would also inform the form teacher.

Discipline B6

4) When the student gets well and is fit to resume class, he/she should get Part D of the ‘Medical Room Slip’ and submit it to the teacher in the classroom.

i) Personal Belongings

1) All students should not wear valuables or bring with them walkmans, mobile phones, MDs, discmans and other expensive belongings to school.

2) Students should not keep books and stationery in school when the lessons are over.

j) Loss of Personal Belongings

1) Immediate report should be made to the Discipline Committee should a student lose any personal belongings.

2) Students who find a lost property should report to the Discipline Committee immediately.

3) A student losing his/her student card must produce a letter from the parent in order to apply for a new card.

k) Eating and Drinking

1) Students are not allowed to drink or eat in classrooms, corridors, stairs or the hall.

2) Students are permitted to eat and drink only in the covered playground before the morning assembly, during recess and lunch time, and after school.

3) Students should care about the environment and keep the school clean.

l) Student Handbook 1) Students of F.1 – F.3 must bring to school their Student

Handbooks every day. 2) Frequent check up of the Student Handbook by the form teacher

is necessary to remind the students not to neglect their daily responsibility.

3) Teachers are encouraged to make use of the Handbook to keep close contact with parents concerning the progress of the students.

4) A student who loses his/her Student Handbook should report to the form teacher and purchase a new one from the General Office.

m) Theft

1) Students should report to the teachers immediately when his/her money or other personal belongings are stolen. Te acher in the classroom should stay and keep the class in order while sending a monitor to inform the Discipline Committee for investigation.

2) If the theft is reported after the class, the teacher should keep all the students in the classroom and let the Discipline Committee handle the case

Discipline B7

Date:_____________________

PERMISSION TO ENTER THE CLASSROOM

Please excuse ____________________________ of F.____________

For being late this morning / afteroon.

Time arrived:______________________(a.m. / p.m.)

Teacher- in-charge:_________________________

Appendix 1

Discipline B8

PERMISSION FOR EARLY LEAVE

Date: _______________________________________________________________

Time: _______________________________________________________________

Form: _______________________________________________________________

Name: _______________________________________________________________

Reasons for early leave: _________________________________________________

Signature of Parent / Guidance (if applicable):

_____________________________________________________________________

Approved by: __________________________

( )

Appendix 2

Discipline B9

Use of Medical Room Part A: To be completed by student/monitor Name of student : ______________________ Date : ________________ Class : ______________( ) Time of entering The Medical Room : __________________ Period : __________________ Sympton : ___________________________________________________ Signature of Teacher : ___________________________________ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Part B : To be completed by office (for student leaving school during school hour) Guardian’s Name : ____________________ Contact Tel. No. : _______________ Time of leaving school : _______________________________ Signature of Guardian : _____________________________ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Part C : To be completed by student after recovery Time of leaving Medical Room : _______________________ Period ___________________ Signature of student : _______________________ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Part D : To be completed by office (for student entering the classroom again) To teacher concern, Time of using medical room : Form _______________ to _______________ Name of student : _________________ Class : _________________

_____________________ (Signature)

Appendix 3

Discipline B10

體育課/活動意外事件報告表

1. 意外發生之日期 時間 地點

2. 受傷學生：

(i) 姓名 性別 年齡 班級

(ii) 姓名 性別 年齡 班級

3. 從事之活動

4. 意外發生時，負責人之位置及工作

5. 意外事件發生之情況

6. 受傷情況

7. 處理方法 (包括進行急救)

8. 曾向下列機構求助 (請用��號表示)

通知時間及通知者 抵達時間

救護車 □

警 署 □

其 他 (請註明機構名稱)

Appendix 4

Discipline B11

上述有關人員抵達後所採取之行動

9. 曾否通知學生家長或監護人？ 通知時間 抵達時間

曾 □ 否 □

姓名： 關係：

該家長/監護人曾採取之行動

10. 備註

11. 報告人： (i) 姓名 職位 簽署

(ii) 姓名 職位 簽署

報告日期：

Discipline B12

Serious Accident Record Form 1. Name of School : _____________________________________________________

2. Address : _________________________________________________________

3. Principal : _________________________________________________________

4. Occurrence of accident :

Date : ________________________ Time : ____________________________

Place : ________________________ Class : __________________________

Number of pupils in class : ___________________________________________

5. Nature of accident (e.g. fire, explosion, heat burns, chemical burns, etc.)

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

6. Name(s) of pupil(s) involved (age in bracket), and injury, if any, caused by the accident

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

7. Name(s) of teacher(s)/laboratory technician(s)/laboratory attendant(s) involved, and

injury, if any, caused by the accident

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

8. Cause of accident (e.g. wrong procedure, or carelessness, or malicious action on the part of the

pupils or others, faulty equipment, etc.)

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

9. Title of the experiment performed when the accident occurred, if applicable.

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

10. Distribution of pupils at the time of accident

(a) Group work :

No. of pupils in each group ________________________________________

(b) Others :

Location of pupils ________________________________________________

Discipline B13

11. Location and activity of the teacher-in-charge of the class at the time of accident

___________________________________________________________________

12. First aid given, if any

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

13. Was any of the following telephoned for help? (Yes/No)

Tick as appropriate Time notified Time arrived

Police __________________ ___________ ___________

Fire Service ________________ ___________ ___________

Ambulance __________________ ___________ ___________

Action taken after the arrival

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

14. Was the Education Department notified of the accident by telephone? (Yes/No)

Date and time notified _________________________________________________

15. Was the parent(s) or guardian(s) of the injured pupil(s) notified of the accident?

Yes/No

16. Name(s) and designation(s) of witness(es) to the accident, if any.

___________________________________________________________________

17. General remarks of the accident, if any

___________________________________________________________________

18. Particulars of the teacher-in-charge of the class at the time of accident

Name : ______________________________________

Qualifications : _______________________________

Teaching experience (no. of years) : _____________

19. Particulars of the laboratory technician-in-charge of the laboratory where the accident

occurred

Name : ______________________________________

Qualifications (including professional qualifications) : _______________________

Working experience (no, of years) : _________________________

20. Reporting person(s) :

Teacher _________________________________ or/and Laboratory technician ________________________

21. Signature of Principal : ___________________________________

Name of Principal : ____________________________________

Date :__________________________

Discipline C1

PROCEDURES OF PUNISHMENTS I) Purposes

a) encourage students to obey the school regulations; and b) discourage misbehaviour.

II) Guidelines

a) All the punishments should be fair, consistent, reasonable and lawful. b) Teachers should take reference from the “Codified Table of Offence”（Appendix

C3, 4）before penalty is imposed. c) Punishments should be appropriate for different offences. d) The Discipline Master should have proper filing of updated information about

student behaviour including attendance record, name-taking record, record of detention class and offence record.

e) The demerit / minor offence / major offence will be recorded on the student's Report Card (except F. 5 and F.7).

f) Normally teachers should report to the General Office for giving demerit, minor offence or major offence not later than the last day of the test or examination.

g) The Discipline Master should contact the parents of frequent offenders.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy may be amended by the Discipline Committee after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Name-taking

1) Fill in the “Record of Students’ Misbehaviour”form. （Appendix C5） 2) Pass the form to the Discipline Committee for recording. 3) Prefects are responsible to do the recording and the data will be input into the

computer monthly. 4) A demerit will be given by the Discipline Committee if the student's name is

taken down 6 times.

b) Warning

1) Verbal warning should be given for minor cases. 2) For serious cases, written warning should be given. 3) Fill in the "Warning Slip" (2 copies). （Appendix C6） 4) Give the slip to the student and ask for the Parent's / Guardian's Signature. 5) Collect the slip on the next day, pass one copy to office for filing, and pass the

other copy to the Form teachers for recording.

Discipline C2

6) A demerit will be given by the Form teachers to the student for every 3 warnings.

c) Detention Class

1) Detention class is set for everyday from 3:45 p.m. to 5:15 p.m. at Rm. 104 and 105.

2) Fill in the “Letter for Detention”. （Appendix C7） 3) Give the letter to the student and ask for the parent’s / guardian’s signature. 4) Collect the letter and pass it to the office on or before the recess of the

detention day. 5) Prepare suitable exercises for the student during detention. 6) Collect the exercise from the office on the next day. 7) Student absent from the detention class should be arranged to another detention

class and his / her name should be taken down once. 8) Student absent from the detention class twice should be given one demerit by

the Discipline Master.

d) Demerit

1) Fill in the "Record of Offence" in the office. （Appendix C8） 2) The clerical assistant will make the computer record and produce an "Offence

Slip" before 4:00 p.m. each day. （Appendix C9） 3) After getting the slip in the morning of the next working day, the teacher should

give the slip to the student and ask for the parent's / guardian's signature. 4) Collect the slip on the next working day and pass it to the office for filing.

e) Minor offence or Major offence

1) Teacher should inform the Discipline Committee who will arrange an interview with the parents.

2) Fill in the "Record of Offence" in the office. 3) The clerical assistant will make the computer record and produce an "Offence

Slip" to the teacher. 4) Teacher will meet the parent together with a Discipline Committee member to

discuss the case. 5) Ask the parent / guardian to sign on the "Offence Slip". 6) Teacher should fill in the Student Record File at the end of the interview. 7) Pass the "Offence Slip" to the office for filing on the next day. 8) A memo will be given to the Form teachers to report the case.

Discipline C3

Major

Offence

Minor

Offence

Demerit

Name

taki

ng

HO LAP COLLEGE (SPONSORED BY THE SIK SIK YUEN) Default Punishment Rules Rating Report

School Year: 2006/2007

Rule Rating

Chinese Description English Description Code

Repeated name taken down by prefects/teachers

六次被領袖生或老師記名 0 0 1 0 0001

Repeated late attendance for six times 六次遲到 0 0 1 0 0002

Repeated no textbook 多次不帶課本 0 0 1 0 0003

No homework 不交功課 0 0 1 0 0004

Accumulated written warning for two times

累積兩次被書面警告 0 0 1 0 0005

Absence from detention class 缺席留堂 0 0 1 0 0006

Copying homework 抄襲功課 0 0 1 0 0007

Causing disturbance 不守秩序 0 0 1 1 0008

Not wearing proper school uniform 校服不整 0 0 1 1 0009

Wearing hair style not approved by school

髮式不符合學校標準 0 0 1 1 0010

Wearing make-up or ornaments etc. 佩戴飾物或化妝 0 0 1 1 0011

Eating in outside restricted area 在非指定地區飲食 0 0 1 1 0012

Speaking vulgar language 說粗言穢語 0 0 1 1 0013

Bringing along unauthorized articles to school

攜帶違例物品回校 0 1 1 1 0014

Littering 隨地拋棄垃圾 0 0 1 1 0015

Wilful damage of school property 故意破壞公物 0 1 1 0 0016

Not following instructions given by prefects

不服從領袖生指示 0 0 1 1 0017

Not following instructions given by teachers

不服從老師指示 0 0 1 1 0018

Telling lies/deceit to teachers 說謊/欺騙師長 0 1 1 0 0019

Impudence or wilful insolence to teachers

蓄意輕漫師長，對師長無禮 1 1 1 0 0020

Appendix 1

Discipline C4

Major

Offence

Minor

Offence

Demerit

Name

taki

ng

HO LAP COLLEGE (SPONSORED BY THE SIK SIK YUEN) Default Punishment Rules Rating Report

School Year: 2006/2007

Rule Rating

Chinese Description English Description Code Library book overdue 過期交還學校圖書館圖書 0 0 1 0 0021

Participating in gambling activities 參與有賭博成份的遊戲 1 1 1 0 0022

Smoking 吸煙 1 1 0 0 0023

Stealing 盜竊 1 1 0 0 0024

Fighting 打架 1 1 0 0 0025

Cheating in examination or test 考試或測驗時作弊 1 1 0 0 0026

Intimidation (bullying/threating fellow students)

作弄、欺凌或恐嚇同學 1 1 0 0 0027

Forging guardian's signature 偽冒家長簽署 1 1 0 0 0028

Making alterations in school-parent correspondance

擅自塗改校方與家長的通訊資料 1 1 0 0 0029

Cutting classes 曠課或無故缺席學校的集會/週會 0 1 1 0 0030

Truancy 逃學 1 1 0 0 0031

Misbehaviour which brings disgrace to school

行為不端、損害校譽 1 1 0 0 0032

Improper behaviour 行為不當 0 0 0 0 9999

Disciplinary Action

Chinese Description English Description Code 01 Detention 留堂

2 Sevice to the school 服務學校

3 Suspension 停課

Discipline C5

Appendix 2

HO LAP COLLEGE Discipline Board

Record of Student’s Misbehaviour

Name of Student : ______________________ Class : _________ Class No. : _________

Date : _____________________________________

Time : __________________________________

(Please give a tick against the misbehaviour item in the box.)

[ ] disregard of rules (remark) ________________________________________________

[ ] inappropriate school uniform (remark) _______________________________________

[ ] others (remark) _________________________________________________________

Name of teacher : ______________________ Signature of student : ___________________

Ref. No. : ___________

Discipline C6

Appendix 3

HO LAP COLLEGE 可立中學

WARNING SLIP (警告紀錄表)

Name (姓名) Class (班別) Date (日期)

Offence (事由)

Accumulation of 2 warnings leads to a demerit. Parents are advised to co-operate with

the school in the guidance of their children. 如是項紀錄累積至二次， 貴子弟須被記缺點一次，請家長多加勸導，以收家庭學

校雙軌教育實效。

Teacher’s Name and Signature

(老師姓名及簽署)

Parent’s / Guardian’s Signature

(家長 / 監護人簽署)

Ref. No. : __________

Discipline C7

Appendix 4

可立中學 留堂通知書

學生姓名：___________________ 班別：________ 班號：________

留堂日期：___________________ 時間： 3:45p.m. – 5:00p.m.

留堂地點：o １０４室（逢星期一、三、五）

o １０５室（逢星期二、四）

被罰原因：___________________________

處 罰：罰抄 / 寫檢討書(400字) / 抄書 / 做功課 /

其他 ____________________________________________

當事老師：訓導處

*註：學生如無故缺席，將會被記缺點一個。

Discipline C8

Appendix 5

Ho Lap College Record of Offence

Academic Year: 2006-2007 Punishment

(Please put a tick) Date Class Class no. Name Offence

code Remark/Detail Demerit Minor

Offence Major

Offence

Teacher’s initial

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Discipline C9

Appendix 6

06年 10月 23日

Discipline D1

PROCEDURES OF AWARDS

I) Purposes

a) praise and give recognition to students who have shown to be responsible and provided good service to the school and fellow schoolmates; and

b) promote the culture of responsibility, friendship, leadership and team spirit.

II) Guidelines

a) The Discipline Committee is responsible for monitoring the Awards System. b) Teachers should take reference from the “Codified Table of Merits” （Appendix

D3）before the awards are given. c) Commendable Behaviour Award (CBA) is a general award given to students who

have done very well in one of the followings. 1) Personal conduct and behaviour: Students have shown good conduct and

behaviour (e.g. politeness, responsibility, helpfulness, and honesty). 2) Performance in extracurricular/club activities: Students have helped to

promote and organise or have participated actively in extracurricular activities.

3) Services performance: Students have provided consistent service to students or the school (e.g. class officials, monitor/monitress, club officials, prefects, uniform/service group members).

d) Distinguished Behaviour Award (DBA) is an honourable award to students whose contribution, in one of the following areas, has a long term effect to the well being of the school.

1) Students show distinguished performance as Club/Service group official. 2) Students are involved in activities outside school leading to enhancement of

school reputation. 3) Other honourable behaviour recognised by the Discipline Committee.

Candidates for DBA must obtain A-grade-conduct and show enthusiasm to services.

e) Courtesy Student Award will be given to students (one from each form) who are sincere and polite to teachers and schoolmates.

f) Conduct and Services Award is normally given to one of the Head Prefects who discharges his/her duties to the standards satisfying the Discipline Committee.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy may be amended by the Discipline Committee after consultation with the Principal.

Discipline D2

IV) Procedures

a) Commendable Behaviour Award (CBA) 1) Teachers who would like to issue CBA to students should report to the

general office before the last day of each test/examination. 2) Obtain either a (i) ‘CBA Book Mark’ and write greeting words on it, or（Appendix D4） (ii) ‘CBA Certificate’, which is available in the school office. （Appendix

D5, D6） 3) Teachers may give the awards to the students directly as soon as the merit is

ready.

b) Distinguished Behaviour Award (DBA)

1) One week before the start of Half Yearly/Yearly Examination, the Discipline Committee will invite teachers to nominate candidates for DBA.

2) A nomination list will then be prepared by Discipline Committee and posted up in the school office.

3) Successful candidates should have the support of at least five teachers and no teacher(s) saying against.

4) The Award will be given during assembly at the end of the school year.

c) Conduct and Services Award The Discipline Master should nominate the Head Prefects, who have discharged their duties satisfying the expectation of the Discipline Committee, for the award at the end of the school year. Normally a voting is held in the Discipline Committee after the Discipline Master’s briefing. The Head Prefect gaining the majority support from the Discipline Committee members wins the award.

Discipline D3

Disting

uished

Behavio

Outstan

ding

Behavio

Commend

able

Behavio

Good

Behavio

ur

Appendix 1

School Year: 2006/2007

Rule Rating

HO LAP COLLEGE (SPONSORED BY THE SIK SIK YUEN) Default Award Rules Rating Report

Code English Description Chinese Description

A0010 Subject Prize 學科獎 0 0 0 0

A0020 Class Prize 班級學術獎 0 0 0 0

A0030 Sik Sik Yuen Scholarship 嗇色園獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0031 Sik Sik Yuen Scholarship in Moral Education 嗇色園獎學金（經訓） 0 0 0 0

A0032 Sik Sik Yuen Scholarship in Putonghua 嗇色園獎學金（普通話） 0 0 0 0

A0040 Wong Wan Tin Memorial Scholarship 黃允畋獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0041 Wong Tze Lam Scholarship 黃梓林獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0042 Chan Lap Scholarship 陳立獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0043 Wong Shui Scholarship 黃水獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0044 Chung Cheong Scholarship 鍾昌獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0045 Shum Lee Yuen Ying Scholarship 岑李玄英獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0046 Sik Sik Yuen Lee Yuen Ping Scholarship 嗇色園李元炳獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0047 Choi Shiu Scholarship 蔡兆獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0050 IYY'85 Youth Festival Award 八五年國際青年年獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0060 Andy Lau Scholarship 劉德華獎學金 0 0 0 0

A0070 The Most Improved Student Award 獅球教育基金最佳進步獎 0 0 0 0

A0080 Yan Chai Award Scheme 仁濟學業成績進步獎 0 0 0 0

B0010 Excellent Behaviour (in Class) 品行優異(班內表現) 0 0 0 1

B0020 Good Behaviour (in Class) 品行良好(班內表現) 0 0 0 1

B0030 Improved Behaviour (in Class) 品行顯著進步(班內表現) 0 0 0 1

Discipline D4

Disting

uished

Beha

vio

Outstan

ding

Behavio

Commend

able

Behavio

Good

Behavio

ur

School Year: 2006/2007

Rule Rating

HO LAP COLLEGE (SPONSORED BY THE SIK SIK YUEN) Default Award Rules Rating Report

Code English Description Chinese Description

B0040 Good Attendence - without late and absent 勤學 0 0 1 0

B0050 Returning lost items found

拾遺不昧 0 0 1 0

B0060 見義勇為 0 0 0 0

C0010 Outstanding preformance in School Team 優秀校隊隊員 0 0 0 1

C0020 Good performance in activities outside school 校外比賽表現良好 0 0 0 1

S0010 Sik Sik Yuen Scholarship (Conduct and Service) 嗇色園獎學金（操行及服務） 0 0 0 1

S0020 Head Prefect 領袖生長 0 2 0 0

S0021 Prefect (Team Leader) 領袖生組長 0 1 0 0

S0022 Prefect 領袖生 0 0 2 0

S0030 President of Students' Union 學生會長 0 2 0 0

S0031 Secretary of Students' Union 學生會幹事 0 1 0 0

S0040 House Captain/Committee 社長／社幹事 0 1 0 0

S0050 Society Chairperson/Committee 學會會長／幹事 0 0 1 0

S0060 Leader of Joyful Stars 朋輩輔導員組長 0 1 0 0

S0061 Joyful Star 朋輩輔導員 0 0 1 0

S0070 Leader of Careers Prefects 職業輔導員組長 0 1 0 0

S0071 Careers Prefect 職業輔導員 0 0 1 0

S0080 Leader of School Librarians 圖書館管理員組長 0 1 0 0

S0081 School Librarian 圖書館管理員 0 0 1 0

S0090 Team Leader of Road Safety Patrol 交通安全隊隊長 0 1 0 0

Discipline D5

Disting

uished

Behavio

Outstan

ding

Behavio

Commend

able

Behavio

Good

Behavio

ur

School Year: 2006/2007

Rule Rating

HO LAP COLLEGE (SPONSORED BY THE SIK SIK YUEN) Default Award Rules Rating Report

Code English Description Chinese Description

S0091 Road Safety Patrol 交通安全隊隊員 0 0 1 0

S0100 Team Leader of Red Cross Youth Cadet 紅十字會青少年團隊長 0 1 0 0

S0101 Red Cross Youth Cadet 紅十字會青少年團隊員 0 0 1 0

S0110 Team Leader of Boy Scout/Girl Guide 男／女童軍隊長 0 1 0 0

S0111 Boy Scout/Girl Guide 男／女童軍隊員 0 0 1 0

S0120 Class Monitor/Monitress 班長 0 0 1 0

S0121 Subject Monitor/Monitress 科長 0 0 1 0

S0122 IT Ambassador 資訊科技大使 0 0 1 0

S0123 Class Club committee 班會幹事 0 0 1 0

S0124 Serving in public services on behalf of the school

代表學校參加社會服務,表現優良 0 0 1 0

S0125 Good performance in inter-school competition

代表學校參加比賽,表現優良 0 0 1 0

S0126 Good performance in serving school 校內服務表現優良 0 0 1 0

Discipline E1

SELECTION AND TRAINING OF PREFECTS I) Purposes

a) replace prefects from F.5 and F.7 who have left the Prefect Society; and b) provide students with an opportunity of leadership training.

II) Guideline (Criteria) a) Potential prefects must have outgoing personalities. b) Potential prefects are preferred to have been prefects or monitors in primary

school. c) Potential prefects are preferred to possess leadership, work seriously and be willing

to shoulder responsibilities. d) Students are preferred to have good records of behaviour and attendance for school.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be amended only by the Discipline Committee.

IV) Procedures

a) At the end of each school year, F.2 and F.3 form teachers nominate students who meet the criteria mentioned above as prefects of the next school year.

b) Those students nominated by form teachers are invited to join the Prefect Society. c) Students who accept the invitation are informed of an interview. d) Teachers of the Discipline Committee and head prefects will have an interview

with those students who accept the invitation. e) After the interview, teachers of the Discipline Committee select the potential

students to be trained as prefects. f) Students chosen by teachers of the Discipline Committee are to work on probation. g) During the two-week probation period, an ex-perfect is responsible for

accompanying a potential prefect to familiarize with the works of every post. h) After the probation period, the ex-prefects have to submit a report on the

performance of the potential prefects. i) The 4 head prefects select the new prefects among those on probation. j) Those students who are selected to be new prefects are officially informed to

shoulder responsibilities of the next school term. k) F.6 students can apply for being prefects before the school term starts. l) During summer holidays, prefects in training are to join a “Prefect Camp” or some

training activities organized by the school for developing leadership. m) At the mid-term of each school year, a discussion will be held among all prefects to

review their performance.

STUDENT GUIDANCE AND COUNSELLING

General Policy

Case Work

Peer Counselling

Social Worker

Orientation Day

Student Guidance

and Counselling

Form 6

Orientation

Form 1

Orientation

STUDENT GUIDANCE AND COUNSELLING

A) General Policy A1 B) Case Work B1-4 C) Peer Counselling C1-2 D) Social Worker D1-3 E) Orientation Day

1) F.1 Orientation Day E1/1-2 2) F.6 Orientation Day E2/1-2

Guidance A1

GENERAL POLICY

a) To assist students, in their adolescence, to adapt to physiological and

psychological changes as well as changes in social status and human relationships so that they can grow and develop healthily.

b) To assist students to identify their particular qualities and develop them to the

fullest potentials. c) To help students to develop emotional quotient.

Guidance B1

CASE WORK

I) Purposes

a) cultivate a supportive atmosphere for students and help them cope with adverse

conditions and frustrations;

b) help students develop better self-understanding, together with positive self- images

and outlooks on lives; and

c) enhance confidence and hence self-esteem of the students.

II) Guidelines

a) All teaching staffs are expected to give guidance to students if they think they are

competent enough to deal with the problems in hand. Referral can be made to

Guidance Team or the School Social Worker if necessary.

b) Confidentiality is regarded as the most important principle in handling cases.

However, Guidance teachers may provide information to suitable personnel for the

students’ benefit and safety or the preventing infringement of other people’s right.

c) Guidance teachers aim at helping clients to explore, clarify and tackle their

problems rather than replacing clients’ position in handling their own problems.

d) Closely worked together with the Discipline Team to deal with difficult cases.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the School Administration after consultation with

members of Guidance Team.

IV) Procedures

a) Case Referral 1) Teachers should be alert to explore students’ problems, including those from

emotion, behavior, academic results, family background and so on.

2) When problems are discovered, teachers are requested to contact the clients,

understand their situations and then help them identify the problems.

3) If the situations do not improve, teachers may ask the advice from other teams,

such as the Student Guidance and Counselling Committee, the Careers

Guidance Committee, the Discipline Committee or the School Social Worker,

according to the nature of the cases.

Guidance B2

4) Teachers may also refer cases to the above committees. If they refer cases to

the Guidance Team, they are required to complete the referral forms (Appendix

1) and return them to Guidance Team.

5) The Guidance teachers ought to investigate the nature and complexity of the

cases, the relationship between the clients and teachers and other important

factors. Then, the Guidance Team will decide who should handle the cases.

6) As to some serious cases, the Student Guidance and Counselling Committee

should refer them to the School Social Worker and other professional

associations.

b) Case Counselling

1) Guidance teachers need to make an interview with clients. In most cases, all

the content should be kept secret.

2) During the interview, they should help the client to explore and clarify the

problems from the clients’ perspective.

3) After each interview, the case record form (Appendix 2) should be completed.

4) After clarifying the problems, teachers should help students set goals which are

based on dynamic understanding and help them develop the new perspectives.

5) Then, the client is required to set an action plan. They need to evaluate and

implement it in order to change the situation.

6) Complete the forms of Register to Case (Appendix 3) and return to the Student

Guidance and Counselling Master at the end of the school year.

7) The Student Guidance and Counselling Master should return those forms of

Register to Case to the Education Department at the end of the school year.

Guidance B3

可立 中學 個 案 轉 介 表

本表格須由轉介人填寫，並決定遞交輔導組主任或學校社工。

姓名：___________________ 班別：______ 性別：_____ 出生日期 ：_______________

家長或監護人姓名：___________________ 關係：_______ 聯絡電話：______________

轉介原因： _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ 已採取的行動： _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

轉介老師姓名：_________________________ 簽 名：___________________________

日 期：___________________________

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

輔導組主任專用 學校社工專用

輔 導 組 檔 號:___________________ 社 工 檔 號:______________________

處理方式: □ 直接轉介學校社工 日期:___________________

□ 建議轉介特殊教育組 日期:___________________

□ 輔導組跟進： 負責教師:___________________

日期:____________________

Appendix 1

Guidance B4

個案輔導--進度記錄

由輔導老師填寫

學生姓名：_____________________ 性別：______ 班別：_________ 首次面談日期：_________________ 輔導老師：___________________

日 期 主要問題 / 建議 備 註

Appendix 2

Guidance C1

Peer Counselling Scheme

I) Purposes

a) enhance the sense of belonging of F.1 students;

b) help F.1 students adapt to the new learning environment;

c) cultivate a supportive atmosphere for students; and

d) encourage students to serve and nurture their sense of respons ibility;

II) Guidelines

a) The joyful stars are F.3, 4 and 6 students who have sense of responsibilities and are

willing to help.

b) The recruitment of joyful stars will be held at in May every year on voluntary basis.

c) The newly-recruited joyful stars have to attend a short training course about the

introduction of Peer Counselling Scheme, needs of F.1 students, counselling skills

and skills in organizing activities.

d) The Peer Counselling Scheme will be introduced during the F.1 Orientation Day.

e) The scheme is opened to all F.1 students.

f) Joyful stars will meet F.1 students regularly.

h) Joyful stars will organize activities for F.1 students. i) Joyful stars are not expected to solve problems of F.1 students on their own. They

should seek advice from their teachers when necessary.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be amended by school administration only after the consultation

with the student guidance team.

IV) Procedures

a) Recruitment and Training of joyful stars 1) Joyful stars will be recruited from the F.2 and F.3 in the second term.

2) Recommendations from teachers will be considered.

3) Joyful stars will also be recruited from F.5 students after the announcement of

HKCE results.

4) Workshops or training camp will be arranged by the Student Guidance and

Counselling Committee to train the joyful stars recruited at the end of the

school year.

Guidance C2

5) The joyful stars will be divided in five groups. One group for a class.

6) A group of F.1 students will be assigned to joyful stars.

7) The joyful stars will form a committee at the beginning of next school year to

plan the activity for that year.

b) Activity

1) Games day, tea party or picnic will be organize to establish the rapport between

joyful stars and F.1 students.

2) Joyful stars will meet F.1 students to see if they have problems in adapting to

the new environment, learning, etc.

Guidance D1

SCHOOL SOCIAL WORKER

I) Purposes a) provide an alternative pathway for the students to seek for help;

b) cultivate a supportive atmosphere for students and help them cope with

adverse conditions and frustrations; and

c) help students develop better self-understanding, together with positive

self- images and outlooks on lives.

II) Guidelines a) The School Social Worker (SSW) is a professional attached to the school

setting.

b) The SSW will visit our school on Wednesday and Friday.

c) The SSW is one of the members of the Student Guidance and Counselling

Committee.

d) The SSW will take a neutral and impartial view of school life.

e) The SSW in the helping process assists the student in integrating with the

family, the school and the community at large.

f) Mutual understanding and co-operation is indispensable for working towards

the same objective of helping the students to the most of their educational

opportunities.

g) Group counselling method is used where appropriate for remedial or

preventive purposes for students with common problems or needs.

h) The cooperational guidelines for SSW prepared by Coordinating Committee

on School Social Work (Children and Youth Division) should be followed.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after

consultation with the principal.

IV) Procedures a) Publicity

1) The teachers should be well briefed on the extent of services the SSW

can offer to the students, the referral procedures and the communication

channels, when and where to meet the SSW in staff meeting.

2) The SSW should be introduced to the students in school assembly and/or

class visits.

3) The SSW will be introduced to the parents in F.1 Orientation Day.

Guidance D2

b) Enquires/Consultation 1) The SSW at any time welcomes enquires or consultation from parents,

students and school personnel on all aspects and problems related to

School Social Work Service.

2) Information of guidance will be given.

3) Follow-up service will be rendered when required.

c) Case Work 1) When problems are discovered, teachers are requested to contact the

clients, understand their situations and then help them identify the

problems.

2) If the situations do not improve, teachers may refer the case either to the

Student Guidance and Counselling Team or to the SSW directly.

3) The less severe cases related to learning and behaviour problems will be

handled by the Guidance Teachers while the severe cases will be referred

to the SSW.

4) Upon receiving referral from school personnel, parents, students or when

a problem is picked up by the SSW, initial assessment on the case will be

made.

5) Interviews and home visits are conducted with the student and, when

necessary, his family, to provide individual counselling.

6) Case conferences and collateral contacts are conducted with school

personnel when necessary.

7) Referrals would be made to specialists, e.g. educational psychologists, as

necessitated by the case.

8) A list of clients should be provided to the Student Guidance and

Counselling Master at the end of each month.

d) Group Counselling 1) The common problems among students should be identified first.

2) The target group will then be located and recruited.

3) The main types of groups are as follows:

a) Treatment and therapeutic groups;

ii) Developmental and socialization groups; and

iii) Groups on study skills, etc.

4) Group counselling will be conducted.

Guidance D3

e) Mass Programmes 1) The SSW should help different departments organize mass programmes

for the purpose of giving guidance and promoting communication and

understanding.

2) The themes of the mass programmes will be decided by the heads of

different departments such as Student Guidance and Counselling

Committee, Sex Education Committee, Parent-Teacher Association, etc.

after consulting the SSW.

3) Should resources permit, mass programmes will be organized by the

SSW with the co-operation and assistance of the school and other related

community or welfare bodies for students, parents and teachers.

4) Evaluation will be made after the mass programme.

Guidance E1/1

FORM 1 ORIENTATION DAY I) Purposes

a) help students to have a better understanding of secondary school life; b) introduce the regulations, extra-curricular activities and guidance services in our school;

and

c) introduce the major concerns of the coming school year.

II). General Guidelines

a) The orientation is a half-day programme and will be help in the morning. b) The orientation will be help about one week before the start of the school year. c) All form 1 students must attend.

d) The following items are suggested for the schedule of orientation : 1) Welcoming speech; 2) Introduction to school regulations; 3) Allocation of classes;

4) Introduction to school guidance services; 5) Introduction to extra-curricular activities; 6) Introduction to Parent-Teacher Association; and 7) Questioning Session and touring around the school

e) The orientation programme will be organized by Student Guidance and Counselling Committee.

f) Form Teachers of Form One must attend the orientation programme. g) The Principal, Vice-Principals, the Discipline Master, the CCA master and the School

Social Worker will be invited to give short speech or talks in the Orientation Day. h) Evaluation will be done after the Orientation Day.

II) Basis of Discretion

The policy will only be varied after with the approval of the working committee of Form 1 Orientation.

Guidance E1/2

III) Procedures

a) A preparatory meeting will be held at the end of the school year (or in the August) to determine 1) the date and schedule of the orientation;

2) the details of the orientation programme; and 3) the allocation of work.

b) Inform the office the date of the orientation. c) Inform the school uniform manufacturer to come to school before that day for the

delivery of the school uniform. d) Book the school hall and audio-visual equipment. e) Parents letters will be prepared after the preparatory meeting to remind the new

students the date of Orientation Day. The letters will be given to them during the form

one registration. f) With the help of office, inform Form Teachers of Form One to attend the orientation

programme. g) Inform the School Social Worker the arrangement of the orientation and his/her duty

on that day. h) The seating plan and the setting of audio-visual equipment should be given to the office

one week before the Orientation Day. i) Information concerning class allocation, extra-curricular activities, guidance services

and School Social Work will be collected and printed. The handouts should be ready at least two days before the Orientation Day.

j) Inform the school prefects the date of the orientation and their duties on that day. k) The Form Teachers will be responsible for taking the role call on the Orientation Day.

l) A bulletin board will be prepared to introduce the Parent-Teacher Association. A counter will be set to recruit members.

m) A teacher or a student will be responsible for photographs taking. n) Evaluation will be made after the Orientation Day.

Guidance E2/1

FORM 6 ORIENTATION DAY I) Purposes

a) help students to have a better understanding of F.6 school life;

b) help students to have a basic understanding of JUPAS; and

c) introduce the major concerns of the coming school year.

II) General Guidelines

a) The orientation will be held one to two weeks after the announcement of HKCE

results.

b) All F.6 students must attend.

c) The following points will be mentioned in the orientation : 1) The differences in school life between F.5 and F.6; 2) The obligations of F.6 students; 3) An introduction to JUPAS; and 4) The importance of extra-curricular activities to F.6 students.

d) The Vice-Principal(s) and representatives from the Extra-curricular Activity

Committee, the Discipline Committee, the Student Guidance and Counselling

Committee and the Careers Guidance Committee will form a working committee

e) Matriculated students will be invited to share their experiences with the new F.6

students.

f) All F.6 form teachers will attend the orientation on request.

g) An evaluation meeting will be held after the orientation.

III) Basis of Discretion

The policy will only be altered by school administration only after consultation with the

principal and the working committee of F.6 Orientation Day.

IV) Procedures

a) At the end of June, a preparatory meeting will be held to discuss the following

points : 1) The date and the duration of the orientation. 2) The details of the orientation programme. 3) The allocation of duties.

b) Letters to parents will be prepared after the preparatory meeting.

c) Inform the office the date of orientation.

d) If necessary, some F.7 students will be invited to carry out the experience sharing

session after the announcement of HKAL results.

Guidance E2/2

e) Memo will be given to the F.5 students to remind the students to attend the

orientation during the registration.

f) The details of the seating arrangement, the number of classrooms and audio-visual

aids needed will be given to the office at least three days before the orientation.

g) The F.6 Form Teachers will be reminded of their roles in the orientation day.

h) Rolecall will be taken on the Orientation Day.

i) A teacher or student(s) from Photographic Club will be invited to take photographs.

j) An evaluation meeting will be held after the orientation.

STRUCTURE OF THE MORAL AND CIVIC EDUCATION COMMITTEE

General Policy

Moral & Civic Education Committee

Environmental Education Committee

Sex Education Committee

Moral and Civic Education Committee

MORAL AND CIVIC EDUCATION

A) General Policy A1-3 B) Moral & Civic Education B1-2 C) Environmental Education C1-2 D) Sex Education D1-3

Moral A1

MORAL AND CIVIC EDUCATION COMMITTEE

GENERAL POLICY

I) Nature of work : a) Moral and civic education is a whole-school concern and one of the Four Key Tasks

of Education Reform. It is promoted through the programmes organized by the Moral and Civic Education Committee, and its sub-committees (including national education , moral education, health and sex education, environmental education, and voluntary services).

b) It is implemented in a cross-curricular manner. Subject teachers are encouraged to incorporate related materials and ideas in teaching the formal curricula.

c) It is implemented through permeation approach. Through class periods, morning assemblies, co-curricular activities and other activities organized inside or outside the school, teachers and students are encouraged to learn more about moral and civic education, reflect on their own attitudes and act on their beliefs accordingly.

II) Responsibilities : a) Before the commencement of the school year :

1) At the end of the previous school year, each sub-committee under the MCEC

should produce its provisional annual themes and activities with reference to the school’s Major Concerns, relevant guidelines issued by the Curriculum Development Council, teachers’ comments and students’ needs.

2) The MCEC coordinator will call a meeting to coordinate themes and activities put forward by the sub-committees to make efficient use of resources and avoid time clashes of activities.

3) At the end of August, coordinators of the sub-committees should discuss with Counseling Committee, Careers Education Committee, and Discipline Committee on the allocation of class periods, time and venues available for organizing various activities under the direction of the Vice-Principal.

b) After the commencement of the school year : 1) A general evaluation of the effectiveness and arrangement of class periods and

assemblies will be conducted by the Vice-Principal biannually through questionnaires filled in by the respective form teachers and deputy form teachers. The result will be given to the respective committees for reference.

2) At the end of the school year, of the MCEC conducts its own evaluation of effectiveness of programmes organized (including the class periods and assemblies).

Moral A2

III) Guidelines on arranging class periods and school assemblies : a) The whole set of teaching materials including worksheet, teachers’ instruction sheet

and the teachers’ reference should be prepared at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled date of the class period.

b) The teaching materials should be submitted to the committee coordinator for inspection. Modification will be made whenever necessary.

c) The finalized version of teaching materials should be sent to the general office for printing at least one week in advance.

d) The member responsible is to make booking of audio-visual aids and other facilities as required.

e) The teaching materials and the teachers’ instruction sheet should be given to the form-teachers or deputy form-teachers at least 2 working days in advance. Briefing sessions for form-teachers involved should be held in order to ensure that they comprehend to objectives and implementation of the class period.

f) In the case of school assemblies, the member responsible should inform the Discipline Committee beforehand if prefects or teachers were needed to maintain order.

g) If guest speaker(s) were invited, the member responsible should prepare souvenir(s) for him/them and inform the Principal.

h) Evaluation of the class period will be done in the form of questionnaires filled in by the respective form-teachers or deputy form-teachers, and teachers’ and students’ feedback received by the member responsible.

IV) Guidelines on arranging seminars and talks other than those conducted in class periods : a) The member(s) responsible is to obtain the approval from the Principal. b) The booking of the venue, furniture and audio-visual aids should be made as

required. c) In case the event is to be conducted beyond the regular school hours, the member(s)

responsible should prepare a parent letter to notify parents the date and time of the activity as well as the time of dismissal.

d) The letter has to be distributed to the students at least 3 working days in advance. Signed reply slips from the parents should be collected at least a day beforehand.

e) The member responsible should inform the Discipline Committee 3 working days in advance if prefects or teachers were needed to maintain order.

f) If guest speaker(s) were invited, the member responsible should prepare souvenir(s) for him/them and inform the Principal.

Moral A3

V) Guidelines on arranging exhibitions and displays : a) The member(s) responsible should make the booking and delivery of exhibits with

external organization. b) The member(s) responsible should book the venue and other resources as required. c) The member(s) responsible should publicize the displays and return the exhibits

accordingly. In case of damage to the materials, they should report immediately to the committee coordinator.

VI) Guidelines on organizing visits and excursions outside school hours : a) The member responsible is to seek the approval from the Principal before organizing

the event. b) Parental approval must be sought through a parent letter at least 3 working days in

advance. c) Students’ safety is of prime concern to the member responsible. d) The member should also follow the detailed procedures outlined in the relevant

section of “Excuraion”..

VII) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the Moral and Civic Education Committee after consultation with the Principal.

Moral and Civic B2

MORAL EDUCATION AND CIVIC EDUCATION (2005-06)

I) Purposes

a) develop in students positive values, attitudes and sense of belonging to the family,

community, the state and the world so that they are ready to contribute to the

betterment of these institutions;

b) lead students to develop their roles and responsibilities within the family, school

and community; and

c) develop in students critical thinking and problem-solving skills that would allow

them to analyze issues objectively and to arrive at a rational appraisal of these

issues.

II) Guidelines

a) The Moral Education Committee (MEC) plans, monitors and evaluates the yearly

programme while all the teachers in the school are responsible for the promotion

of moral and civic education.

b) Moral and Civic Education programmes are also conducted in class periods,

assemblies, and morning gathering, and through extra-curricular activities. The

activities may include mass programmes, discussions, projects, games, talks, visits,

competitions, displays and participation in relevant functions organized by

external bodies.

c) The talk in the morning assemble provides the class the opportunity to share views

on topics selected with the students.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the Moral and Civic Education Committee after

consideration of the views and opinions expressed by teachers, parents and students.

Moral and Civic B2

IV) Procedures

a) The Moral and Civic Education Committee coordinator is to discuss with panel

heads the possible implementation of civic education in their subjects.

b) The themes and relevant programmes will be finalized at the beginning of school

year. They are designed with accordance to the major concern of the school.

c) The coordinator will discuss with the teacher-in-charge of extra-curricular

activities on how to incorporate civic education concepts in management and organization of students’ clubs and their activities.

d) At the beginning of a school year, the committee members will be given the

material for class periods. They should reproduce the materials with guidelines

for class teachers to use.

e) The short talk in the morning assembly is to nurture the proper sense of value

among students. The students and teachers will be invited to deliver short

speeches on different aspects of life so as to enlarge the horizon of thinking of our

students.

Moral C1

ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION

I) Purposes

Help students to : a) raise their environmental awareness; b) instill a sense of caring for the school environment; c) develop a strong sense of belonging to the school; and d) acquire knowledge and develop attitudes and skills that will enable them to

participate in protecting and improving the environment

II) Guidelines

a) Environmental Education is a whole-school concern. The entire school should develop environmentally friendly practices.

b) Environmental Education is implemented in a cross-curricular manner. Different subjects are mobilized to help students to look at environmental matters from different angles.

c) Environmental Education is also carried out through the informal curriculum which includes activities both inside and outside the school. These activities aim at encouraging participation and involvement on the part of the students.

d) The Moral and Civic Education Committee is responsible for coordinating related activities throughout the school.

e) Programmes are designed according to the “guidelines on environmental education in secondary school” issued by the Curriculum Development Committee of Education Department.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the Moral and Civic Education Committee after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) The Moral and Civic Education Committee will identify the themes of Environmental Education at the beginning of the school year and plan the programmes and budget.

b) Programmes are designed according to the major concerns of the school of that school year.

c) The teacher- in-charge will apply grant from the school or the voluntary environmental agencies e.g. Environmental Campaign Committee or Friends of the Earth.

d) The Committee will nominate some upper-form students as “Students Environmental Protection Ambassadors”.

Moral C2

e) Basically, all the events are designed, organized and implemented by the committee which is made up of relevant teachers and students helpers.

f) The following activities will be implemented regularly at school : 1) Classroom cleanliness campaign is to instill a sense of caring for the school

environment among students; 2) Waste paper, aluminum cans and plastic bottles collection scheme is to

encourage students to take positive action in environmental protection. g) Students are encouraged to participate in related activities organized by

Environmental Campaign Committee, Government Departments and other voluntary organisations.

h) To keep abreast of the environmental issues in Hong Kong, bulletins, booklets, leaflets and posters of the relevant materials will be released on the notice board constantly.

i) A brief report together with a budget breakdown and some photos (if any) of every single activity must be prepared for record purpose.

Moral E1

SEX EDUCATION COMMITTEE

I) Purposes

a) give students a clear understanding of the physiological and psychological aspects of

human development;

b) help students to acquire essential life skills including decision-making skills and

communicative skills;

c) inculcate a sense of responsibility for personal behaviour and an awareness of the

effects of such behaviour on others; and

d) develop positive values and attitudes towards life and sex.

II) Guidelines

a) The programmes of Sex Education are implemented through the formal curricula of

subject disciplines, regular lessons in class periods as well as informal extracurricular

activities such as exhibitions and small group activities organized by the sex

education committee.

b) Diversified teaching approaches and techniques should be employed in conveying the

messages to the students. Case studies, small group discussions, role-plays, games,

questionnaire surveys and talks should be given.

c) The Sex Education Committee is responsible for preparing teaching materials, giving

detailed instructions to and collecting feedback from form-teachers about the

programmes to be conducted during class periods.

d) Programmes are designed according to the ‘Guidelines on Sex Education in

Secondary School’ issued by the Curriculum Development Committee of the

Education Department.

e) Resource materials are available from many external organizations such as the Family

Planning Association, Caritas, etc.

f) As many students as possible should be motivated to take part in the exhibitions,

visits, training courses and small group activities so that the message of sex education

can be more widespread among the students.

Moral E2

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy may be amended by the Sex Education Committee after consideration

of the views and opinions expressed by teachers, parents and students.

IV) Procedures

a) Before the commencement of the school year :

1) A meeting between the Sex Education Committee coordinator and coordinators

from other working committees will be held by the end of August to decide the

year plan for all class periods in the following academic year.

2) A yearly programme plan will be formulated by the Sex Education Committee.

3) The committee coordinator will hold a meeting with the teachers and relevant

subject panel heads to discuss the teaching of sex education through formal

curricula.

b) After the commencement of the school year :

1) After receiving the approved yearly programme plan, a meeting for all committee

members will be called upon at the beginning of the school year to discuss the

allocation of duties.

2) For events such as talks, seminars or class periods that require the use of the

school hall, the member responsible should make the booking as soon as possible

via the general office.

c) Procedures for class level small group activities :

1) At the beginning of each school year, the committee coordinator should hold a

short meeting with the school social worker in order to identify the group of pupil

which are particularly in need for more intimate guidance.

2) Contact with the school social workers and helpers from external organizations

over the type of possible guidance activities and the date of conducting such

activities should be made as soon as possible.

Public Relations

Parent-Teacher Association

School Newsletter

Parents' Day

Public Relations

PUBLIC RELATIONS

A) General Policy A1 B) Parent-Teacher Association B1-10 C) School Newsletter C1 D) Parents' Day D1-2

PR A 1

PUBLIC RELATIONS General Policy The major concern of the committee is to promote the image of the school and to foster communication between the school and the community. Teachers should get prior approval from the school authority before they express their opinion on school affairs to the media.

PR B1

PARENT-TEACHER ASSOCIATION I) Purposes

a) strengthen the relationship between parents and teachers, between parents and

the school; b) set up a foundation for cooperation; c) promote and implement school policies; d) ensure family education complements school education; and e) enable students to grow up in an ideal environment for learning.

II) Guidelines

a) Membership

1) The current principal, teachers and parents of the school are ipsofacto members of the Association.

b) Membership fees

1) Parent members have to pay the membership fees every year. 2) Parents of more than one child in the school will not be required to pay double

or more. 3) Staff is exempted from paying the membership fees.

c) Planning of yearly activities

1) Activities organized should serve the purposes of the Association. 2) The Executive Committee is responsible for the planning of the yearly

activities. 3) Teachers should pay an active role both in participating and organizing the

activities of the Association.

d) Finance 1) Membership fees collected and grants from the Education Department and other

bodies should be used on activities and projects for the welfare of students and the Association.

e) Election of Executive Committee Members

1) Parent members of the Executive Committee (hereafter referred to as Executive Committee) are to be elected.

2) Teacher members of the Executive Committee are to be appointed by the school authority.

PR B2

f) Annual General Meeting

1) The AGM is to be held in October or November every year in accordance with the constitution of the Association. (Appendix 1)

2) Attendance of all teachers is obligatory. 3) As members of the PTA, all teachers have the obligation to elect the committee.

III) Basis of Discretion

All matters concerning the Association are governed by the constitution and the above policy is subject to alteration in accordance with the constitution of the Association.

IV) Procedures

a) Planning of yearly activities

1) The planning of the yearly activities should be discussed at the first meeting of the Executive Committee.

2) Budgeting and work allocation are also to be decided. 3) The teacher in charge of various activities should take the initiative in

organizing the activities with parent members of the Executive Committee.

b) Application of grants

1) Decide on items for subsidy while planning the yearly activities. 2) Call Executive Committee meeting if necessary on receiving the circular letter

concerning the application of grants from the Education Department (usually in July) and other bodies.

3) Complete and submit the relevant application forms.

c) Introducing the Association to new members

1) The boards displaying the information about the Association, the constitution of the Association should be prepared before the Form 1 Registration Days which are usually held in the middle of July.

2) On Registration Days, after finishing the registration work for Form 1 students, the executive committee should distribute to Form One parents the constitution of the Association,

3) There will be brief introduction of the Association on the spot.

PR B3

d) Activities

1) The committee members should start collecting resources or information of different activities that suit the purposes listed above at the end of a school year or during summer vacation.

2) Preliminary contacts with the bodies concerned could be made at this stage. 3) The activity based on the information collected in procedure d) 1) and 2) above

will be proposed in the first PTA meeting of next school year. 4) Once the year plan is finalized, the committee member in charge of the activity

should contact the body concerned as soon as possible to confirm the details of activity.

5) The followings will be carried out : i) Preparatory Meeting

A preparatory meeting will be called by the teacher- in-charge. Details of the activity and the allocation of duties will be discussed.

ii) Booking of School Premises (For activity to be held in school) l The teacher in charged or involved should book the school premises

once the year plan is finalized. l The booking could be made in the school office. l The settings of the venue at which the activity will be held should be

given in details to the office one week before the activity.

iii) Audio Visual Aids (For activity to be held in school) l If audio visual aids are needed in the school hall, booking should be

made. l Booking should be made at least 3 working days before the activity.

The settings of the audio visual aids should be given in details to the staff- in-charge at the same time.

l If the activity is held in classroom(s) or activity room, the audio visual aids could be booked in the office 2 working days before the activity.

iv) Parent’s Letter l The Secretary will be responsible for drafting and printing the

parent’s letter. l Parents’ letter should be ready for delivery at least two weeks before

the activity. l The reply slips will be collected with the help of form teachers. The

form teachers will also be responsible for collecting the fee if necessary.

l The reply slips collected will be given to the teacher in charge to count the number of participants.

v) Notifying the Staff of the activity l A staff meeting will be called when necessary to inform all the

teaching staff about the details of the activity. l The office should also be informed so that janitors will be arranged

to take up the duty on that day. 6) Evaluation will be made after the activity.

PR B4

e) Annual General Meeting (A.G.M.)

1) Preparation

i) The A.G.M. is to be held in October or November each year, of which the exact date shall be decided by the Executive Committee(“the Committee”).

ii) The Committee should be responsible for booking the school hall from the General Office, making seating arrangements and preparing printed materials before the Meeting.

iii) The Committee should distribute in advance tasks of preparing refreshments and other programmes for the Meeting.

iv) A letter about the AGM and the agenda is to be delivered to the parent members through the Form teacher fourteen days before the Meeting. After collecting the return slips from parents, the Form teacher should notify the Committee the number of acceptance to the Meeting and check whether the members have given any comments or raised any questions.

v) The Committee should reassure that all preparations for the Meeting, [refer to item (e)1)(ii)] have been properly done.

vi) As members of the PTA, all teachers are to attend the Meeting.

2) Proceedings of the Meeting i) The Meeting is to be chaired by the Chairperson of the Committee or an

authorised person of the Committee. And the procedures of the Meeting should be carried out by the MC.

ii) The Chairperson should present the report about the activities of the previous year and the plan for the new school year. Members can give comments and suggestions in this aspect, which are to be recorded, discussed or adopted only with the consent of the majority.

iii) The Hon. Treasurer should deliver the financial report of the previous year and present the budget for the new school year to the members for their comments and endorsement.

iv) The Chairperson should inquire all the members in the final session whether they have any further comments or questions.

v) After the Meeting is concluded, other programmes may follow.

f) Election of the Executive Committee 1) Preparation

i) The term of office for members of the Committee should be two years, starting from the date of the assumption of office to October or November two years thereafter. The teacher members are to be appointed by the school authority and the parent members are to be elected by all members. The Committee in office should start preparing for the next election of the parent members before retiring from office.

ii) The Preparatory Group should decide the date for the next election, and should invite parents to set up cabinets. After receiving return slips from parents, the Committee will contact parents who are interested in running the PTA. Parents who intend to join the election can set up their own cabinets, and individual candidates can set up cabinets for the

PR B5

election with the help of the Committee. iii) The Committee should decide the method for voting depending on the

number of the cabinets running for the election. If there are two or more cabinets for the election, the one that wins the largest number of votes shall be the new Committee. If there is only one cabinet for the election, it requires votes of confidence of not less than half of all the voters.

iv) The Preparatory Group should assist the cabinets for the election in making platforms, launching promotions and dealing with other matters.

v) A list of the members of the cabinets for the election as well as their platforms should be issued together with the notice of Meeting and the agenda at least two weeks before the Meeting.

vi) After receiving the return slips from parents, the Preparatory Group needs to prepare ballots according to the number of parents and teachers.

vii) As stated in Section (e) of A.G.M., the Preparatory Group should make sure that all preparations for the Meeting are well arranged before the Meeting.

viii) The Preparatory Group should consult the Principal for inviting the Guests of Honour. The Preparatory Group should send invitations to guests well in advance of the Meeting.

ix) The Hand-over Ceremony should be carried out immediately after the election. The Preparatory Group should therefore prepare provisional certificates of appointment in advance. Official certificates of appointment should be issued later.

2) Proceedings of the Election i) Information sheets introducing members of the cabinets and their

platforms should be distributed. ii) The proceedings of the Meeting should be carried out by the MC. The

procedure of election should be carried out immediately by the Preparatory Group after the Chairperson and the Hon. Treasurer have delivered their reports.

iii) The Preparatory Group should introduce the cabinets for the election. The members of the cabinets should present their platforms to the voters.

iv) Each voter is entitled to cast only one vote to ensure fairness. Votes should then be counted under supervision. Results of the voting should be announced at the Meeting.

v) The new Executive Committee is then formally established when the newly elected members of the cabinet and the appointed teacher members are presented with certificates of appointment.

g) Election of the PTA representatives at the Incorporated

Management Committee (IMC) 1) One Parent Manager and one Alternate Manager are to be elected. 2) The procedures for the election are to be done in accordance with the “Guide

for Parent Manager Election” of EMB.

PR B6

可立中學「家長教師會」會章

(甲) 法定名稱：嗇色園主辦可立中學家長教師會 (乙) 宗旨：加強家長、學校及教師間之聯繫與溝通，藉以達成下列目的：

(一)加深家長與學校及教師間之認識。

(二)建立共同合作之基礎。

(三)促進及推展學校政策。

(四)使家庭與學校教育相輔相成，以收雙軌教育之實效。

(五)令學生在理想之學習環境中成長。 (丙) 會員：分家長會員、教師會員及名譽會員三種

(一)家長會員：「凡於本校肆業學生之家長或監護人均可申請為本會會員，須繳交會費。」

﹙此項修正適於 2001-2002 年度或以後，在此年度前已加入家長教師會者毋須再交會費。﹚

(二)教師會員：在任教師均為本會教師會員，不須繳交會費。

(三)名譽會員：本會有權邀請關心本會會務或對本會有貢獻之人士為名譽會員，不須繳交會費。

附註：(一)若學生退學，則該家長或監護人之會員資格自動取消。

(二)若某會員之行為、品格嚴重影響本會之聲譽及運作，經執委會通過，可取消其會員資格。

(丁) 會費：(一)家長會員須每年繳交會費，會費由執委會決定。交費後由本會發回正

式之收據。

(二)退會者其已付之會費不獲退還。

(戊)會員大會：

(一)會員大會由全體家長會員及教師會員所組成，乃本會最高權力機構。其權力包括選舉、委任或罷免執行委員會、審核及通過財政報告、聽取及通過主席報告。會員大會休會時，由執行委員會代行處理會務。

(二)週年會員大會須於每年十月或十一月舉行，日期由執行委員會決定。

會議通知書及議程須於大會舉行前十四天發出。

Appendix 1

PR B7

(三)會員大會之法定人數為四十人或當年家長會員及教師會員總數之五分一，取其較少者為準。

(四)一切動議須得與會者過半數通過方可成為決議案。而所有於會員大會

通過之決議案，均以不違反本會宗旨為依歸。 (五)若週年會員大會召開時，出席者不能達到法定人數，則會議須延期舉

行。再次開會時，以當時出席者的數目定為法定人數。 (六)特別會員大會可由執行委員會召開，或由符合本節（三）所述之法定

人數會員聯署，以書面要求主席召開。主席接獲要求後，須於三星期內召開特別會員大會，而大會只討論及表決聯署書內之事項。與會法定人數須依據本節（三）所述進行，但會議通知書及議程須於會議前一星期發出。

(己) 執行委員會之組織及職責：

(一)本會會務由執行委員會負責推行，其組織如下：

(１)執行委員會由二十人組成，包括家長十三名及教師七名。

(2)在任校長為執行委員會之當然顧問，有權出席執行委員會之會議。

(3)教師委員由校方委任，而家長委員則在週年會員大會中由會員以不記名方式投票選出。

(4)家長執行委員會之各個職位應於週年大會後由當選委員互選出任。

(5) 如有執行委員於任職期間退出會籍，執行委員會必須盡快重組。 (二)執行委員會之職位如下：

(１)主席一人(由家長委員出任)

(２)副主席二人(由家長與教師委員各一人出任)

(３)司庫一人(由教師委員出任)

(４)稽核一人(由家長委員出任)

(５)文書二人(由家長與教師委員各一人出任)

(６)聯誼康樂四人(由家長與教師委員各二人出任)

(７)執行委員九人(由家長七人與教師委員各二人出任)

PR B8

(三）執行委員會之職責如下： (１)主席 a) 負責召開及主持會員大會及執行委員會會議。 b) 負責執行會員大會及執行委員會之決議案。 c) 負責執行會務及各文件簽署。 d) 代表家長教師會參與學校活動。 (２)副主席 協助主席推行會務。主席缺席時，由副主席（家長委員）代行其

職務。 (３)司庫 a) 負責本會各項收支帳目及簽署。 b) 於週年會員大會呈交經已稽核審查後之財政報告及要求大會

通過。 (４)稽核 負責審查司庫編寫之財政收支紀錄，並加簽署，以茲證明。 (５)文書 負責會議紀錄及一切來往書信。 (６)聯誼康樂 負責本會各項聯誼及康樂活動及其籌備工作。

(７)執行委員 負責協助本會推行一切活動。 (四）執行委員會每年最少須召開三次會議。 (五）執行委員會之會議須有過半數委員出席方為有效，而其中三位必須為

家長委員。 (六）各委員之任期為兩年，若再獲選可以連任。

PR B9

(庚) 財政與債務 (一)本會所收經費之主要用途如下： 甲、為全年一切經費經常性開支 乙、為達成本會宗旨的一切開支

(二)司庫負責徵集會費，須存入本會指定銀行支票戶口。支付款項時，支票須由主席或副主席(家長委員)聯同司庫簽署，方可生效。

(三)所有支出須得執行委員會核准方可進行。

(四)每單項支出若不超過港幣伍佰元，可於付款後由司庫提交執行委員會追認。

(五)本會財政支出不得超逾該年經費收入，亦不能有赤字結存。若有需要，須經特別會員大會商議，通過解決辦法。

(六)如遇債務或法律責任，執行委員會須向特別會員大會解釋，有關法律責任由本會承擔。

(七)如遇本會解散，所有資產應全數捐贈與嗇色園主辦可立中學，作改善教學資源或學生福利之用。

(辛)修改會章： 除本會會章 (庚) 部 (六) 及 (七) 兩項不能修改外，其餘都可在會

員大會提出修改。 (壬) 法團校董會家長校董及替代家長校董成員：

透過會體會員選舉產生 家長校董一名 替代校董一名 工作：代表本會出席本校法團校董會會議 選舉程序：按教育統籌局「家長校董選舉指引」辦理。

PR B10

嗇色園主辦

可立中學家長教會 家長會員申請表

申請人姓名：________________________________ 姓別：________________ 地址：______________________________________________________________ ___________________________________ 電話：___________________ 職業：_____________________________ 辦事處電話：__________________ 學生姓名：〔一〕________________________ 班別：______________ 〔二〕________________________ 班別：______________ 〔三〕________________________ 班別：______________ 申請人與學生關係：______________ 申請人簽暑：___________________ 填 表 日 期：___________________

Appendix 2

PR C 1

NEWSLETTER

I) Purposes

a) inform parents, old students, affiliated schools of S.S.Y. and the Yuen all the major school activities and functions inside and outside school;

b) promote a sense of belonging to the school; c) foster a better relationship and communication between the school and parents; d) enrich students with some simple knowledge of desktop publishing.

II) Guidelines

a) An Editorial Committee is to be formed with teachers as editors and students as assistant editors.

b) The Editorial Committee should be informed of the amount of funding set aside for this publication.

c) The Newsletter is to be published twice a year in November and April. d) Recruiting and training of assistant editors are to be carried out in early July. e) The articles should be computer-typed together with disks, if possible. f) At least 3 tenders from printers are necessary and the Principal is to make the

selection.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Students are to be recruited in early October. A short training is provided on desktop publishing software.

b) Teachers are requested to submit articles of the clubs, Houses, competitions etc. This is done through circulars to teachers or during staff meetings.

c) Articles are to be computer-typed, if possible. The printouts are to be accompanied by disks and photographs if any. A deadline should be set.

d) The collected articles are then to be selected and edited by the Editorial Committee. e) The selected articles are to be submitted to the Principal for his approval. f) The Assistant Editors are to help to arrange the layout of the articles by using the

computer. g) At least 3 tenders from printers are to be called for. The printers should be informed

the quantity and type of paper used. The Principal has the authority to select the printer.

h) The articles are ready for draft printing. i) The draft printouts should be proofread carefully by the Editorial Committee and

necessary amendments are to be made. The process should be repeated to ensure that there is no error, then they are ready for printing.

j) Newsletters are distributed to parents in December and June. k) A meeting on evaluation is to be held in late January.

PR D1

PARENTS’ DAY

I) Purposes

a) promote communication between parents and the school; b) allow parents to have a better understanding of the academic performance and the

behaviour of their children in school; c) provide information on how parents should help their children grow up healthily and

enjoy the school life; d) provide information to parents about the latest careers, training and educational

opportunities; and e) foster a strong co-operative relationship between parents and the school.

II) Guidelines

a) The Parents Day is held annually 3 weeks after the end of the First Examination. b) Parents of students of all forms (except F.7) are expected to be present and have an

interview with the Form Teacher to collect the report cards at the scheduled time. c) Form Teachers should make arrangement with the parents for an interview which are

convenient to them one week prior to the Parents Day using letters. d) During the interview, Form Teacher should discuss the academic performance, the

behaviour and the CCA of the students with their parents thoroughly and optimistically.

e) Teachers-in-charge of careers guidance should prepare information for: 1) F.3 students: events in current JSEA cycle and other future education

opportunities. 2) F.5 students: events related to HKCEE, F.6 admission criteria and procedure (if

known), F.6 curriculum and future education opportunities. f) Teacher- in-charge of student counselling should have a briefing with all teachers on

the skills in interviewing. g) School Social Worker arrange interview with parents as required. h) The teacher- in-charge of discipline, student counselling, academic affairs, CCA

should make arrangement with Form Teacher to assign interviews with parents of those students concerned.

i) Teacher- in-charge of computer service should ensure that the report cards are ready for distribution.

j) Students should accompany their parents to the interview in school uniform.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation with the Principal.

PR D2

IV) Procedures

a) Before the commencement of the school year:

1) The working committee should make suggestion of the date of Parents’ Day when the school calendar is going to be set.

2) The date is approved in the first staff meeting in late August.

b) One week before the Parents’ Day:

1) The computer service team prepares the general mark sheet and the report cards for the Form teachers' information including discipline report.

2) For those teachers who wish to have an interview with parents of students who are not in their class should inform the Form Teacher concerned so that an appointment can be made.

3) School circular to parents should be filled and distributed. 4) Any printed materials to be distributed should be ready. 5) Briefing to all teachers by student counselling, career and guidance committee

on special issues. 6) Briefing to School Prefects on their duties on Parents’ Day. 7) Setting of school premises by General Office. 8) Form Teachers should gather and familiarize information of each student of

his/her class.

c) On Parents Day

1) Form Teachers should collect report cards, student files and printed materials from General Office before the interview.

2) At the main entrance there would be a notice of location of classes. 3) On each floor, there would be a reception counter at the front staircase. School

Prefects are responsible to lead the parents to the seats outside the classroom. 4) Form Teachers should have an interview with parents of a student at any one

time. 5) After the interview , parents are required to sign in the students' record file. 6) Any parents request to see other teachers, they may do so provided the teacher

is available. 7) Interview period: 8:30--4:00; ( lunch break: 12:30--2:00). All staff are expected

to be present for the whole period.

General School Administration

Organisation Structure

General Guidelines for

All Teaching Staff

Roles and Duties of Staff

GENERAL SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION

A) Organisation structure A1-2

B) General Guidelines for All Teaching Staff B1-4

C) Roles and Duties of Staff C1-13 1) Principal

2) Vice-principal

3) Discipline Master/ Mistress

4) Guidance Master/ Mistress

5) Careers Master/ Mistress

6) Panel Head

7) Subject Teacher

8) Teacher Librarian

9) Laboratory Technicians

10) Clerical Staff

Sch.Adm. A 1

School Incorporated Management Committee (IMC)

Principal

School Administration & Development Committee (SADC) General Staff Meeting

Assistant Principal (1) Assistant Principal (2)

Teaching and IT

R

esources

Academ

ic Affairs

& C

urriculum

Developm

ent

Professional D

evelopment

Curr D

ev. & R

eform

Teaching T

imetable

SBC

/SEN

Tests/E

xam. R

eports Int./E

xt. Assessm

ent

Library

Panel Heads/L

ibrarian

AV

Material &

Equip.

IT/T

eaching Resource

School A

dministration

Alum

ni

PTA

Stud. W

elfare/Lockers

Scholarships &

Financial Assistance

Counseling

Discipline

Co-C

urricular A

ctivities

Services and Uniform

G

roups H

ouses Sports A

ssociation Interest C

lubs Students’ U

nion

Budgeting

Assets M

anagement

GO

/Staff Managem

ent

School Safety

Crisis M

anagement

Moral E

ducation H

ealth & Sex E

d. E

nvironmental E

d. N

ational Education

Voluntary Services

Staff Welfare

Teaching and Learning Affairs

Pastoral Care Moral and Civic Education

School Administration and Public Relation

Public/Com

munity

Relation

SAM

S Students

Registration &

record

Student Affairs

Form Teachers

Chairman of IMC

Management and Organization Structure of Ho Lap College (Sponsored by Sik Sik Yuen) (2006-2007)

All Teaching and Non-teaching Staff

Career G

uidance

Staff Appraisal

New

Teachers

Induction

NSS Preparation

Sch.Adm. A 2

法團校董會

校長

學校行政及發展委員會 全體教師校務會議

副校長 (1) 副校長 (2)

教學資源及

資訊科技教育

教學管理及

課程發展

教學專業發展

課程改革/

發展

教學時間分配

校本課程/S

EN

學業評估報告

校內/

校外學業評估

圖書館

科主任及圖書館主任

視聽教材/

設施

資訊科技教育設施

學校行政

校友會

家長教師會

學生福利/

儲物櫃

獎/

助學金

輔導

訓導

聯課活動.

服務及制服團隊

四社

體育聯會

興趣學會

學生會

財務預算

校產管理/

修建

校務處/

職工管理

學校安全

危機處理

品德教育

健康/

性教育

環保教育

國民教育

義工服務

教職員福利

教與學 學生事務 德育及公民教育 學校行政及宣傳

對外宣傳及

社區聯繫

SAM

S

及

學生註冊/

資料紀錄

學生事務

各級班主任

法團校董會主席

嗇色園主辦可立中學管理及組織架構 (2006-2007)

各科教師及 全體教職員工

升學就業輔導

新高中課程發展

教職員考職

新老師啟導

Sch.Adm. B1

GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR ALL TEACHING STAFF I) Professional Ethics/Conduct

a) Teachers should set good role models for their students with their integrity and noble character.

b) Teachers should actively pursue, professional training.

c) Teachers should be dedicated to and responsible for their jobs.

d) Teachers should work closely together. They should be forgiving, accommodating and nurture a positive team spirit.

e) Teachers should exercise their professionalism and fully support the school goals and policies.

f) Without the Principal's consent, teachers should not divulge to the public/made public school policies under discussion, staff meeting minutes and counselling and discipline cases.

g) Without the Principal's consent, no teachers should act as spokespersons of the school / speak for the school.

h) Teachers should express their views towards school policies through proper channels. Destructive criticisms should be avoided as they are detrimental to the congenial atmosphere of the school organisation.

i) Teachers should not ask a student of the opposite sex out on a date.

j) Teachers should not provide remunerative tuition services to students.

k) Teachers should always bear in mind the Anti-corruption Ordinance.

l) Without proper authorisation, teachers should not engage in fund-raising activities for Sik Sik Yuen.

m) Before making bulk purchase of books for students, teachers should inform their respective panel heads and retain all relevant receipts until the end of the school year.

n) Teachers should seek the Principal's approval before collecting money in the form of House and Student Union subscriptions and interest group fees etc from students.

o) Teacher should attend relevant meetings and complete all designated work.

p) Teachers should seek the School Supervisor's permission before taking up part-time work outside school. The school authority however encourages teachers to engage themselves in Curriculum Planning, Teacher Training Programmes organised by the post-secondary institutes and work with the Hong Kong Examinations and Assessment Authority.

q) Corporal punishment should never be given.

Sch.Adm. B2

II) General Duties

a) A teacher is expected to perform the duties of a form teacher, a subject teacher, and an advisor to a uniformed group, an academic club, an interest group of a House. He / She is also expected to work as an executive member of a committee or a member of an ad hoc working committee.

b) A teacher may be put in charge of a school function/activity during school holidays, if deemed necessary.

c) A teacher has to assist in the liaison among the students, the parents and the school.

d) A teacher should inform the Principal immediately on receiving suggestions and complaints from parents.

e) A teacher should notify the Discipline Master immediately if he detects a serious act of misconduct on the part of students.

f) A teacher should notify the Student Counsellor immediately if a student is found to be suffering from an emotional problem.

III) General Guidelines:

a) Attendance 1) All teachers are expected to be in school during school hours except

lunchtime.

School Hour: 8:05a.m. – 4:00 p.m. Lunchtime: 12:35p.m. –1:40 p.m.

If any teachers find it necessary to leave school, permission from the Principal is needed prior to departure.

2) All teachers are required to sign their names on the attendance register in the Staff Common Room by the latest at 8:05 a.m. on every school day and sign out when they leave school.

3) All teachers are required to attend the morning assembly in the playground to keep student discipline.

4) All teachers have to attend staff meetings as scheduled. Any excuse has to be reported to the Principal in advance.

5) All teachers have to undertake invigilation duties as required both inside and outside school.

6) Form Teachers or Subject Teachers have to accompany the students to the School Hall to attend the assembly as scheduled.

7) On every school day, there are 2 teachers on duty till 5:30 p.m. One of them is responsible for the detention class (3:45p.m. – 5:00p.m.). If there are students working in the computer room, then the teachers have to accompany them there till 6:30p.m. For details please refer to the relevant file in the General Office. If there are students using the computer room till 6:30p.m., these 2 teachers have to accompany them there.

Sch.Adm. B3

b) Sick leave, casual leave, official leave

1) Any teacher asking for sick leave must inform the Principal by 8:00 a.m.,

so that substitution can be arranged.

2) If a teacher is advised by his/her doctor to take a sick leave for 3 days or more, he/she has to inform the Principal as soon as possible, so that a supply teacher can be arranged to take over the lessons or substitution by other teachers would be arranged.

3) Any teacher attending seminars/workshops/courses/meetings should report to the Principal in due course and alteration of lessons by the teacher should be made as far as possible in order to minimise disruption to students' learning.

4) Any teacher asking for casual leave must seek prior approval from the Principal. Alteration of lessons by the teacher with other teachers is recommended.

5) The General Office should keep a record of all leave, alteration of lessons and substitution.

6) Any teacher planning to take an overseas trip during school holidays should inform the Principal / school authority

c) Conducting of lessons

1) To implement the medium of instruction as recommended by EMB, our teaching staff are required to use English as the sole medium of instruction in all subjects except Chinese Language, Chinese History, Moral and Civic Education and Putonghua. Communication in English is encouraged to develop students’ written and oral eloquence in English.

2) The time- table should be strictly followed. No lesson may be cancelled without the approval of the Principal.

3) Classroom teaching is to take precedence over the other duties during school hours.

4) Teachers should be punctual in attending and dismissing classes. 5) Teachers should bring all necessary teaching materials to the classroom. 6) Teachers should not leave the students in the classroom unattended. 7) Besides teaching, teachers should try their best to maintain the discipline

of the class in lessons. 8) Teachers attending substitution lessons should maintain the discipline of

the class. 9) No students are allowed to leave the classroom without informing the

teacher. At any one time, no more than 2 students are allowed to leave the classroom.

10) Teachers should check the number of students present in class against the number of present recorded on the blackboard. If any student is found to skip the lesson, they have to report to the General Office immediately, so that further action can be carried out.

Sch.Adm. B4

d) Printing/Offset/Photocopy of teaching materials

1) Materials to be printed have to be handed in to the General Office with a completed form (in duplicate). The printing normally takes 2 days to complete, but it may take longer time during the pre-examination period.

2) The printed materials are then sent to the teacher by janitor. 3) Teachers may have their teaching materials photocopied in the General

Office free of charge (materials for teacher’s use only ) and recording is required. Photocopies for students (for 20 or less copies) have to be recorded for payment.

4) Students are prohibited from using the printer in the computer room to print out any materials not relevant to their study or CCA in school. Before printing any materials, they have to seek for approval from the computer assistant by filling in forms. They have to pay for the printing.while teachers are welcome to use the printer to print the teaching materials free of charge.

e) Use of audio-visual aids

1) Teachers are encouraged to use different A-V aids in their teaching in order to facilitate teaching and learning.

2) For the list of available A-V aids, teachers are to refer to the file of the A-V Committee.

3) Advanced booking of the items concerned is needed. It should be done in Staff Common Room before the first lesson of a day.

4) Use of A-V equipment in the school hall should be booked at least 3 days in advance.

f) Internal circulars and circulars from external bodies 1) Circulars for all staff, subject panels, committees, Form Teachers and

subject teachers are circulated via our intranet. For some of the circulars, they are placed in the Staff Common Room. Teachers should read them carefully and sign after reading.

2) The designated circulars will be handed over to the teacher concerned with the teacher circular file. The teacher should go over the circular quickly and circulate it to other teachers concerned.

3) Circulars should be returned to General Office for filing. 4) Teachers may have a photocopy of the circular concerned as they wish. 5) Circulars from the EMB can be read through the web site:

www.emb.gov.hk. 6) Internal circulars may be sent to you via e-mail

(XX1.@intranet.holap.edu.hk) or Notice Board of our intranet.

Sch.Adm. C1

ROLE/DUTIES OF PRINCIPAL

To oversee the overall administration and management of the school.

Sch.Adm. C2

ROLE/DUTIES OF VICE-PRINCIPAL

The Vice-Principal should assist the Principal in various aspects in the management of the school. He/ She should keep abreast of new challenges and innovations by active exposures and suggest new plans or policies to the Principal to improve the effectiveness in running the school. He/ She should act on behalf of the Principal during his absence and represent the Principal at certain meetings and seminars. Under certain circumstances, he/she may act as liaison between the Principal and the staff; gather suggestions/ information/ opinions/ etc from teachers in an informal manner before a decision on a new plan/ policy may be made. He/ She should listen to staff members’ complaints about their problems in teaching, in dealing with students’ problems and provide help when necessary. He/ She should also attend to students’ complaints about the school management and/ or the teaching processes. According to the Code of Aid for Secondary Schools, the recommended duties of the two Vice-Principals are as follow:

I) Administrative work in

a) student admission; b) streaming of classes; c) allocation of periods and time-tabling; d) curriculum development, syllabuses, choice of textbooks, remedial teaching, etc; e) co-ordinating the work of subject panels; f) administration of internal and external examinations; g) planning school calendar and organizing school functions; h) organising professional training programmes for professional staff and

organizing induction programmes for new teachers; i) planning expenditure; j) control the allocation of funds and resources; k) co-ordination of teaching practice and arrangements with universities, Institute

of Education , etc; l) arranging duty roster of staff and cover for absent staff;

II) Supervision of

a) annual stocktaking exercises; b) general cleanliness and repairs of school premises and furniture; c) subordinate staff, writing or countersigning their staff appraisal report;

III) Other duties

a) developing contacts with parents; b) maintaining school contacts with outside educational bodies such as CDI, EMB,

teacher centre, etc; c) participating in committees, seminars and courses in order to contribute to or

update one’s professional views / standards; d) overseeing counselling, careers guidance, discipline and general welfare of

students; e) promoting extra-curricular activities in school; f) performing other duties as may be required.

Sch.Adm. C3

ROLE & DUTIES OF THE DISCIPLINE MASTER / MISTRESS

I) Administration a) Assist the princ ipal in making decision on the staffing of the school discipline

committee; b) Assist the principal in developing school discipline policy; c) Administer matters related to student discipline work in school; d) Form and lead the school discipline committee to plan, organize, conduct and

develop student discipline work with specific objectives for the school year; e) Coordinate all functions organized by the school discipline committee; f) Participate in other functional team meetings to ensure that the concerns of

school discipline will not be contravened by any other school matters; g) Liaise and coordinate with outside organizations and agencies concerned to

strengthen discipline in school; and h) Monitor the use of resources allocated to student discipline work

II) Operational duties

a) Implement and enforce school discipline policy and school rules; b) Work in collaboration with other functional teams and/or subject committees in

running preventive and developmental programmes pertaining to student discipline upon arriving at a consensus view on discipline work;

c) Assist other teachers in managing students with serious behavioural problems; d) Interview parents of students with behavioural problems so as to solicit their

cooperation in helping students to overcome their difficulties; e) Attend to individual cases and conduct case conferences with relevant functional

teams and teachers; f) Wherever necessary, refer students, to the guidance team, the school social

worker or outside bodies for follow-up work; g) Receive and lead investigation of complaints from students, parents, teachers

and the public; and h) Review school discipline policy, school rules and the work for the discipline

committee and make changes according to the needs of the students, the school and the community.

III) Support to Other Teachers a) Develop resource materials and programmes relating to student discipline for

teachers’ reference and use; b) Assist in running staff development programme to strengthen teachers’ ability in

managing student’s misbehaviour; c) Advise on programmes regarding parent education; d) Act as advisor on student discipline matters; and e) Attend professional meetings and seminars to keep abreast of recent

development in the subject.

Sch.Adm. C4

ROLE & DUTIES OF GUIDANCE MASTER / MISTRESS AND THEIR TEAMS

I) Administration

a) Produce a guidance year plan with clearly stated specific objectives for the current school year as well as the ultimate goal of facilitating students’ personal development;

b) Co-ordinate with the school social worker (SSW), other functional teams within the school or organizations outside the school in launching guidance programmes for students, parents, teachers and also in handling student cases;

c) Establish guidelines for all teachers regarding the assignment and referral of student cases within the school in consultation with related professionals;

d) Keep systematic records of individual casework as well as group/mass guidance programmes for the monitoring and future planning of guidance work;

e) Complete and return such forms as the statistical Forms B and F, the proforma on the use of the Programme Fund etc. to the Education Department as required;

f) Conduct and attend case conferences, team meetings or joint-team meetings to have sharing of experience and discussion on the delivery of school guidance work; and

g) Conduct periodic evaluation as well as annual review on the guidance services delivered to ensure that students’ and teachers’ current needs are catered for.

II) Guidance & Counselling

a) Promote and develop the Whole School Approach to Guidance in collaboration with all the school personnel:

1. promote staff awareness of the meaning and importance of guidance through staff meetings/experience-sharing sessions/staff development sessions; circulation among teachers of the guidance year plan/teachers’ handbook on guidance/useful or meaningful guidance reference materials etc.;

2. identify teachers’ major concerns as well as students' needs so that developmental programmes can be planned accordingly;

3. co-ordinate and collaborate with the other functional units/the school social worker (SSW)/educational psychologists/other subject teachers whenever possible, in launching the developmental and positive programmes; and

4. make formal/informal evaluation and review of the programmes in relation to the objectives/central themes set.

b) Provide individual or group counselling for students with less severe problems in learning, conduct, emotion or family etc;

c) Make referral of student cases to the SSW or make outward referral if required; and

Sch.Adm. C5

d) Organize, plan and conduct programmes for students and the ir parents. This include orientation programmes for students and their parents, mass programmes on self-understanding and self-esteem etc..

III) Support to Other Teachers

a) Assist in the induction programme for new teachers as well as staff development programmes for all teachers; and

b) Collect and develop guidance resource materials for all teachers’ reference and use.

Sch.Adm. C6

ROLE & DUTIES OF CAREERS MASTER / MISTRESS AND THEIR TEAMS

I) Administration

a) Collect, update and disseminate information on further education, job opportunities, job descriptions and requirements for changing jobs;

b) Organize student volunteers for careers programmes and upkeep a careers corner/library as well as careers notice board(s);

c) Conduct surveys on careers of graduates, the needs and problems of students in connection with careers and further education and initiate careers programmes according to the survey findings;

d) Assist in preparing student records/transcripts, streaming students into arts/science/commercial classes and writing letters of recommendation; and

e) Liaise with the Careers and Guidance Services Section of the Education Department, the Hong Kong Association of Careers Masters and Guidance Masters, the Careers Advisory Service of the Labour Department, Vocational Training Council, community organizations, commerce and individual organizations.

II) Careers Guidance a) Assist students to understand their interests, abilities, needs and priorities in

relation to further education, vocational training opportunities and job opportunities;

b) Inculcate in students at an early stage a correct attitude towards work;

c) Provide individual and group guidance on study opportunities and job opportunities;

d) Alert student of the possible traps and assist them when they apply for further studies and jobs; and

e) Promote the awareness of safety at work especially for S5 and S7 school leavers as well as for young students taking up temporary summer jobs.

III) Visits and Talks

c) Give careers talks and invite guest speakers to give talks on study opportunities and job opportunities; and

d) Organize visits to industrial/commercial/academic organizations and organize camps on careers and further education.

Sch.Adm. C7

ROLE / DUTIES OF A PANEL HEAD I) Curriculum Management and Development

a) Formulate the curriculum policy for the subject in line with the general curriculum policy of the school;

b) Liaise with other subject panels concerning curriculum development; c) Co-ordinate the teaching of the subject at different levels and identify its

relationship with other subjects; d) Liaise with outside bodies such as EMB, HKEAA, tertiary institutes, etc on the

development of the subject; and e) Formulate the policy related to remedial teaching (English, Chinese;

Mathematics) and using English as the medium of instruction, if applicable. II) Teaching / Learning Management

a) Decide and link up different areas of work like syllabus design, scheme of work and teaching progress in order to facilitate teaching among panel members;

b) Maintain subject syllabuses for different levels; c) Ensure the availability and proper use of teaching materials and audio-visual

equipment; d) Determine the most appropriate teaching methods and discuss with panel

members; e) Devise an effective method of diagnosing students learning ability and learning

difficulties, i.e. homework , projects, tests and examination policy; f) Provide guidance for students on effective learning of the subject; g) Promote teaching and learning of the subject through the implementation of

subject-related activities and CCA; h) Liaise with faculties of education or HKIEd on matters related to teaching

practice; i) Work closely with the school librarian in the order and purchase of new books,

magazines and other resources; j) Moderate / Supervise examination papers; and k) Supervise and assist newly appointed teachers and student teachers.

Sch.Adm. C8

III) Teacher Professional Development

a) Provide information on in-service training and services for teachers and make appropriate recommendation;

b) Encourage subject teachers to participate in relevant seminars, workshops and training courses inside and outside school;

c) Appraise teachers' performance - to observe lessons, to supervise and inspect students' assignment, to write appraisal reports and to make recommendation on the promotion of teachers; and

d) Encourage peer observation and exchange of ideas among subject teachers in order to improve teaching and learning effectiveness.

IV) Administrative Work

a) Conduct and chair panel meeting; b) Delegate duties and ensure a fair distribution of workload among subject

teachers; c) Advise the Principal on school policy related to staff development and training

in the Subject; d) Advise the Principal on school policy related to budgeting and use of resources; e) Assist in the planning of the timetable for the subject, and the effective use of

special rooms, if applicable; f) Assist in the planning of teaching practice; g) Handle filing work of the subject, deal with incoming correspondence and

circulars; and h) Evaluate and formulate the annual programme plan.

Sch.Adm. C9

ROLE / DUTIES OF A SUBJECT TEACHER

1) Cooperate with other teachers of the subject panel in the discussion of teaching

strategy and preparation of teaching materials so as to develop collaborative team work.

2) Be well-equipped for each lesson – develop the lesson plan, proper use of teaching

aids, plan of student activities and student assignment. 3) Stimulate students’ learning atmosphere in lessons. 4) Give appropriate assignment to students and give feedback to them after careful

marking so as to ensure effective learning. 5) Design the scheme of work, monitor the teaching progress and clearly list out the

criteria of students’ assessment. 6) Evaluate the students’ academic performance regularly and to report to the panel head

appropriately. 7) Set and mark test and examination papers. 8) Assist the panel head in the purchase of books, teaching resources and equipment. 9) Attend panel meetings as required.

10) Attend relevant seminars, workshops or courses organized by outside educational

bodies. 11) Serve as a marker of external examination, if applicable. 12) Undertake any duties as assigned in panel meeting . 13) Undertake any duties as assigned by the principal.

Sch.Adm. C10

ROLE AND DUTIES OF TEACHER-LIBRARIAN 1) Co-ordinate subject panel heads for the purchase of library books & other relevant

resources. 2) Help teachers to search and keep relevant learning resources especially those on the

web and newspaper. 3) Evaluate periodicals and library books ordered and purchased. 4) Keep an inventory of books in the library. 5) Prepare textbooks / desk copies for teachers. 6) Keep up-to-date information on publishing market. 7) Plan for library development. 8) Organise library activities : - library lessons

- book display & exhibitions - visits - reading schemes

- quizzes / games / competitions in order to enhance reading among students.

9) Provide supervision to students using the library. 10) Keep records of loans / overdue / loss of books.

11) Provide training course for student librarians. 12) Supervise student librarians on-duty. 13) Undertake any other duties as required by the Principal.

Sch.Adm. C11

ROLE & DUTIES OF LABORATORY TECHNICIANS 1) Prepare, construct, operate and ma intain laboratory apparatus and equipment. 2) Assist teachers in class demonstrations in a laboratory or in a demonstration room. 3) Assist teachers to supervise the students in performing experiments. 4) Conduct routine laboratory tests. 5) Keep stores and inventory in laboratories. 6) Be responsible for all the normal safeguards in laboratories. 7) Carry out annual stocktaking of all materials and equipment in laboratories. 8) Purchase laboratory apparatus, equipment and other items necessary for laboratories. 9) Prepare annual estimates of consumables, stores and additional items for laboratories.

10) Assist teachers in planning and trying out experiments. 11) Instruct and supervise laboratory attendants in the maintenance of the laboratories and

the preparation rooms. 12) New laboratory staff should be asked to agree to training as a condition of

appointment. This would involve attending TEC course if they have no technical qualifications or need a refresher course after a long lay-off.

13) Undertake any other duties as required by the Principal.

*For Lab. Tech. I, there is another additional duty : Supervise and coordinate the work of lab. Tech. II/III.

Sch.Adm. C12

ROLE AND DUTIES OF CLERICAL STAFF

Title No. Secretary/Clerical officer I (COI) 1 Clerical officer II (COII) 1 Clerical assistant (CA) 3

Duty Responsible Staff

General 1. Assist teachers in their work. ALL 2. Assist in the preparation of correspondence with the Education

Department and other outside bodies having connection with the school.

ALL

3. Type school documents. ALL 4. Keep filing of school documents. ALL 5. Attend to telephone calls. ALL 6. Make telephone contact with parents, staff and other people in

need. ALL

7. Help in handling accidents in school. ALL 8. Help preparing for various school functions, such as Parents’

Day, Sports Day etc. ALL

9. Handle accounts of the school COI 10. Collect school fees and other fees. COI 11. Supervise janitor staff. COI 12. Report any damage at school and make arrangements for repairs. COI 13. Arrange reception for visitors. COI 14. Prepare school circulars to staff COII 15. Prepare letters or notice to parents. COII 16. Order and keep stocks of stationery, exercise books, furniture

and equipment. COI , COII

17. Arrange booking of hall, classrooms and special rooms. COII 18. Assist in the loan arrangement of equipment and teaching aids

(including ETV tapes, tapes, cassette tape recorder, TV sets, projectors etc.)

COII , CA

19. Manage the use of headphones for English and Chinese Language listening practice and test in school.

COII , CA

20. Assist in the test and examination (both internal and external examinations) arrangement.

COII , CA

21. Help preparing for Speech Day. COII , CA 22. Assist the School Administration and Management System

(SAMS) team in the maintenance of the SAMS records. CA

23. Arrange printing of school documents and teaching materials. CA 24. Manage the medical room. CA 25. Undertake any other appropriate duties as required by the

Principal. ALL

Sch.Adm. C13

Staff affairs 26. Help in the appointment and resignation of staff. COI 27. Update information of staff. COI 28. Help in arranging teacher substitution. COI , CA Student affairs 29. Manage and update students’ information in the computer and

the record cards. CA

30. Help in admission of new students. ALL 31. Help in re-allocating students before new school year starts. COII , CA 32. Help in managing students’ affairs, such as student cards, fee

remission etc. COII , CA

33. Record students’ attendance, merit and offence. CA 34. Help in managing detention class. CA 35. Prepare certificates, testimonials/transcripts. COII , CA 36. Prepare report cards. CA

Student Affairs

Student Financial Assistance

Student Health Scheme

Purchase

Fire Safety

Safety in Special Rooms

Use of Medical Room

Accident and First Aid

Student Insurance

Student Lockers

School Newspaper

STUDENT AFFAIRS

A) Student Financial Assistance A1-9

B) Student Health Scheme B1-2

C) Purchase C1-5

D) Fire Safety D1-5

E) Safety in Special Rooms E1-19

F) Use of Medical Room F1-2

G) Accident and First Aid G1-9

H) Student Insurance H1-3

I) Student Lockers I1-2

J) School Newspaper J1-3

St.Aff. A1

STUDENT FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE I) Purposes

a) help students apply for appropriate financial assistance so that all can pursue their

studies without difficulties; and

b) ensure that financial assistance is given to the students in need in the most efficient

and cost effective manner.

II) Guidelines

a) Eligibility :

Senior Sec. Fee Remission

(FR)

School Textbook Assistance

(TA)

Student Travel Subsidy

(STS)

Families in receipt of Comprehensive Social Security Assistance (CSSA) will not be

awarded any financial assistance.

l F.4 to F.7 l F.1 to F.7 l aged 12 or above

l F.1 to F.7

l residing beyond 10

minutes' walking

distance from school

and has to travel to

school by public

transport

Government Matriculation

Maintenance Grants

(GMMG)

Sing Tao Foundation

Students’ Loan Fund

Sik Sik Yuen Bursary

Grant

l F.6 & F.7

l awarded full fee

remission in the last

academic year

l F.4 to F.7

l students facing sudden

adverse family

circumstances during

their course of studies

• F.1 to F.7

St.Aff. A2

MTR Student Travel Card

l aged 12 or above

l F.1 to F.7

b) For Sing Tao Foundation Students’ Loan Fund, there is no deadline for nomination

and the school principal could forward nominations to the Committee throughout the

year.

c) All application forms for FR/TA/STS/GMMG must be supported with documentary

proof of income from applicants and their spouse.

d) For FR/TA/STS,

1) the duplicate copy of application summary, all undelivered Form B, class

lists of student-applicants, the list of discretionary awards and computer

reports on remission/payment results must be kept in school for 3 years.

They will be subject to inspection by staff of Student Financial Assistance

Agency (SFAA) or the Audit Commission.

2) the original application summary, and eligibility certificates in labelled class

folders must be forwarded to SFAA before mid-September.

e) For GMMG, all application forms should be endorsed and together with the reply

slip duly completed should be returned to the Government Matriculation

Maintenance Grants Selection Committee before early October.

f) For Sik Sik Yuen Bursary Grant, the summary and the detail of the applicants’

information should be sent to the Central School Management Committee by

mid-October.

g) For MTR Student Travel Scheme, the completed application forms should be

endorsed and returned to students who will be responsible for submitting the forms

to any MTR Station in early September.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be altered by the respective Agency which offer the

grants/loans to the students.

St.Aff. A3

IV) Procedures

a) FR/TA/STS

1) May- June

i) Collection of application forms A and explanatory notes from the SFAA.

ii) In case of any changes in school account name/no., Clerk I in General

Office should inform SFAA in writing

iii) Distribution of application forms A to students in need.

iv) Students returned the completed form A or form B to the Student

Financial Assistance Agency by post.

2) Late August

i) Preparation of the guidelines to Form Teachers

3) First Staff Meeting

Briefing of the scheme to all teachers.

4) First Week of the School Year

• Collection of eligibility certificates from the students who have

applied for FR/ STS/ TA in May.

• Ensure that all entries and/or amendments, if any, are clear and

complete.

• Filing the class lists of student-applicants.

• Recommendation on students for discretionary awards, if any. (Note :

In case of exceptional financial hardship, the Principal may at his

discretion award grants in principle to deserving applicants.

* For FR/TA/STS, quotas will be listed in the SFAA-explanatory

notes which will be sent to the school in August.)

ii) Fill in the application summary, prepare a list of discretionary awards

and copies of applications with discretionary awards by the

teacher- in-charge.

7) mid-September

Sending of necessary documents to the SFAA.

8) December to January

i) Inform students of payment of TA/STS.

ii) checking of computer reports and return the amended list to SFAA for

further processing.

* All samples of the forms, guidelines, application summary, etc, can be

found in the SFAA-explanatory notes.

St.Aff. A4

b) Sing Tao Foundation Students’ Loan Fund

1) Application forms will be sent to the school by SFAA in early

September.

2) Inform students on the application procedures.

3) Return completed application forms to SFAA.

c) GMMG

1) August

i) Application forms will be sent to the school by the Student Financial

Assistance Agency.

ii) Distribution of application forms to the F.6 & F.7 Form Teachers.

2) Late September

i) Collection of supporting documents by Form Teachers.

• income proofs

• other relevant documents, e.g. self-explanatory letters, medical

certificates, if applicable.

ii) Endorsement of all application forms by completing Part VII.

3) Early October

Sending of all applications to the GMMG Selection Committee. d) Sik Sik Yuen Bursary Grant

1) Late September

i) An announcement is to be made during the morning assembly to invite

applications. Students who need financial assistance may apply for the

grants.

ii) Each applicant should submit an application letter and a photocopy of

his/her last report card. If the applicant has applied for the government’s

FR/TA/STS, a photocopy of the application form is to be made. Otherwise,

the applicant is to be issued such an application form and is required to

complete it.

iii) Marks are calculated for each applicant based on the family monthly

income and number of family members.

iv) The amount of bursary grant is recommended based on the marks

calculated.

St.Aff. A5

2) Mid-October

i) The recommendation of the amount of grant issued to each successful

applicant should be approved by the Principal. ii) A covering letter, marks calculation scheme, summary of applicants’

information, detail of applicants’ information (photocopy of last report card, application letter and FR/TA/STS form) are sent to the Central School Management Committee for approval.(Appendices 1-3)

3) December

The results of the applications will be sent to the General Office. Successful

applicants will be notified.

e) MTR Student Card

1) Mid-July

Collection of application forms from the MTR Corporation.

2) Early September

i) Distribution and collection of the application forms to and from the

students.

ii) Verification of each completed application form by impressing a school

stamp.

iii) Complete the “Summary of Application for MTR Student Travel Card”

form with the quantity of returning application forms by class clearly

specified.

iv) Return the completed application forms, bundled by class, together with

the “Summary of Application for MTR Student Travel Card” form in

quadruplicate to lost property / Student Travel Office at Admiralty Station.

3) Late September

Distribute the MTR Student Travel Cards to the students.

St.Aff. A6

Sample covering letter 嗇色園學務部關秘書大鑒： 有關本年度可立中學嗇色園助學金事宜 本年度（一九九八至九九年度）共有十二位同學申請嗇色園助學金。經

仔細審核後，本人推薦其中六位申請同學領取助學金，總額為二萬三千五

百元。現附上有關文件供董事會參考：

（一）計分準則； （二）可立中學嗇色園助學金申請書摘要； （三）可立中學嗇色園助學金申請書六份。 專此奉達，祈為照准！

可立中學校長

謹啟 一九九八年十月十四日

Appendix 1

St.Aff. A7

Sample Summary of applications’ information 一九九八至一九九九年度嗇色園助學金 可立中學學生申請書摘要

班別 姓名 分數 推薦金額 港幣

備 註

1 6A 20 5000元 家境：收入微薄 學業：成績一般

2 6A 21 5000元 家境：收入微薄 學業：成績一般

3 6A 19 2500元 家境：收入微薄 學業：成績一般

4 6B 20 5000元 家境：收入微薄 學業：成績一般

5 5E 24 3000元 家境：收入微薄 學業：成績一般

6 1D 25 3000元 家境：靠儲蓄過活 學業：成績良好

負責老師：___________________

日 期：___________________

校長簽署：___________________

日 期：___________________

Appendix 2

St.Aff. A8

Sample Marks Calculation Scheme 一九九八至九九學年

嗇色園助學金

計分準則

１． (I) 從各來源所得的每月平均收入

每月平均收入指：

申請人在本學年開課前 12個月的薪金及津貼總額，加上其他收入，除以 12。

每月平均收入（＄） 分數

0 - 4,800 20

4,801 - 6,500 16

6,501 - 8,300 12

8,301 - 10,000 8

10,001 - 11,700 5

11,701 - 13,400 4

13,401 - 14,700 3

14,701 - 16,000 2

16,001 - 17,400 1

17,401 - 18,800 0

18,800 - 20,400 -1

20,401 - 22,200 -2

22,201 - 23,200 -3

23,200 以上 沒有資格獲得任何資助

Appendix 3

St.Aff. A9

(II) 家屬

家屬 每名家屬得分

申請人的配偶 1

受供養的父母 1

受供養的子女 未滿 18歲 18歲以上

接受全日制高中教育(中四至中七) 3 2

接受至學士學位程度的全日制教育

[包括學前及小學至初中(小一至中三)

教育、職業訓練局、工業學院及專上

院校的課程等]

2 2

就讀晚間 / 非全日制 / 特殊訓練課

程或沒有上學 1 0

２． 資助額

得分 助學金金額

F.1 - 5 F.6 - 7 20分或以 $3,000 $5,000

5分至 19分 $1,500 $2,500

St.Aff. B1

STUDENT HEALTH SCHEME

I) Purposes

a) promote and maintain the physical and mental health of students; and

b) enable students to gain the maximum benefit from the education system and

develop their full potential.

II) Guidelines

a) It is a free service offered by the Department of Health to all primary and

secondary day school students.

b) It provides a comprehensive range of promotive and preventive service at

the Student Health Service Centres according to the health needs of students

at various stages of their development.

c) The service includes physical examination, health assessment, individual

counselling, health education and provision of a self-held Child Health

Record.

d) Curative service will not be offered.

e) Each enrolled student will be given an annual appointment to visit one of

the health service centres, which is usually located close to the school.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy may be amended by the school administration only after

consultation with the Principal.

St.Aff. B2

IV) Procedures

a) At the beginning of the school year, each student will be given an

Enrolment Form and a letter to parents/guardians prepared by the

Department of Health informing them of the following:

1) the purpose of the Service,

2) the name of the centre where the students of the school are designated,

3) the address of the centre, and

4) the time frame assigned for students of the school.

b) Students will be informed of the exact date and time of appointments at a

later stage.

c) Students found to have problems will be referred to the Special Assessment

Centre or appropriate specialists for further management.

St.Aff. C1

PURCHASE

I) Purposes

a) bargain with the supplier about the prices and quality;

b) ensure there is an adequate supply of the different items for students throughout the

year; and

c) arrange the purchase in an appropriate time and in an orderly manner.

II) Guidelines

a) Price lists should be issued to the students.

b) School uniform and P.E. uniform will be purchased twice a year (once in autumn

and the other in spring).

c) 1) A full check up of stock of exercise books is held annually before the summer

holiday.

2) The amount of exercise books required for the coming academic year should be

estimated and ordered at suitable time, preferably before the summer holiday.

3) Sales prices may not exceed the costs by more than 10%.

4) Exercise books, stationeries, ties and badges should be ready on sale from the

general office throughout the year.

5) Records of sale are drawn up monthly.

d) Subscription of Newspaper should be carried out periodically according to the

schedules of the suppliers.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation

with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) School Uniform & P.E. uniform 1) Bulk order

i) Teacher-in-charge should contact the uniform supplier at appropriate time

St.Aff. C2

(e.g. Oct. for winter uniform and Mar. for summer uniform) to obtain a

price list of different items.

ii) Give the price list to each class.

iii) Assign a date for the supplier to take measurements and accept orders in the

school.

iv) Inform the office to make arrangements about the position of setting up a

counter for the supplier.

v) Inform the F.1 students, class by class, to make orders at the counter during

the lessons.

vi) Inform the F.1 teachers whose lessons will be disturbed.

vii) Inform F.2 to F.7 students to make orders at the counter during recess and

lunch hour on the same day.

viii) Assign a date for the supplier to distribute the uniform in school and then

repeat steps iv) to vii).

2) Purchase at other time Students can purchase any item of the school uniform at the shop of the uniform

supplier at any time of the year. b) Exercise Books, Stationery, Ties & Badges

1) Bulk Order i) On the first school day, Form Teachers will assist in distributing the order

form (Appendix 1) and the schedule to each class.

ii) Students will be advised to purchase a package of exercise books at the

beginning of the academic year.

iii) On the second school day, money will be collected in the morning and

submitted to the General Office with the class order form (Appendix 2).

iv) Exercise books will be distributed as scheduled with the help of school

prefects.

2) Daily Class Purchase

i) It should be made through the class monitor who should fill in an order

form (Appendix) obtainable from the General Office.

ii) Class monitors should return their order forms and pay the amount

collected to the general office

St.Aff. C3

可立中學

至 年度集體購簿須知

各班長注意：

為使同學們於開學時能及早購買校簿使用，請班長依下列方法為同學集體購買校

簿。

一、購買時必須以一套為單位，每套校簿數量及售價如下：

簿類名稱

單價

每

中一至中三

套

中四及中五

數

中六及中七

(文)

量

中六及中七

(理)

短單行簿

長單行簿

實驗簿

學生手冊

家課日誌

閱讀紀錄冊

每套售價

二、每位同學最多可購買一套。

三、班長必須於 月 日（星期 ）小息前計算妥當購買之數量，填妥『集體購

簿表格』一式兩份），連同收齊之款項交校務處點收。

四、校簿將於 月 日派發，班長需留意當日早上宣佈的領簿程序。

五、如有任何疑問，可向三樓黃穎君老師查詢。

註一：同學如需購買校章，可於 月 日（星期 ）或以後，由班長到校務處購買。

註二：校務處將於 月 日（星期 ）開始售賣校簿。同學如需購簿、作文紙或單行紙等，

可經由班長到校務處購買。

Appendix 1

St.Aff. C4

可立中學 - 集體購簿表格（ / 年度）

數 量 單 價 金 額

中一至中三 套

中四及中五 套

中六及中七（文） 套

中六及中七（理） 套

班別： 日期：

班長/負責人姓名： 簽署：

請統計各類校簿數目及填寫下表：

短單行簿：共 本 實驗簿： 共 本

長單行簿：共 本 學生手冊 ： 共 本

家課日誌：共 本 閱讀紀錄冊：共 本

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

收 據

(領取校簿時，請把此收據交給負責老師)

數 量 單 價 金 額

中一至中三 套

中四及中五 套

中六及中七（文） 套

中六及中七（理） 套

班別： 日期：

班長/負責人姓名： 簽署：

請統計各類校簿數目及填寫下表：

短單行簿：共 本 實驗簿： 共 本

長單行簿：共 本 學生手冊： 共 本

家課日誌：共 本 閱讀紀錄冊：共 本

Appendix 2

St.Aff. C5

【可立中學：購貨登記表】(01.09.200 )

班別： 日期：

貨 品 名 稱 售 價

數 量 金 額 備 註

元 角 元 角

短 單 行 簿 0 80

長 單 行 簿 1 50

實 驗 簿 3 00

作 文 紙 (100) 9 00

單 行 紙 (100) 6 50

幾 何 紙 (100) 8 50

恤 衫 校 章 3 00

校 褸 校 章 3 00

校 呔 16 50

學 生 手 冊 6 00

家 課 日 誌 6 00

閱 讀 記 錄 冊 5 00

合共金額：

班長 / 教師簽署：

Appendix 3

St.Aff. D1

FIRE SAFETY

I) Purposes

a) ensure that all students, teachers and staff know what to do and their means of escape in the school premises in case of a fire; and

b) ensure that there are sufficient fire prevention measures and fire fighting equipment in the school premises.

II) Guidelines

a) According to the Administrative Guide under the Code of Aid for Secondary Schools, the school is equipped with fire extinguishers kept in easily accessible places and janitors should be trained in the use of the extinguishers. Laboratories are in addition supplied with buckets of sand.

b) The Fire Safety Committee of the school is responsible for fire drills and fire prevention measures.

c) The school has the responsibility to ensure that all the fire exits are clear. d) Teachers-in-charge of special rooms should ensure that there are sufficient fire

prevention measures. e) Fire extinguishers are maintained and recharged annually by a qualified fire service

agency. (Appendix 1) f) The school will conduct fire drills regularly throughout the school year.

III) Basis of Discretion

The policy will be amended by the fire safety committee after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Fire evacuation procedures

1) The Fire Safety Committee is responsible for preparing the fire evacuation routes of the school.

2) Memo for Fire Drill Procedures should be briefed to all staff during the first staff meeting.(Appendix 2)

3) At the beginning of each academic year (preferably during the class period), Form teachers should give students a briefing on what to do and their means of escape in the school premises in case of a fire. (Appendix 3) The floor plan of the fire evacuation routes should be posted up on the notice board of each class.

St.Aff. D2

4) Teachers-in-charge of special rooms should ensure that the floor plans of the fire evacuation routes are posted up at appropriate places.

b) Fire drill procedures

1) Fire drills will be conducted three times in each academic year. 2) All staff will be notified about one week in advance of the fire drill. 3) During a fire drill, fire alarm will be sounded at 12:25 p.m. or 3:20 p.m. 4) When the alarm is sounded, the teacher of each class should instruct his/her

class in an orderly manner to assemble in Playground A according to the assigned evacuation route. He/she should be the last person to leave the room.

5) Before leaving the room, the monitor/monitress should make sure that all electrical appliances are turned off. He/she should close (but not lock) all the doors when leaving.

6) Form teachers will join their own class in the playground, take the roll-call and then report to the General Office of the number of students present as soon as possible.

7) The Laboratory Technician I should ensure that gas is turned off at the mains. 8) The P.E. teachers should ensure that no student stays in the changing rooms. 9) Teachers of the Discipline Committee should check that all the rooms

(including the toilets) are evacuated and the electrical appliances of the classrooms are turned off.

10) Non-form teachers, janitors and all other staff should wait in Playground B for instructions from the teacher- in-charge of the fire drill.

11) The teacher- in-charge of the fire safety committee will time the whole evacuation process for assessment and modification when necessary.

12) After the fire drill, the teacher of the fire safety committee should make announcement to instruct students to go back to the classrooms and fill in the information of the fire drill in the logbook kept in the General Office.

St.Aff. D3

AVAILABLE FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT IN SCHOOL

Equipment Location Quantity

Fire extinguisher Medical room 1 (Carbon Dioxide) Staff Common Room 1 Switch room 3 Car park 1 Hall 4 G/F Pump room 1 R/F Lift M/C room 1 R/F Booster Pump room 1 D&T room 2 H. Eco. room 2 Multi-media Room 1 Computer room 2 2 Art room 1 Library 1 One in each laboratory 5 Science lab. prep. room 1 Total28

Fire Hose Reel Two on each floor 10 G/F 1 Total11

Sand bucket Each laboratory 5 Total5

Fire blanket Each laboratory 5 H. Eco. room 1 Total6

Remarks: 1) Try to tackle a fire by using available fire fighting equipment only if it is safe to do so.

2) Do not use water on fires of electrical origins. 3) If the fire alarm sounds due to accidental breakage of the glass of the alarm,

it can be switched off by the main control switch in the water pump room at the roof of the school building.

Appendix 1

St.Aff. D4

Fire Drill Procedures - Memo for Staff

1) When the fire alarm is sounded, teacher of each class should instruct his/her class in an orderly manner to assemble in the playground according to the assigned evacuation route. He/she should be the last person to leave the room.

2) Before leaving the room, the monitor/monitress should make sure that all electrical appliances are turned off. He/she should close (but not lock) all the doors when leaving.

3) Form teachers will join their own class in Playground A, take the roll-call and then report to the General Office of the number of students present as soon as possible.

4) The Laboratory Technician I should ensure that gas is turned off at the mains.

5) The P.E. teachers should ensure that no student stays in the changing rooms.

6) Teachers of the Discipline Committee should check that all the rooms (including the toilets) are evacuated and the electrical appliances of the classrooms are turned off.

7) Non-form teachers and janitors should wait in Playground B for instructions from the teacher- in-charge of the fire drill.

8) The teacher- in-charge of the fire safety committee will time the whole evacua tion process for assessment and modification when necessary.

9) After the fire drill, the teacher- in-charge of the fire safety committee should make announcement to instruct students to go back to the classrooms and fill in the information of the fire drill in the logbook kept in the General Office.

Appendix 2

St.Aff. D5

Fire Evacuation Procedures – Memo for Students

1. Remain calm and follow the instructions of the Fire Officer of the school;

2. Turn off all electrical appliances. Close all doors when leaving but do not lock;

3. Walk, do not run;

4. Take care of others’ need, do not panic;

5. Use staircase but never use lifts (as the electricity supply may be cut off at any time thus trapping persons in the lift). Close the smoke lobby/stop doors and DO NOT WEDGE OPEN THE SMOKE LOBBY/STOP DOORS;

6. Avoid passing the fire ground;

7. Do not carry any bulky or heavy belongings;

8. Use a piece of wet cloth to cover the mouth and nose if there is smoke;

9. Unless circumstances indicate otherwise, you should leave the school building and assemble in the playground for roll call;

10. Do not re-enter the school premises unless and until advised by the Fire Services personnel or the Fire Officer that it is safe to do so.

Appendix 3

St.Aff. E1

SAFETY IN SPECIAL ROOMS

I) Purposes

a) ensure maximum safety for all personnel who are using the facilities in

the school; and

b) alert students to the potential hazards in the school.

II) Guidelines

a) Special rooms are managed by the Panel Head of the respective subjects.

b) Teachers, lab. technicians and attendants in the special rooms should familiarize

themselves with the potential hazards of the activities and the teaching environment.

c) Teachers should prevent students from engaging in activities beyond their

capabilities, and ensure the equipment in the rooms are properly used.

d) Teachers should ensure good class discipline, the safety and security of the room.

e) Check constantly the fire- fighting equipment, if any.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation

with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) Art Room

First Aid Cabinet

1) Art Room should contain a first aid cabinet.

2) The contents of which must be checked and replaced from time to time.

3) Teachers should have sufficient knowledge of first aid to deal with any accident

likely to arise in the Art room.

St.Aff. E2

4) The first aid cabinet should contain the following minimum requirements:

scissors safety pins

bandages of varying sizes dressing surgipad

triangular bandages adhesive plaster

absorbent sterilized cotton wool sterilized dressings

Sharp Tools

1) Tools should be kept in good working condition; blunt, rusty or chipped blades

or tools that are not functioning properly can be dangerous.

2) Special attention is required when using paper cutters and wood-block cutters.

3) Hazards occur when undue pressure causes the blade to swerve. Wood-block

cutters should be handled with the cutting action away from the body and the

free hand not in the way of the cutter.

4) The paper guillotine should be locked when not in use.

Fumes and Dust

1) Proper and adequate ventilation must be ensured for the following:

i) Fumes from resin during hardening process.

ii) Gas produced by burning PVC. (First of all PVC should not be burnt)

iii) Gas produced by burning polystyrene. (Again polystyrene should not be

burnt)

iv) Gas from acid reacting on metal.

v) Fumes from evaporation of rubber cements, some adhesives, lacquer

thinner and other solvents.

vi) Vapour particles from spray painting and glazing.

vii) Fine particles produced when polystyrene is being cut with sharp tools.

viii) Dust generated in polishing resins is harmful to the eyes and lungs.

2) Dust and fine particles created during cutting and polishing of materials should

be removed with wet cloth as soon as possible.

Poisonous Materials

1) Pupils should be made aware of materials which contain poisonous substances,

for example:

i) All paints, dyes, printing inks, enamels and glazes which contain lead,

cadmium, barium lithium and mercury.

St.Aff. E3

ii) Gamboge and pigments that contain copper such as certain kinds of mineral

blue and green used in traditional Chinese painting.

iii) Ammonium bichromate (dichromate) used in screen-printing.

2) All containers of chemical have to be clearly labelled, and dangerous materials

should be labelled as such.

3) Instructions on original labels have to be observed.

4) Use barrier cream and disposable plastic gloves when working with chemicals

such as polyester resins.

5) Spillages of acids, resins and other chemicals have to be removed immediately

by proper means and the floor/table tops affected should be washed off

immediately with plenty of water.

Fire Prevention and Safety

1) Fire fighting equipment provided must be properly maintained and placed

prominently in the Art and Design Room.

2) The subject teacher should learn and know how to use the fire fighting

equipment.

3) Naked light is not permitted under any circumstances.

4) Inflammable solvents must be kept in the minimum quantity as permitted by

law.

5) Inflammable solvents should be kept in suitable containers with self-closing lids,

clearly labelled.

Electrical Equipment

1) Maintenance work to any electrical equipment in the Art and Design Room

should only be carried out by qualified technicians. Teachers should not try to

alter or repair any electrical equipment by her/himself.

2) Special attention must be paid to the wiring, proper earthling and the correct use

of all electrical equipment used in Art and Design Room and storage rooms.

3) Special attention should be paid to the danger of overloading power points in

Art and Design Room and storage rooms.

4) Use three pronged, grounded extension cords and disconnect any electrical

equipment from the power source immediately after use.

St.Aff. E4

5) Every precaution to avoid burns should be taken with hot plates, which have no

warning indication that they are on, and can be still very hot even when

disconnected.

6) Avoid exposure of the eyes and skin to ultra-violet lamp, such as Mercury

Vapour Lamp in screen-printing.

b) Computer Room

1) When students attend a lesson in the Computer Room, they should line up

outside the room until the teacher comes.

2) When students come to the Computer Room on school holidays, they should

possess their Student ID card for identification purpose.

3) The Computer Office is an unauthorized area to students. They are not allowed

to enter the Computer Office without permission.

4) Nobody should bring food, drinks or any other liquids into the Computer

Room.

5) Drinking, eating, playing are not allowed in the Computer Room.

6) For security purpose, all users (both staff and students) should write down their

name (and also the class for students), date, login time and logout time on the

log book next to the computer that they have used.

7) The computers in the Computer Room are for educational and administrative

purposes only. Without authorization, students are not allowed to play games

with the computers.

8) Students should not load any private software or files to the hard disk of the

computers. They are not allowed to copy any software from the computers too.

9) Students are not allowed to move the computers or any other equipment unless

under the supervision of a teacher or the Computer Room Attendant. In case of

technical difficulties of hardware, they should report to the teacher concerned or

the Computer Room Attendant immediately. Under no circumstances are they

allowed to open the case of the computers.

10) The Computer Room Attendant should carry out a virus scanning every

morning to ensure the computers are free of virus infection. Once viruses are

found, he/she should report to the teacher- in-charge of the Computer Room to

take prompt action.

11) A diskette is given to the students if they take a computer course. Students

should save their works in this diskette. They are not allowed to take the

diskette away from the Computer Room.

St.Aff. E5

12) The Computer Room Attendant should lock the gate before he/she leaves the

Computer Room at the end of each day.

13) The fuse box of the Computer Room should be tested every three months.

c) Design and Technology Room

1) Minor injury

Students should report to the teacher immediately after the event. The teacher

should clean the wound with suitable agent and protect it from infection by

covering the wound with sterilized pad.

2) Serious injury

The teacher should help the injured student to cover the wound with a sterilized

cotton ball to stop bleeding, raise the wounded part above the height of his heart,

and assign another student or other staff to escort him to the Medical Room.

The teacher should inform the General Office immediately for further action.

3) Burns

The teacher should bring the injured student to the sink immediately and keep

cold tap water flowing gently onto the burn. Do not take off the skin of the

wound. Take the student to the Medical Room if necessary and inform the

General Office for further action.

4) Recording

Teacher should keep a record on the name of the student, the date of the event,

the nature of the injury and the state after the treatment.

5) Preventive measures

i) Safety is to be addressed before every practical activity. Teacher shall go

over the safety rules and regulation in the Design and Technology Room

with students through the year. (See Appendix 8)

ii) Teacher should supervise students to work in the workshop. Never allow

students to work alone.

iii) Teacher should maintain the discipline within the workshop. Stop running

and playing immediately.

d) Home Economics Room

1) General safety i) Safety rules and regulations should be discussed with the students at the

beginning of the academic year. (Appendix 1 )

ii) Teachers concerned should discuss with students the procedures during

St.Aff. E6

cooking / needlework lessons.

iii) Teachers should read the Safety Booklet for the teaching of Home

Economics in secondary schools

iv) Teachers should familiarise themselves with the general rules and

regulations concerning the use of Home Economics Room facilities.

v) Teachers should be fully proficient in the use of appliances and chemicals

prior to all home Economics lessons.

vi) The size of each class should not be more than 20.

vii) If the room is used for teaching other subjects, the teacher responsible

should ensure that the students are not left unattended and that no items of

equipment or materials are disturbed or removed

viii)Teachers concerned must make sure that all practical work must not be left

unattended.

ix) Teachers should ensure that no students should be allowed to play or run in

the Home Economics Room.

2) Fire safety

i) The Home Economics Room should remain unlocked during lessons to

keep clear exits in case of fire.

ii) Teachers should make sure that all exits in the Home Economics Room

should not be locked.

iii) All students should know the escape route in case of emergency.

iv) Fire–extinguishers should be inspected at least once every year.

v) An approved type of fire–blanket and two buckets of sand should be

provided.

vi) Teachers responsible should get familiar with the location and usage of all

fire equipment.

vii) Fire drills should be conducted regularly.

3) Safety in using Gas Appliances

i) Teachers concerned should follow the Article 49 of Gas Safety Ordinance

1990. ( refer to Booklet on the Gas Safety Ordinance / Regulations )

ii) Teachers should draw special attention to the need for the provision of

flame failure devices in gas appliances.

iii) The gas cookers, the tubing should be checked and serviced regularly.

iv) Teachers concerned should take care to avoid a build up of grease around

the cookers.

v) When gas appliances are to be used, all air–conditioners should be switched

St.Aff. E7

off and exhaust fans switched on.

vi) The windows of the home economics room should be left open when gas

appliances are to be used.

vii) Teachers concerned should make sure that the gas supply should only be

turned on when gas supply is required.

viii)Teachers should inspect all the gas valves before use.

4) Safety in using electrical Appliances

i) Teachers should follow the Electricity Wiring Regulation ( 1 June, 92 ) of

the electricity Ordinance.

ii) Teachers responsible should make sure that all the electrical installations are

inspected at least once every 5 years.

5) The use of first–aid box

i) A first–aid box should be provided in the Home Economics Room.

ii) Teachers concerned should make sure that all the contents inside are

renewed / updated regularly.

iii) Teachers should familiarise themselves with the use of the items in the box

for handling first–aid cases.

e) Geography Room

1) The Geography Panel Head is responsible for ensuring that the safety rules and

regulations of Geography Room are reviewed in the first panel meeting.

(Appendix 2)

2) The rules regarding the proper use and the safety of the Geography Room

should be discussed, agreed and observed by all members of the department

throughout the year.

3) Safety rules should be displayed on the notice board in Geography Room.

4) Safety rules should be briefed to the students once at the beginning of the

school year.

5) Teachers should constantly supervise students’ activities in the Geography

Room.

6) An evacuation drill is conducted in each term.

St.Aff. E8

f) Music Room

1) The Music Panel Head is responsible for ensuring that the safety rules and

regulations of Music Room are reviewed in the first panel meeting.

(Appendices 3 &4)

2) Safety rules and regulations should be displayed on the noticed board in Music

Room. 3) Safety rules and regulations should be briefed to the students once at the

beginning of the school year. 4) Students should be taught the proper ways to use the equipment and instruments

of the room. 5) The safety rules and regulations should be discussed and reviewed by all the

members of the department throughout that year. 6) All the students’ activities should be under the teachers’ supervision.

7) An evacuation drill should be carried out in each school term.

g) Laboratory safety

1) General safety i) At the beginning of the academic year, lab. regulations (Appendix 5)

should be distributed to and be discussed in detail with the students.

(F.1 & F.2 : I.S. lessons; F.3 to F.7 : Chem. lessons.)

ii) Any additional regulations that should be observed for Biology and Physics

classes are to be discussed by the teachers concerned.

iii) Teachers should emphasize specific aspects of lab. safety in detail

whenever opportunities come up during normal science lessons.

iv) Teachers should read and follow the advices given in the “Safety in

Science Laboratories (2002)” published by the Education Department

HKSAR (The book is placed ineach of the laboratory).

v) A set of 5 posters about lab. safety and lab. rules distributed by Education

Dept. should be displayed prominently in all the labs.

vi) When Bunsen burners and chemicals are to be used, all air conditioners

should be switched off and exhaust fans switched on. The lab. windows

should be left open.

St.Aff. E9

2) Fire safety

i) Teachers should familiarize themselves with the location and usage of the

fire fighting equipment, such as fire extinguisher, fire blanket and sand

bucket, in the labs.

ii) Make sure that each student knows the emergency escape route of the

laboratory.

iii) At least two fire drills are conducted each year.

(recommended to be in Sept. in the first term and Feb./Mar. in the second

term)

l To conduct the fire drill, teachers should :

1. Record the date and time of the fire drill at least one working day

before the intended drill.

<Record book is placed in the preparation rooms of the labs.>

2. Carry out the fire drill.

(Students should line up in the covered playground for roll call.)

3. Record the information into the fire drill record book (Appendix

6).

3) Control of chemical wastes

i) Teachers should follow closely the Chemical Waste Control Ordinance

(refer to “Safety in Science Laboratories (2002)”.

ii) The three main types of chemical wastes from schools which fall under the

control of the regulations are strong acids & alkalis; spent organic solvents;

and surplus or expired chemicals.

iii) Details of the nature of each chemical can be found on the Material Safety

Data Sheet (MSDS) which is placed in the preparation room of the

Chemistry Lab.

iv) Teachers should fill in the log sheet (Appendix 7). The lab. technician is

responsible for doing the compatibility test, if necessary, and store the

chemicals in appropriate containers in the chemical waste cabinet in the

Chemistry Lab.

St.Aff. E10

h) Playground and covered playground

1) At the beginning of the school term :

i) The Discipline Committee should instruct students not to

• play football in the playground without teacher's consent.

• play any ball games except table-tennis in the covered playground A.

• climb up the basketball stands.

• move any P.E. equipment or furniture without teacher's consent.

• play in the playground on rainy days or whenever the playground is

wet and slippery.

ii) Students should be told to behave well and keep the playground clean.

iii) In case of any accident or injury, students must inform the staff at the

General Office at once.

2) Throughout the year, the Discipline Committee should remind students to

observe the above instructions.

St.Aff. E11

Safety Rules and Regulations of using the Home Economics Room : 1) Students may not enter the Home Economics Room unless the Home Economics teacher

is present.

2) No students may be allowed to use the Home Economics Room after lessons unless

permission has been obtained from the Principal or the teacher in charge.

3) Do not disturb / remove any of the small / large equipment / materials in the Home

Economics Room.

4) The Home Economics Room should remain unlocked during lessons to keep clear exit

in case of fire.

5) No students may be allowed to play or run in the Home Economics Room.’

6) When gas appliances are to be used, all air–conditioners should be switched off and

exhaust fans switched on.

7) The windows of the Home Economics Room should be left open when gas appliances

are to be used.

8) No students may be allowed to use the equipment outside the Home Economics Room.

9) Students should know the escape route in case of emergency.

10) Students should know all the exits in the Room which must not be locked.

11) In case of accidents happened, students should informed the teacher as soon as possible.

12) Students should be familairised with the location of the gas valves.

13) Cleanliness and tidiness in the Home Economics Room :

i) tie up the hair and clean the hands before cooking.

ii) always keep the sinks, stoves, all working table tops / areas clean, tidy and dry.

iii) refuse bins should be kept clean and tidy.

iv) wrap the rubbish first before putting into the refuse bins.

v) wash and empty bins regularly.

vi) wipe spilled water or oil on the floor at once.

vii) water taps and gas taps must be turned off after use.

14) Preparation of food :

i) always keep food clean when preparing and cooking.

ii) always keep food clean when storing and packaging it.

iii) always check the expiry date of the food.

iv) do not handle cooked food with fingers.

v) store fresh food in cold or cool dry places.

vi) thoroughly clean hands before handling food.

vii) cover noses and mouths when coughing or sneezing.

15) Students should obey and follow the regulations in the Room and instructions by the

teacher to maintain safety.

Appendix 1

St.Aff. E12

Safety Rules and Regulation of Using Geography Room

1. All the teaching materials / equipment must not be used or taken out without the

supervision of geography teachers.

2. The cupboards in the Geography Room are for storing teaching materials / equipment.

Students are not allowed to use the above cupboards for storing personal belongings.

3. Students should maintain the tidiness and cleanliness of the Geography Room.

4. Eating, drinking and smoking are strictly forbidden in the Geography Room.

5. Students should turn off the lights, electric fans, ventilation fans, air-conditioners, and

clean the blackboard before they leave the Geography Room. The monitor or monitress

should be the last to leave and check that the above works are done properly.

6. Students should be responsible for the damage or destruction of their own chairs and

tables.

7. Students must not remove the tables from Geography Room without the permission of

the teacher- in-charge.

8. Students must not change their seats without the permission of geography teachers.

9. Students are not allowed to enter the Geography Resource Room without the permission

of geography teachers.

Appendix 2

St.Aff. E13

Safety Rules and Regulations of Using Music Room

For Teachers 1. All equipment such as the Hi Fi System, piano, etc. should be locked after used.

2. No unauthorized or unsupervised person is allowed to use or interfere with the

instruments and teaching materials of the Music Department.

3. The storeroom and the cupboards in the Music Room are for storing teaching

materials and equipment. They should be locked when not in use.

4. A regular maintenance scheme for the equipment and instruments are essential.

5. Teacher should indicate the escape route from the Music Room to the students.

The route should be displayed on the notice board in the room.

6. Main switches should be turned off before leaving the room.

For students 1. Students should not enter the Music Room without the permission of teachers.

2. Students should not remove anything from the Music Room without permission.

3. Students in case need to borrow any instruments from the Music Department,

they should complete the From (Appendix 4). No CDs is allowed to borrow.

4. Eating and drinking are strictly forbidden in the Music Room.

5. Students should maintain the tidiness and cleanliness of the Music Room.

Appendix 3

St.Aff. E14

借用樂器紀錄表 l 所有借用樂器為可立中學或可立中學絃樂團資產，同學們要借用樂器，須先得負責

老師批准。

l 同學們須簽署“借用樂器聲明”。

l 借用樂器期最長為一年。

l 同學們須好好保存樂器，勿胡亂擺放，如有損壞，定當照價陪償。

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 借用樂器聲明

本人_______________(_____) 現借用 __________，年期為________，編號為

____________ ，本人定當好好保存該樂器，如有損壞，定當陪償，特此聲明 簽署：

日期：

借用樂器紀錄表

l 所有借用樂器為可立中學或可立中學絃樂團資產，同學們要借用樂器，須先得負責

老師批准。

l 同學們須簽署“借用樂器聲明”。

l 借用樂器期最長為一年。

l 同學們須好好保存樂器，勿胡亂擺放，如有損壞，定當照價陪償。

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 借用樂器聲明

本人_______________(_____) 現借用 __________，年期為________，編號為

____________ ，本人定當好好保存該樂器，如有損壞，定當陪償，特此聲明 簽署：

日期：

借用樂器紀錄表 l 所有借用樂器為可立中學或可立中學絃樂團資產，同學們要借用樂器，須先得負責

老師批准。

l 同學們須簽署“借用樂器聲明”。

l 借用樂器期最長為一年。

l 同學們須好好保存樂器，勿胡亂擺放，如有損壞，定當照價陪償。

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 借用樂器聲明

本人_______________(_____) 現借用 __________，年期為________，編號為

____________ ，本人定當好好保存該樂器，如有損壞，定當陪償，特此聲明 簽署：

日期：

Appendix 4

St.Aff. E15

Laboratory Regulations for Students

In addition to the School Rules for students, the following regulations are to be observed by

all students when they study science subjects in the school laboratories.

1. Students may enter the laboratory ONLY when instructed by the science teacher.

2. The preparation and storerooms adjacent to each laboratory is out of bounds to all

students at all times.

3. When performing experiments in a practical science lesson, the following safety

precautions should be observed.

(a) Instructions issued by the teacher must be strictly observed. No deviation from

these will be allowed.

(b) Eating and drinking are strictly forbidden in the laboratory.

(c) Do not taste any substance unless instructed to do so by the teacher.

(d) Do not inhale any gases evolved in the chemical reactions unless instructed to do so

by the teacher.

(e) Hands should be thoroughly washed after experiments, especially those involving

the use of chemicals, living organisms, and radioactive substances.

(f) No chemical apparatus or any laboratory item may be handled outside the laboratory

or removed from the laboratory without the permission of the teacher.

(g) Safety goggles and protective gloves should be worn whenever instructed by

teachers-

(h) Long hair must be securely tied.

(i) Experiment under way must not be left unattended.

4. Cleanliness and tidiness are to be maintained in a laboratory.

(a) The dustbin placed at the front of the laboratory should be used for the disposal of

all solid waste matter, NOT the sand bucket,

(b) Solutions are to be poured into the sinks provided. If such solutions are very

corrosive, the sinks should be thoroughly rinsed with tap water.

(c) The tabletops should be maintained dry and clean at all times. Rags or towels will

be provided for this purpose.

(d) Water taps and gas taps must be turned off after use.

Appendix 5

St.Aff. E16

5. While performing experiments, students may talk softly within his/her group. Such

talking should be related to the experiments. No unauthorized movement of students

from table to table in the laboratory will be tolerated.

6. All accidents or breakage of laboratory items must be reported immediately to the

teacher. Students who have broken an apparatus or equipment as a result of careless

handling may have to buy a new one of the same specification for replacement.

7. No student may be allowed to use a laboratory after lesson-hours unless permission has

been obtained from the principal or teacher- in-charge of laboratory.

8. All students are expected to obey the regulations and any additional rulings that may be

issued from time to time.

____________________

(CHU PUI LING)

Teacher- in-charge

St.Aff. E17

Fire Drill Record Form

Date Period Teacher Class No. of student present

No. of student in the playground

Time spent

Appendix 6

St.Aff. E18

Chemical Waste Log Sheet

Date Reagents Reactions Waste Name Vol.(cm3)

Appendix 7

St.Aff. E19

Rules and Regulations in the Design and Technology Room

1. Enter the Design and Technology Room only with the teacher's permission.

2. Never work alone in the Design and Technology Room.

3. Do not use any tool or machine without the teacher's permission.

4. Use suitable tools or machines for your work.

5. When carrying sharp tools, point the sharp edges downwards.

6. A machine must always be operated by one student at a time.

7. Switch off the machine before adjusting or cleaning.

8. Do not run or play in the workshop.

9. When carrying long objects or tools, take great care of the surroundings.

10. In case of machinery accident, press the emergency button and tell the teacher at once.

11. Replace all tools and materials after working.

12. Always clean the bench, machine and floor after working so that there is no oil or rubbish left behind.

13. Safety guard should always be set in the proper position when a machine is operated.

14. Seek for teacher's permission before borrowing any tool, machine or material from the Design and

Technology

Room.

15. Observe all school rules as specified for students.

Appendix 8

St.Aff. F1

USE OF MEDICAL ROOM

I) Purposes

a) provide a suitable place for students to have a rest when they are feeling sick; and b) enable them to continue their lessons after recovery.

II) Guidelines

a) Only sick students are allowed to use the medical room for a rest for not more than 2 periods.

b) The sick student should be accompanied by a responsible student of the same gender to the General Office for registration.

c) For serious condition, the office clerk should inform their parents and ambulance may be sent for.

d) Medicine taken orally (not prescribed by the doctor) should not be given while externally applied medicine may be used after consulting the teacher- in-charge of first aid.

e) The door of the medical room should be kept open when in use. f) Frequent visit s should be paid by janitors/clerks in General Office for observation.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures

a) A student who feels unwell during the lesson must inform the teacher attending the lesson.

b) A responsible student of the same gender accompanies the sick student to the General Office for registration: fill in Part A of the form (Appendix 1).

c) The sick student takes a rest in Medical Room. d) A janitor takes the form ‘Use of Medical Room’ for teacher’s signature in the

classroom. e) The sick student after recovery should report to G.O. and fill in Part C and obtain

Part D for entering the classroom again. f) If first aid treatment : cleaning and bandaging is needed, then a first aid team

teacher is called for. g) If the illness is of a serious nature, then inform his/her parent(s) or call for an

ambulance.

St.Aff. F2

Use of Medical Room

Part A : To be completed by student/monitor Name of student : ____________________________ Date : ___________________ Class : ( ) Time of entering the Medical Room : _____________________ Period : ______________________ Symptom : __________________________________________________ Signature of Teacher : ______________________

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Part B : To be completed by office (for student leaving school during school hour) Guardian's Name : _________________________ Contact Tel. No. : ________________ Time of leaving school : _________________________ Signature of Guardian : _______________________

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Part C : To be completed by student after recovery Time of leaving Medical Room : ___________________________ Period : ______________________ Signature of Teacher : ______________________

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Part D : To be completed by office (for student entering the classroom again) To teacher concern, Time of using medical room : From ____________________ to ____________________ Name of student : _______________________ Class : _______________________

________________________ (Signature)

Appendix 1

St.Aff. G1

ACCIDENT AND FIRST AID

I) Purposes

Give advice on how to deal with potential accidents in an effective way.

II) Guidelines

a) Ensure that first aid boxes are fitted in the medical room, all science labs. and

workshops for practical and technical subjects and the playgrounds.

b) At least two teachers in the school should be trained in administering first aid so as

to render valuable assistance in the event of emergencies and accidents.

III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation

with the Principal and staff concerned.

IV) Procedures a) Minor accidents

1) Students should inform the teacher at once in case of accidents that have

occurred in the lesson.

Accidents include chemicals on skin; eye accidents; chemical spillage; heat

burns; discomfort arising from inhalation of gases; cuts; substances catching

fire; bites by animals; etc.

2) Teachers should make appropriate action, e.g. chemical burns: wash with plenty

of water at once.

3) Teachers should fill in the minor accident record form (Appendix 1), which can

be formed in the preparation room of the laboratories or in the General Office.

b) Serious accidents in which the student has to be taken to the hospital

1) Inform the Principal.

2) Inform the General Office to call for the ambulance.

3) Assign a teacher/janitor to accompany the student.

4) Report to the Principal.

St.Aff. G2

5) * Fill in a report of the accident available in the General Office. (Appendix 2)

* If the accident happens in the labs., fill in the accident record form (Appendix

3) available in the preparation rooms. Keep a copy in the lab. and send one

copy to the office.

c) First aid

1) All serving registered or permitted teachers are eligible to apply for the first aid

training courses organized by the Education Dept. in collaboration with Hong

Kong Red Cross and Hong Kong St. John's Ambulance.

2) The first aid box should be installed in a prominent and easily accessible

position.

(Appendix 4 is a list of items recommended in the first aid box in school)

3) During outings, such as field trips and picnics, teachers should bring along a

first aid kit for emergency use.

4) Teacher- in-charge or lab. technicians of the special rooms should check the first

aid boxes regularly to ensure all necessities in the box are kept in sufficient

quantity and maintained in good condition at all times.

St.Aff. G3

Minor Accident Record Form

# Nature of accidents : 1. chemicals on skin; 2 eye accidents (e.g. chemicals on eyes);

3. chemicals spillage; 4. heat burns or scalds;

5. discomfort arising from in halation of gases; 6. cuts;

7. substances catching fire; 8. bites by animals;

9. others (please specify in the remarks column)

* Cause : e.g. carelessness of the students, potential hazard of the experiment, etc.

** Remarks : e.g. extent of injury, treatment given, etc.

Date #Nature of

accident

Subject involved *Cause No. of people

injured

**Remarks

Pupil Staff

Appendix 1

St.Aff. G4

體育課/活動意外事件報告表

1. 意外發生之日期 _______________ 時間 _______________ 地點 _______________

2. 受傷學生：

(i) 姓名 _____________________ 性別 ___________ 年齡 _________ 班級 ________

(ii) 姓名 _____________________ 性別 ___________ 年齡 _________ 班級 ________

3. 從事之活動

___________________________________________________________________________

4. 意外發生時，負責人之位置及工作

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

5. 意外事件發生之情況

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

6. 受傷情況

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

7. 處理方法 (包括進行急救)

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

Appendix 2

St.Aff. G5

8. 曾向下列機構求助 (請用��號表示)

通知時間及通知者 抵達時間

救護車 □ _________________________ ___________

警 署 □ _________________________ ___________

其 他 (請註明機構名稱) _________________________ ___________ _________________________

上述有關人員抵達後所採取之行動

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

9. 曾否通知學生家長或監護人？ 通知時間 抵達時間

曾 □ 否 □ ________________________ ___________

姓名： _________________________ 關係：_______________________

該家長/監護人曾採取之行動

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

10. 備註 _________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

11. 報告人： (i) 姓名 _______________ 職位 _____________ 簽署 ______________

(ii) 姓名 _______________ 職位 _____________ 簽署 ______________

報告日期：_____________________

St.Aff. G6

Serious Accident Record Form

1. Name of School : _____________________________________________________

2. Address : _________________________________________________________

3. Principal : _________________________________________________________

4. Occurrence of accident :

Date : ________________________ Time : ____________________________

Place : ________________________ Class : ____________________________

Number of pupils in class : ___________________________________________

5. Nature of accident (e.g. fire, explosion, heat burns, chemical burns, etc.)

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

6. Name(s) of pupil(s) involved (age in bracket), and injury, if any, caused by the accident

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

7. Name(s) of teacher(s)/laboratory technician(s)/laboratory attendant(s) involved, and

injury, if any, caused by the accident

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

Appendix 3

St.Aff. G7

8. Cause of accident (e.g. wrong procedure, or carelessness, or malicious action on the part

of the pupils or others, faulty equipment, etc.)

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

9. Title of the experiment performed when the accident occurred, if applicable.

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

10. Distribution of pupils at the time of accident

(a) Group work :

No. of pupils in each group ________________________________________

(b) Others :

Location of pupils ________________________________________________

11. Location and activity of the teacher- in-charge of the class at the time of accident

___________________________________________________________________

12. First aid given, if any

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

13. Was any of the following telephoned for help? (Yes/No)

Tick as appropriate Time notified Time arrived

Police __________________ ___________ ___________

Fire Service ________________ ___________ ___________

Ambulance __________________ ___________ ___________

Action taken after the arrival

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

St.Aff. G8

14. Was the Education Department notified of the accident by telephone? (Yes/No)

Date and time notified _________________________________________________

15. Was the parent(s) or guardian(s) of the injured pupil(s) notified of the accident?

Yes/No

16. Name(s) and designation(s) of witness(es) to the accident, if any.

___________________________________________________________________

17. General remarks of the accident, if any

___________________________________________________________________

18. Particulars of the teacher- in-charge of the class at the time of accident

Name : ______________________________________

Qualifications : _______________________________

Teaching experience (no. of years) : _____________

19. Particulars of the laboratory technician- in-charge of the laboratory where the accident

occurred

Name : ______________________________________

Qualifications (including professional qualifications) : _______________________

Working experience (no, of years) : _________________________

20. Reporting person(s) :

Teacher _________________________________ or/and

Laboratory technician ________________________

21. Signature of Principal : ___________________________________

Name of Principal : ____________________________________

Date :__________________________

St.Aff. G9

List of items recommended to be included in the first aid box in schools

1. Antiseptics e.g. Savlon, tincture of iodine

2. Cotton wool

3. Disposable plastic / vinyl gloves

4. Sterile dressings / gauze

5. Adhesive plaster

6. Bandages (of different sizes)

7. Forceps

8. Safety pins

9. Scissors

10. Sterile adhesive dressings (of different sizes)

11. Sterile eye pad

12. Triangular bandages

13. Alcohol

14. Cold pack

15. Cotton sticks

16. Elastic tensor bandage

17. Liniment turpentine

18. Thermometer

Appendix 4

St.Aff. H1

STUDENT INSURANCE

I) Purpose Protect the school against public liability and students’ compensation risks.

II) Guidelines

a) The government has taken out a Block Insurance Policy (BIP) on behalf of the school. In case a claim is made against the school for causing an injury to others, the insurance company will, according to the conditions laid down in the BIP: 1) defend on behalf of the school; and 2) pay compensation to the victim as the court rules if the school is found to be

negligent in causing the injury. b) Parents have the right, under the common law process, to demand a legal

compensation from the school in case their child suffers injury as a result of a school’s action. It is, however, up to the court to rule whether a compensation is warranted and its amount.

c) In view of the complicated and long common law suit student-victims may have to go through to prove negligence, if any, on the part of the school, the BIP Scheme includes a personal accident insurance for students. Regardless of school’s negligence, the Scheme provides some financial consolation to students who suffer from Accidental Death or Permanent Disablement in school activities (amount subject to a maximum of HK$100,000 per student according to scale). This consolation is on top of any common law compensation students may obtain. This arrangement should not be seen as a comprehensive personal insurance coverage for students.

d) If parents wish to have a comprehensive personal insurance coverage for their children, they may acquire it, separately, from any insurance company.

e) The Ming An Insurance Co. (HK) Ltd. is the insurer for the BIP in the 1998/99 school year.

Hotlines of the insurer for claims enquiry, or to obtain the relevant claim forms are: 1) General enquiry: 28151551 Ext. 316 (Mr. Larry Ng, Mr. Jacky Lee) 2) Public liability: 28527150 (Mr. K.F. Cheng) 3) Personal Accident: 28527157 (Mr. Percy Lee)

III) Basis of Discretion

The policy will be amended by the Education Department.

St.Aff. H2

IV) Procedures

a) At the beginning of each school year, each new student should obtain a copy of ‘Introduction to Block Insurance Policy Scheme’.(appendix 1)

b) In case a parent wants to demand a legal compensation, 1) he/she should report to the school immediately after the accident, 2) the General Office of the school should immediately report the event to the

teacher- in-charge of student insurance of the school and give written notice to the insurer of the accident for proceedings.

St.Aff. H3

Ho Lap College

Notice to Parents

Introduction to ‘Block Insurance Policy Scheme’

1) The government has taken out a Block Insurance Policy (BIP) on behalf of the school. In case a

claim is made against the school for causing an injury to others, the insurance company will,

according to the conditions laid down in the BIP:

l defend on behalf of the school; and

l pay compensation to the victim as the court rules if the school is found to be negligent in

causing the injury.

2) Parents have the right, under the common law process, to demand a legal compensation from the

school in case their child suffers injury as a result of a school’s action. It is, however, the court to

rule whether a compensation is warranted and its amount.

3) In view of the complicated and long common law suit student-victims may have to go through to

prove negligence, if any, on the part of the school, the BIP Scheme includes a personal accident

insurance for students. Regardless of school’s negligence, the Scheme provides some financial

consolation to students who suffer from Accidental Death or Permanent Disablement in school

activities (amount subject to a maximum of HK$100,000 per student according to scale). This

consolation is on top of any common law compensation students may obtain. This arrangement

should not be seen as a comprehensive personal insurance coverage for students.

4) If parents wish to have a comprehensive personal insurance coverage for their children, they may

acquire it, separately, from any insurance company.

Appendix 1

St.Aff. I1

STUDENT LOCKERS I) Purposes

a) provide convenience for students; and b) safeguard the properties of houses, various societies and clubs, as well as school

teams. II) Guidelines

a) The school lockers should be ready for use in the first month of each academic year. b) The teacher- in-charge is required to assist in solving all locker problems. c) Students who are given the right to use the lockers have the responsibility to take

care of them. d) Students must strictly follow the “Regulations for Using School Lockers.”

(Appendix 1) e) If necessary, the teacher-in-charge can reassign the lockers or stop students from

using them. III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will be amended by the school administration only after consultation

with the Principal. IV) Procedures

a) The teacher- in-charge should plan the new allocation of the school lockers and prepare record sheets in the beginning month of the school year.

b) The lockers should have been made available by the end of the same month. c) Students will be informed to register with the teacher- in-charge before using the

lockers. d) “Regulations for Using School Lockers” should be distributed to the users. e) The teacher- in-charge should check regularly, in cooperation with the Discipline

Committee, if the lockers are properly used. f) Except for F.6, individual students of the other forms are required to have cleared

their lockers by their last school days in an academic year.

St.Aff. I2

Appendix 1

Regulations for Using School Lockers 1. Students shall not use any lockers without the school’s permission. 2. Students shall register with the teacher-in-charge before using the lockers. 3. Users shall not share their lockers with others without the school’s permission. 4. Users shall not exchange their lockers privately. 5. Users shall not change their locker numbers assigned by the school. 6. Users shall not take their personal belongings from the lockers between lessons. 7. In the case that the locker keys are lost, users shall report to the teacher- in-charge

immediately. 8. Users shall bear the responsibility to protect their lockers and their properties inside. 9. Users who violate the above rules shall be punished by the Discipline Board or shall be

stopped from using the lockers for a certain period of time.

St.Aff. J1

SCHOOL NEWSPAPER

I) Purposes

a) produce quality reading materials for students; b) provide staff and students with information about the school and aspects of life in Hong

Kong; c) give students a channel for expressing their views on various matters; d) maintain a news link with parents and alumni; and e) promote student’s interest in writing, and develop their organisation skills and sense of

responsibility through editorial work.

II) Guidelines

a) The School Newspaper, titled The Resonance, shall be a bilingual publication containing a Chinese section and an English section. It shall be issued twice every school year in February and July. Both the February and the July issues shall have three English pages and five Chinese pages.

b) The contents of the newspaper might include various subjects of interest to students,teaching staff, parents and alumni. In the same issue, the contents of the two sections may be different. Major items in the English section include : 1) interviews with teachers and students, 2) profiles of new teachers, 3) science column, and 4) contributions from students. Major items in the Chinese include : 1) special features, 2) leisure and interests, 3) school activities, and 4) contributions from students.

c) A team of teachers shall be appointed to assist students in editorial work. The advisory team shall comprise two Chief Editing Advisors each responsible for the Chinese and the English sections respectively; and ten to twelve Editing Advisors. One of the Chief Editing Advisor shall be responsible for the overall supervision of the editorial and publication work.

d) Two Editorial Boards with 10 to 15 students each shall be formed to carry out editorial work for the English and Chinese sections respectively. Each Editorial Board shall have a Chief Editor.

St.Aff. J2

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended after consultation with the Principal. IV) Procedures

a) In September each year, the Editorial Boards shall be set up; the Chief Editor and the editors for the two Editorial Boards selected; and the division of labour among the editors decided.

b) The Editorial Boards shall convene a general meeting in late September and mid February to discuss the following matters regarding publication of the two issues of the School Newspaper: 1) contents of the various columns, 2) topics for interviews, 3) teachers to be invited to present their profiles, 4) topics for student contributions and students’ outstanding writing assignments, 5) deadlines for students to submit articles to the Chief Editors and for Editing Advisors to

return gone-over articles to the Chief Editiors, and 6) efforts to appeal for contributions.

c) The editors shall carry out research, conduct interviews and prepare draft articles for submission to the relevant Editing Advisors according to the deadlines set (usually mid December for the first issue and mid April for the second issue). If the editors encounter difficulties, they may seek advice from the Editing Advisors.

d) The Editing Advisors shall return amended draft articles to editors for preparation of a clean copy which will be sent to the publishing company for draft printing. On receipt of the first printed draft, the Chief Editing Advisor will give them to editors for proof-reading.

e) Proofread articles will be passed to editors to perform the layout and design work. The resultant ‘draft’ complete with graphics and pictures will be proofread by the Chief Editing Advisor for further proof-reading and sent to the printer for production of a photo-off-set.

f) In early February and July, the printer will give the Chief Editing Advisor the final printed draft for confirmation. If confirmed, the printer will be requested to proceed with the actual printing. Usually, about 1,500 copies of the first issue and 1,200 copies of the second issue of the newspaper will be printed.

g) On receipt of the printed publications, the Editorial Boards shall distribute them to the Principal, teachers, students and alumni.

Student Enrolment and Registration

Student Admission

Student Allocation

Student Withdrawal

STUDENT ENROLMENT AND REGISTRATION

A) General Policy A1 B) Student Admission B1-12

1) F.1 Admission

2) F.2 and F.3 New Student Admission

3) F.4 Admission

4) F.6 Admission

5) F.5 and F.7 Repeater Admission

C) Student Allocation C1-7 1) Streaming in Junior Forms

2) Streaming in Senior Forms

D) Student Withdrawal D1-2

St.Reg. A 1

STUDENT ENROLMENT AND REGISTRATION

Our school is one of the subsidized secondary schools with symmetrical class structure from Form 1 to Form 5, operating 5 classes in each form, having an average of 40 students per class. While in Form 6 and 7 there are 3 classes in each form, with an average of 30 students in each class. As one of the participating secondary schools of the SSPA system, we accept 70% of our F.1 students by this system. Our school is allowed to keep 30% of its F.1 places as discretionary places for the admission of F.1 students at the school’s discretion. For Form 4 students, all of them are promoted from Form 3 of our own school. While the F.6 students are chosen and admitted according to the Secondary Six Admission Procedure (SSAP). We accept students from our F.5 graduates as well as those from other schools. Arising from withdrawal, any vacant school places will be filled up at the discretion of the Principal. In order to avoid any administrative inconvenience and students’ adjustment problems, the selection procedure for new students will be carried out at the end of each school year. The registration of these new students is done in Mid-July according to the procedure set in the Code of Aids in Secondary School. Registration of Secondary One and Secondary Six pupils is done in accordance with the dates, time and procedure prescribed by the EMB.

St.Reg. B1

STUDENT ADMISSION AND ALLOCATION

I) Purposes

a) allocate students to different classes in order to provide small class teaching in Chinese, English and Mathematics in Junior Forms;

b) allocate students of similar abilities and interest in the same class so as to enhance co-operation, communication and mutual understanding among them;

c) allocate students according to their choice and their academic abilities so that they would develop their potential to the fullest extent in senior forms; and

d) provide different curricula for senior form students.

II) Guidelines

a) The maximum number of students per class in F.1-F.5 is 42, while F.6-F.7 is 32. b) Ratio of boys to girls in F.1-F.3 classes should be similar. c) The Pre-S1 Hong Kong Attainment test for new F.1 intakes in the following

subjects, English, Chinese Language and Mathematics so as to identify students for remedial teaching in these subjects in F.1.

d) Streaming of F.2 and F.3 students according to their annual academic results. Students with good Science and Mathematics performance would be allocated to F.2A and F.3A, while those with good performance in languages to F.2B and F.3B.

e) Repeaters of F.1, F.2 and F.3 should not be allocated to the same class, while repeaters of F.4 and F.6 are allocated according to student’s choice and teachers' recommendation.

f) Streaming of F.4 students into the different options is according to their academic achievement, preference of choices and the quota available.

g) Students promoted to F.5 are allocated to the same class. h) F.5 repeaters are admitted according to available quota, the HKCEE results and

teachers' recommendation. i) F.6 students are admitted according to the S6 admission procedures and their results

in the relevant subjects in the HKCEE. j) Students promoted to F.7 are allocated to the same class. k) Students with special emotional and/or disciplinary problem may be treated

differently in order to minimize any disruption to the class. l) New F.2 and F.3 intakes are allocated according to the same procedure adopted. m) The results of allocation of students to classes will be announced in early August.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation with the Principal.

St.Reg. B2

IV) Procedures

a) F.1 Admission

1) Discretionary Places i) The school is allowed to keep 30% of its Secondary One Places as

discretionary places which are allocated by the school before the SSPA central allocation.

ii) All applications will be collected and processed. A list of applicants is prepared and submitted to the SSPA of EMB.

iii) EMB will return a list of our F.1 Discretionary places applicants arranged according to their academic performance (after moderation) — Rank Order List.

iv) School has to arrange interview with applicants in order to prepare a list of successful DP applicants.

v) The list of successful applicants together with a waiting list will be sent to EMB for further processing.

vi) The results of successful DP applications are released by the EMB in mid-July together with the results under the central allocation.

2) SSPA system

i) Before summer vacation, the teacher- in-charge should notify the General Office of the preparation of materials for registration.

ii) Head Prefects are to the informed before summer vacation about duties of prefects.

iii) The teacher- in-charge will prepare a working memo and get the materials of registration from the office at least one day before the registration days (usually two days in mid-July).

iv) Staff who are assigned duties are to arrive at the working centre half an hour before the starting time to get the working memo and other materials.

v) The I.D. cards of the new students and their Admission Slips have to be carefully checked. The Admission Slips are then kept by School.

vi) Staff has to dispatch student record forms, book lists and other documents to the new students.

vii) After registration, staff will return the Admission Slips and other materials to the General Office.

St.Reg. B3

3) F.1 Vacant Places after Registration Days i) If there were F.1 vacancies after the Registration days, application would

be considered.

ii) Some of applicants will be informed of an interview with the teacher in-charge.

iii) The successful applicants are to be notified to register immediately.

b) F.2 and F.3 New Students Admission

1) Any Students who wish to obtain a school place in our school in the following

academic year should get an application form from the office in May. He/ She should complete & submit it together with the student’s past academic and extracurricular activities records on or before the deadline.

2) The office clerk will scrutinize the application forms received and keep the forms of the better applicants in a separate file for further consideration.

3) All other unsuccessful applicants will be informed immediately by post.

4) At the end of each academic year (usually in mid-June), the teacher- in-charge will select some of the better applicants from the above file for the entrance examination.

5) The Chinese, English and Mathematics Panel Heads are to submit the examination papers, and supply the information about invigilation and marking duties so that a comprehensive timetable can be produced one week before the examination.

6) After the examination, a list of satisfactory applicants will be asked for an interview with the Vice-Principals & representatives from the discipline committee.

7) After the interview, the teacher- in-charge can make a list of successful applicants.

8) The successful applicants will be notified to come to school for registration in mid-July.

c) F.4 Admission

1) After the final examination, the teacher- in-charge prepares the list of F.3

repeaters and leavers and submits to EMB before the deadline as stated by EMB.

2) Students who are promoted to F.4 in our school have to hand in the form of

choice of options/ streams before the deadline as stated.

3) About 5% of F.4 places are reserved fo r F.4 repeaters.

4) After the promotion meeting in July, a list of F.4 repeaters will be finalised and

necessary actions follow. (like (2) above)

St.Reg. B4

d) F.6 Students Admission

1) For admission to F.6, applicants must have obtained Grade E or above in at least six subjects at one and the same sitting in the HKCEE.

2) They are advised to follow the procedure as stated in S.6 Admission Procedure leaflet to apply for S6 admission to our school or other schools

3) They have to fill in appropriate application forms (Appendix 1, Appendix 2) and hand them in on time. When filling in the forms, they have to consider the available F.6 curricula (Appendix 3), the subjects combination and the selection criteria carefully. No alternation of streams/class/subjects is allowed after their admission .

4) The priority of admission will depend on the HKCEE results in English Language, Chinese Language and the subjects chosen in F.6.

5) Students are not allowed to take subjects that have not been examined or they have failed in HKCEE.

6) A list of students accepted for S6 will be announced as scheduled. They have to register before the deadline as stated in the SSAP leaflet

7) Follow-up work as requested by EMB should be followed strictly.

e) F.5 and F.7 Repeaters Admission

1) Only students of our school are eligible for application. 2) Application forms (Appendix 4) are available from Form Teachers on the day

of release of results of HKCEE and HKALE or from the General Office. 3) The completed forms must be returned to General Office by the end of the next

day after the release of result. 4) Quota for F.5 and F.7 repeaters is determined after the promotion meeting in

early July. 5) Students are selected according to the HKCEE/ HKAL results as well as

teachers' recommendation. 6) The list of successful applicants will be announced as soon as possible after the

deadline of submission. 7) They are allocated to appropriate classes after registration.

St.Reg. B5

HO LAP COLLEGE Ref. No .____________ APPLICATION FORM FOR FORM 6/7 SCIENCE ADMISSION (2006 / 2007)

(1) Name: ______________________ (________________) (2) Sex: _______ in English in Chinese (3) Date of Birth: __________________________ (4) Age: _______ (5) Address: ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ (6) Home Tel No: _____________________ Mobile Phone / Pager:________________ (7) Previous Class: F.5________ (Ho Lap Students) Class No.: __________ Admission No.: _______________ (Ho Lap Students) (8) Previous Schools : (Non- Ho Lap Students)

YEAR FORM

From To SCHOOL ATTENDED

4 5

Repeat F.5 (if applicable) (9) Results of HKCEE: Year __________ (Please put in grades and points, Grade A to E shall be given the numerical points of 5 to 1

respectively) Subject Grade Point Subject Grade Point Subject Grade Point

Chinese Language

Physics Geography

English Language

Chemistry Computer & Information Technology

Mathematics

Biology Visual Art

Additional Mathematics

(10) Total points of the BEST SIX SUBJECTS: N.B. For applicants from other schools, please bring along the following for inspection i) the school reports ii) the HKCEE result notice

Photo

Appendix 1

St.Reg. B6

(11) Choice of class in F.6 : Enter the order of your choices Use 1: First Choice 2: Second Choice 3: Third Choice

Class Option Subjects taken Choice 3AL Phy, Pure Maths, Chem 3AL Phy, Pure Maths, Applied Maths

6B

2AL +1AS Phy, Chem, Maths & Statistics (AS) 3AL Phy, Chem, Bio 6C 2AL + 1AS Chem, Bio, Maths & Statistics (AS)

. 3AL requirement: 6 best subjects with pts > 17 or relevant credits in subjects taken

(12) If you were admitted to F.6, would you like to be a school prefect? Yes No

(13) Extra- curricular Activities

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

(14) Scholarship & Prizes

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

(15) Remarks (For Teacher-in-charge Use ONLY)

Admitted: 6B 3ALs * Applied Maths / Chem

6B 2ALs + 1AS 6C 3ALs 6C 2ALs + 1AS * Delete wherever applicable

Waiting Rejected

Teacher-in-charge: _____________________ Date:_______________________

St.Reg. B7

HO LAP COLLEGE Ref. No .____________

APPLICATION FORM FOR FORM 6/7 ARTS ADMISSION ( 2006 / 2007 )

(1) Name: ______________________ (________________) (2) Sex: _______ in English in Chinese (3) Date of Birth: __________________________ (4) Age: _______ (5) Address: ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ (6) Home Tel No: _____________________ Mobile Phone:________________ (7) Previous Class: F.5________ (Ho Lap Students) Class No.: __________

Admission No.: _______________ (Ho Lap Students) (8) Previous Schools : (Non- Ho Lap Students)

YEAR FORM

From To SCHOOL ATTENDED

4 5

Repeat F.5 (if applicable) (9) Results of HKCEE: Year __________ (Please put in grades and points, Grade A to E shall be given the numerical points of 5 to 1 respectively)

Subject Grade Point Subject Grade Point Subject Grade Point Chinese Language

Chinese Literature

Principles of Accounts

English Language

Geography

Computer & Information Technology

Mathematics Economics Visual Art

History

Chinese History

(10) Total points of the BEST SIX SUBJECTS: N.B. For applicants from other schools, please bring along the following for inspection i) the schools reports ii) the HKCEE result notice (11) Choose one of the following options and put a “ ü ” in the box next to the option. Read the

requirements before you put the tick. For option you have chosen, put ticks in appropriate boxes to indicate the subjects you wish to study in F.6.

Photo

Appendix 2

St.Reg. B8

Option 1 : 3 AL subjects Requirements: 1) Grade D or above in relevant subjects chosen, & 2) a total of 8 points or above in these 3 subjects

AL Geog AL Econ AL Chi .Lit. AL Hist / AL Chi. Hist. *

* Circle the subject chosen Option 2: 2 AL subjects+ 1 AS subjects Requirements: Grade E or above in relevant subjects chosen

AL Geog AL Econ AL Chi. Lit. AS Hist. AS Chi. Hist.

(12) If you were admitted to F.6, would you like to be a school prefect? Yes No

(13) Extra- curricular Activities

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

(14) Scholarship & Prizes

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

(15) Remarks (For Teacher-in-charge Use ONLY):

Admitted Option: 3AL 2AL+1AS

Subjects

Taken: AL AS

Geography History Economics Chinese History Chinese Literature History / Chinese History *

* Circle the subject chosen

Waiting Rejected Teacher-in-charge: _____________________ Date:_________________________

_

_

__

_

St.Reg. B9

F.6 Curriculum F.6A

Options 3AL 2AL + 1AS

Requirement 8 points in 3 chosen subjects

Subjects AL

1. Geography

2. Economics

3. History

4. Chinese History / Chinese Lit.

AS 1. Chinese History

2. History

F.6B

Options 3AL 2AL + 1AS

Requirement 6 best subjects with points 17 and relevant credits

Subjects 1. Pure Maths

2. Physics

3. Chemistry / App. Maths

1. Physics

2. Chemistry

1. Maths and

Statistics

F.6C

Options 3AL 2AL + 1AS

Requirement 6 best subjects with points 17

Subjects 1. Chemistry

2. Biology

3. Physics

1. Chemistry

2. Biology

1. Maths & Statistics (AS)

Appendix 3

St.Reg. B10

HO LAP COLLEGE Ref. No. ____________

APPLICATION FORM FOR FORM 5 ART / SCIENCE. (19 / ) (1) Name:______________________(________________) (2) Sex:____________ in English in Chinese (3) Date of Birth: (4) Age: (5) Address:

(6) Home Tel. No.: Mobile Phone/Pager : (7) Previous Class:F.5 (Ho Lap Students) Class No. : (8) Previous Schools (Non-Ho Lap Students)

Year Form

From To

School Attended

From To

(9) Results of HKCEE:Year ______ (Please put in grades e.g. A1, C6, F11, and points 5-0) (Grade A to E shall be given the numerical points of 5 to 1 respectively)

Subject Grade Point Chinese Language English Language Mathematics

Subject Grade Point Subject Grade Point Subject Grade Point Chin. Lit Computer

Stud. Add.

Maths.

Geography Prin. of Acc Physics Economics Human Bio. Chemistry

History Art Biology Chi. Hist.

Photo

Appendix 4

St.Reg. B11

(10) Total score of Chinese Language, English Language, Mathematics and 3 relevant science / arts

subjects : (11) Extra-curricular Activities, Awards & Prizes

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

(12) Recommendation : (To be completed by Form Teacher)

Point

Not recommended to repeat F.5 0

Recommended to repeat F.5 1

HIGHLY recommended to repeat F.5 2

State reason(s) for a HIGHLY recommended student: _____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

(13) Remarks (For Office Use ONLY) : -

Admitted to F.5 ( ) _____________________________

Waiting F.5 ( ) _____________________________ Rejected

Point Given :

St.Reg. C1

STUDENT ALLOCATION STREAMING IN JUNIOR FORMS

Streaming in F.1 is to provide remedial teaching in Chinese Language and English Language, while streaming in F.2 & F.3 is to provide remedial teaching in English Language (F.2 Only) and Mathematics (F.2 & F.3)

Procedures

a) Steaming in F.1

1) After the registration in Mid-July, F.1 students have to take an Entrance Examination in Chinese, English and Mathematics.

2) Remedial groups (of English and Chinese Languages) are arranged according to the performance of the students in the English and Chinese examinations.

3) Those students who are weak in Chinese and English are allocated to remedial groups in F.1A, F.1B, F.1C and F.1D (Appendix 1).

4) The other Students are then allocated randomly to the five F.1 classes.

5) The lists of allocation of F.1 students will be announced in Early August. b) Streaming in F.2 & F.3

1) The teacher- in-charge has to allocate the repeaters and new comers first.

2) Students who are good at Science and Mathematics are allocated to F.2A and F.3A, and those who are good at Chinese and English are allocated to F.2B and F.3B.

3) Those F.3 students who are weak in Mathematics are allocated to the remedial group in F.3D & F.3E. (Appendix 1).

4) Those F.2 students who are weak in English and Mathematics are allocated to remedial groups in F.2C, F.2D and F.2E. (Appendix 1)

5) After the allocation of F.2A, F.2B, F.3A, F.3B and the remedial groups, the rest of the students are allocated randomly to F.2C, F.2D, F.2E and F.3C, F.3D, F.3E.

6) The lists of allocation have to be checked carefully before they are released in early August.

St.Reg. C2

Split Class and Remedial Teaching Arrangement in Junior Forms:

Subject

Group ENG. CHI. MATHS. D&T H.E. CPL1 CPL2 Class

1A 1B 1C 1D 1E

*E1(10) + E2(30) *E3(20) + E5(20) *E4(20) + E5(20)

E(40) E(40)

C1(31) + *C3(9) C2(31) + *C3(9) C4(31) + *C6(9) C5(31) + *C6(9)

C(40)

M(40) M(40) M(40) M(40) M(40)

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

2A 2B 2C 2D 2E

E(40) E(40)

*E1(10) + E2(30) *E3(8) + E4(32) *E3(8) + E5(32)

C(40) C(40) C(40) C(40) C(40)

M(40) M(40)

*M1(13) + M3(27) *M2(13) + M4(27) *M1(7) + *M2(7) +M3(13) + M4(13)

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

3A 3B 3C 3D 3E

E(40) E(40) E(40) E(40) E(40)

C(40) C(40) C(40) C(40) C(40)

M(40) M(40) M(40)

*M1(20) + M3(20) *M2(20) + M3(20)

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

Appendix 1

St.Reg. C3

STUDENT ALLOCATION STREAMING IN SENIOR FORMS

STREAMING IN FORM 4 F.3 students who are promoted to F.4 in our school have to choose three options

offered in F.4 curriculum as their choices. They are selected according to their performance in the internal assessment in F.3, their choice of preference and the quota available.

STREAMING IN FORM 6 Form 5 students are offered F.6 places according to F.6 admission procedures and

their results in the relevant subjects in the HKCEE. There are two streams in F.6 Art Stream – F.6A Science Stream –F.6B and F.6C

Procedures

a) Streaming in Form 4

1) Every F.3 student eligible for promotion to our F.4 classes will receive an

application form (Appendix 2) after the promotion meeting in early July. 2) The form should be completed and returned to respective Form Teacher before

the deadline. 3) Their choices of preference would be analysed and ‘List of Streaming

Application’ of each Form 3 class would be printed out. 4) Students would be selected for each option according to their preference and

academic attainment in certain subjects combination. 5) Number of students selected for each option is limited by quota provided

(Appendix 1) 6) F.4 repeaters are allocated places according to their preference and teachers’

recommendation. 7) Allocation of F.4 students will be announced in late July. 8) Students with good reasons may apply for transfer of options/classes within 3

days after the announcement. They have to fill in application form (Appendix 3)

9) Result of application of transfer of options will be released in 3 days after the deadline.

St.Reg. C4

b) Streaming in Form 6

1) On the day of release of HKCEE result, those F.5 students eligible for F.6 admission have to fill in application forms for admission to F.6 Arts/Science (Appendix 1, Appendix 2 of Part B).

2) In the form, they should indicate their preference of options available in F.6. 3) Teachers would select students to different classes/options according to their

HKCEE results and the available quota. 4) For borderline cases, internal academic results and teachers recommendation

would be referred to. 5) After registration, students are not allowed to swap places with other students. 6) Students may apply for alteration of subjects taken within 10 school days from

the beginning of the term in September.

St.Reg. C5

Ho Lap College Form 4 Class Structure 中四班級編制

F.4A F.4B F.4C F.4D F.4E

English Language (英文)

Chinese Language (中文)

Mathematics (數學)

Geography (地理)

Economics (經濟)

History (世史)

Physics (物理)

Chemistry (化學)

Biology (生物)

Chinese History

(中國歷史)

Chinese History

(中國歷史)

Chinese History (中國歷史) /

Chinese Literature (中國文學)

Additional Maths

(附加數學)

Additional Maths

(附加數學)

Principles of Account

(會計學原理)

Chinese Literature

(中國文學)

Computer & Information Technology (電腦及資訊科技) -- 兩組約 40人 /

Visual Art (視覺藝術) -- 1組約 20人 /

PE (體育) -- 1組約 20人

Geography (地理)

40人 40人 40人 40人 40人

Appendix 1

St.Reg. C6

HO LAP COLLEGE APPLICATION FOR F.4 ADMISSION INTO FORM FOUR

ARTS / SCIENCE STREAM (20 / 20 ) A. Student name : ___________________________ ( ) ( English ) B. Class : ______________ Class no.: _______ C. My Choice : Please enter 1, 2, 3 in the boxes provided to indicate your preference

(1 - highest priority)

Class Core Subjects Elective Subjects Option Priority

4A Chinese History PAC A

4B Chinese History Chinese Literature B

Visual Art CH 1

PE CH 2

CIT–Programming CH 3

Chinese History

CIT–Web Authoring CH 4

Visual Art CL 1

PE CL 2

CIT–Programming CL 3

4C

History Economics Geography

Chinese Literature

CIT–Web Authoring CL 4 Visual Art D1

PE D2 CIT–Programming D3

4D Add. Maths

CIT–Web Authoring D4

4E

Chemistry Physics Biology

Add. Maths Geography E

Signature of Student : _____________________

Signature of Guardian / Parent : _____________________

Date : _____________________

St.Reg. C7

HO LAP COLLEGE

APPLICATION OF TRANSFER OF CLASSES/OPTIONS To: The Principal / Teacher-in-charge, Ho Lap College. I wish to apply for the transfer of my allocation in Form ______

( __________________ ) to Form _____ ( __________________ ). Subjects option Subjects option Reasons of application:

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

Name of student:___________________

Signature of student:___________________

Class:___________________

Signature of Guardian / Parent:__________________

Date of application:__________________

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Remarks: (For Office Use Only) _______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

Appendix 3

St.Reg. D1

STUDENT WITHDRAWAL

I) Purposes a) update the student information of the school; and b) report the student information to REO of EMB as required. II) Guidelines a) Any student who is absent from school for 3 or more than 3 days without

notification should be identified. b) Form teacher should try to contact with the student’s parent to find out the reasons

for his/ her absence. c) Only written application of withdrawal from school is accepted. d) Form teacher should ensure all tasks set in the fo rm of withdrawal (Appendix 1)

are done. e) Student’s information is then updated in SAMS by clerk in Office. III) Basis of Discretion The above policy will only be amended by the school administration after consultation

with the Principal. IV) Procedures

a) Students who wish to quit school should hand in a letter of withdrawal from school

to their Form Teachers/Vice-Principal. It is to be properly signed by their parent/guardian

b) Form Teachers are to obtain a form (Appendix 1) from the Vice-Principal and complete the tasks set in the form thoroughly. Signatures of the Careers Mistress and the Clerks should be procured.

c) Form Teachers must also get two recent photos in school uniform from the student— one for the testimonial, the other for placing onto the space ‘PHOTO ON LEAVING’ provided in the Student Record File.

d) Form Teachers are to enter the dates and class of leaving.

St.Reg. D2

Withdrawal of Student from School Name of School Leaver : _____________________ ( ) Class : F. _____ Name of Present Form Teacher : ______________________ Date of Admission : _____________________ Admission No. : ____________ Date of Leaving : _______________________ Reason of Leaving : _________________________________________

Action to be taken Please ‘ü’

Staff Responsible

Signature

1. Principal informed

2. Vice Principal informed

3. Teacher i/c of Pupil Record System informed

4. Report Cards returned to the pupil

5. Guardian’s letter and copies of relevant documents placed in the Record Card

6. Student’s name in Attendance Register cancelled

7. Name List amended

8. Student Card collected from the school leaver

9. Return of library books & cards (if any) confirmed

Form Teacher

10. Draft of testimonial completed and forward to Careers Master

Careers Master

11. Admission Register amended

12. Enrolment Register amended

13. Record Card filed

Clerk in G.O.

N.B. 1. Staff concerned please tick and sign in the appropriate space to indicate

complete action. 2. kindly forward this form, duly completed, to the clerk for follow-up action and

onward transmission to the Vice Principal.

Appendix 1

School Policy and Procedure Manual

Finance and Accounts

General Policy

Budgeting and Finance Control In CCA

Collection of Fees and Programme Budgeting

FINANCE AND ACCOUNTS

A) General Policy A1

B) Collection of School Fees and Subscription B1-3

Budgeting Procedure

C) Budgeting and Finance Control in ECA C1-6

Fin.& Acc.A1

FINANCE AND ACCOUNTS

General Policy

IMC of our school is responsible for the proper management, administration and

operation of the school. It handles funds and assets received from the Government in the

capacity of a trustee. Therefore, it is obliged to hold accountability for any improper use of

the public resources.

Collection of school fees, various incomes and expenditure of the school is under the

conditions in the Code of Aids for Secondary Schools.

Before each school year starts, departments and committees are required to submit

the budget of the coming school year. School should always put the interest of students as the

first priority. The school authority will allocate resources to various departments and

committees with fair equity. Priority will be given to core activities concerning the school

goals or the current major concerns of the school.

The Finance Committee of the school is responsible for the good financial

management of the school accounts so as to maintain a healthy and stable finance status all

the time. It is responsible to disclose financial information properly in their annual School

Plan and annual School Report, which is to be uploaded onto the website of the schools.

Fin. & Acc. B1

COLLECTION OF FEES AND PROGRAMME BUDGETING

I) Purposes

a) ensure that monetary resources are allocated to various programmes (including both subject departments and committees) with fair equity;

b) ensure that a better allocation of resources to core activities; c) ensure that the resource of the school can be utilized effectively under good

financial management; d) maintain a healthy and stable finance status; and e) give suggestions to the Principal in getting more resources from the government

and Sik Sik Yuen.

II) Guidelines a) Collection of school fees, various incomes and expenditure of school is under the

conditions in the Code of Aids for Secondary Schools/ IMC. b) Programme category is defined (in the Programme Schedule module in SAMS) as

follows: 1) Administration 2) Staff Development 3) Student Affairs (including Careers Committee, Counseling Committee,

Discipline Committee, Moral and Civic Education Committee) 4) Curriculum (Subjects) 5) CCA (Co-curricular Activities)

c) Budgeting

1) Programme leaders are required to prepare the budget of the coming school year and submit it to the Finance Committee of the school before a specified date.

2) Items to be included in the budget are: i) Curriculum Development ii) Library books for students iii) Newspaper and magazines iv) Teaching aids v) Expenses on IT vi) Furniture and Equipment vii) Expenses of Functions/Activities viii) Expenses of consumable materials ix) Maintenance services x) Capacity Enhancement Grant Programme xi) Miscellaneous (is roughly 10% of the total amount of the above items

and serves as contingency only)

Fin. & Acc. B2

3) Programme leaders could take into account the inflation rate to make an

estimation of various items.

d) Implementation of Programme Budget 1) Programme leaders have authority to implement the programmes once the

budget is approved by the Principal. 2) Programme leaders should maximize the use of the allocated funds. It is their

responsibility to monitor the expenditure and do the financial report using the Expenditure Record Form (appendix) prepared by the Finance Committee.

3) Clerk I of the General Office is responsible for recording actual expenditure on programme basis.

4) In case a function or activity (in the school budget) can get financial support from an external organization, the approved amount in the school budget for it will be automatically set aside as a contingency fund.

e) For QEF projects and other approved funds, the bookkeeping would be handled by Clerk 1 of the General Office while the teacher(s)- in-charge should keep control of the expenditure and the balance.

f) Evaluation 1) Each programme leader should monitor the progress and achievement of

his/her own programme. He/she should investigate any variance in the actual expenditure. This investigation would serve as the basis for planning the budget of the coming year.

2) The Principal would oversee the progress of all Programme Plans and examine any variances.

III) Basis of Discretion

The above policy will be amended by the Finance Committee after consultation with the Principal.

IV) Procedures a) Collection of School Fees

1) Tuition fees for secondary 1 to 3 are completely free. Tong Fai will be collected by Form Teachers at the beginning of the school year in one installment.

2) Tuition fees together with Tong Fai for secondary 4 to 7 will be collected monthly by the Direct Debit System in the following ways: i) Form 4 and Form 6: 10 installments (September to June) ii) Form 5 : 7 installments (September to March) iii) Form 7 : 6 installments (September to February)

Fin. & Acc. B3

b) Programme Budgeting 1) Each programme leader should prepare the budget in the budgeting table

(appendix) and submit it to the Finance Committee before the specified date (usually June) as requested by the Principal.

2) Subject department heads may ask for replacement of old equipment used for more than 5 years or purchasing new items (preferably within the standard list of furniture and equipment). The Finance Committee will be responsible for setting a priority list for the applications. If the total amount requested exceeds the Recurrent F&E Grant (about HK$110,000), the Committee may give suggestions on asking for financial support from Sik Sik Yuen or applying for the Non-Recurrent F&E Grant from the government.

3) After seeking the approval of the Principal, the Finance Committee will make a Programme Budget of the coming school year to allocate monetary resources to various programmes.

4) The Programme Budget will be submitted to the IMC for approval. 5) When the new school year starts, Clerk I will prepare the previous year’s

financial statement. Once the statement is ready and all identifiable sources of income have been secured (including various Government Funds, Government subsidy, Tong Fei etc.), the Finance Committee would again evaluate the actual discrepancies with the estimated budget and discuss with the Principal.

6) After the budget has been approved by the Principal, programme leaders will be informed individually.

c) Evaluation 1) A half-yearly evaluation meeting will be held in March. After that,

teachers- in-charge will prepare the budget of the coming school year. 2) Near the end of each school year (mid June), teachers- in-charge should report

to the Finance Committee the exact expenditure of the school year by filling the Expenditure Record Form.

Fin. & Acc. C1

BUDGETING AND FINANCE CONTROL OF EXTRA-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES

I) Purposes

a) utilize existing resources efficiently and effectively;

b) prepare the year plan and budget in a standard format for easy reference and

auditing and

c) encourage self- financing while Societies / Clubs can apply for School Subsidy

for purchasing essential equipment, stationery, trophies for competitions etc.

II) Guidelines

a) If Societies / Clubs are intended to levy member fees on students, they must

make their application by stating the details on their budget for Co-curricular

Activity Master’s approval.

b) For trophy expenses, it is a maximum of $30 for an individual prize and $50

for a group prize

c) Students are not encouraged to use activity subsidy for party/entertainment

purposes. Therefore School subsidy for any party/picnic/camping etc. will

be limited to around $50-$200.

III) Procedures

a) Application

1) Committees of various Societies / Clubs are required to prepare a year

plan (Appendix 1) and budget in a standard format for the school year

by mid September.

2) The completed ‘Year Plan’ and ‘Subsidy Requisition Form’(Appendix 2)

should be forwarded to the Co-curricular Activity Master for Principal’s

approval.

Fin. & Acc. C2

b) Approval

1) The Yearly Co-curriculum Activity Plan and Budget for the school year

should be ready by September. When the account of the current year is

finalized, the Co-curricular Activity Master should review the surplus /

deficit of each unit before approving any new budget for next year.

2) If the budgeted amount is similar with the previous one, it will be

approved in principle. If the budgeted amount is much higher than last

year’s, it may involve further discussion among the Principal,

Teacher- in-charge of the Society / Club concerned and Co-curricular

Activity Master.

c) Operation

1) The Co-curricular Activity Master would return the approved budget with

a copy and a completed ‘Subsidy Requisition Form’ to each

Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club in mid-October.

2) The Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club could request the payment by

submitting the approved budget and the ‘Subsidy Requisition Form’ to

Clerk I. The copy of the budget should be returned to Committee for

the Committee for record.

3) If a Society / Club cannot be granted the full amount requested, the

Committee should revise their year plan and budget according to the

subsidy approved.

4) For activities such as Inter-School Competitions, celebration parties,

which need extra School Subsidy, the Committee could apply for subsidy

individually from the Principal.

5) The fund for each Society/Club should be kept by the Teacher- in-charge

of the Society / Club concerned or in a bank account. The Treasurer

could use the fund by petty cash system.

6) The Treasurer must use a Petty Cash Record for book-keeping purpose.

All expenses must be supported with receipts; otherwise it must have a

petty cash voucher in School’s standard format signed by the

Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club for approval.

7) The Treasurer must prepare a monthly ‘Financial Report ’ together with

all receipts / vouchers for the Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club to audit.

After checking, the Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club should sign on

the report and stamp on the back of all receipts / vouchers ‘PAID’

before returning the reports and receipts to the Treasurer.

8) An Income and Expenditure Account ended on the last day of the school

year should be ready before the end of Summer Vacation.

Fin. & Acc. C3

9) The Income and Expenditure Account, together with the Financial Report

(Appendix 3) and all receipts, must be returned to the Teacher- in-charge

of Society / Club for checking.

10) The Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club should sign on the reports after

checking and submit the Account to the Co-curricular Activity Master.

The Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club would keep the copy of the

Financial Report and all receipts until a new Treasurer is elected.

11) The Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club would keep the surplus, if any;

or if there is a deficit, the Teacher- in-charge of Society / Club should pay

for it first and have it reimbursed when there is revenue in the next

school year.

Fin. & Acc. C4

HO LAP COLLEGE Annual Programme Plan

(20 -- 20 )

Name of Club / Society / House /Team:_______________________

Month

Activity Description Aim Name of teacher

Remarks:

Overall- in-charge:___________________

( )

Date:___________________

Fin. & Acc. C5

HO LAP COLLEGE Subsidy Requisition Form

(20 --20 )

Name of Club / Society / House / Team:________________________

Activity Total estimated cost

Contribution from participants

Income from other sources

(please describe)

Subsidy requested from School

Gross Total:

Teacher-in-charge:___________________

( ) Date:_________________

For Office Use Only

Other Remarks: Approved Amount: $_________________ Approved by:_______________________ Principal: K. C. LING Date:______________________________

Fin. & Acc. C6

HO LAP COLLEGE

Statement of Income and Expenditure

House/ Club/ Society:_______________________ Date:___/___/20___ to ___/___/20___

INCOME: Cash Balance at commencement of year: Sum Amount C.Total($)

At Bank $

In Hand $_______ $

Subscriptions: Receipts from members: ________ pupils of $ each $

Subsidy from school: 1. Annual Subsidy $

2. Non-recurrent Subsidy

a) $

b) $_______ $

Income from other sources: a) $

b) $

c) $_______ $_______

TOTAL INCOME $______

EXPENDITURE: a) $

b) $

c) $

d) $

e) $

f) $

g) $

TOTAL EXPENDITURE .$_______

Cash Balance at the end of the year: a) At Bank $______ b) In Hand $______ $_______

Treasurer: ____________ Teacher-in-charge:_____________ Date:______________

( ) ( )